3600+ Main Street Product

Alcatel assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change without notice.
Alcatel, the Alcatel logo, MainStreet, and Newbridge are registered trademarks of Alcatel. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
Copyright © 1999−2006 Alcatel.

All rights reserved.
Disclaimers
Alcatel products are intended for commercial uses. Without the appropriate network design engineering, they must not be
sold, licensed or otherwise distributed for use in any hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in
the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life-support
machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of products could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe
physical or environmental damage. The customer hereby agrees that the use, sale, licence or other distribution of the
products for any such application without the prior written consent of Alcatel, shall be at the customer's sole risk. The
customer hereby agrees to defend and hold Alcatel harmless from any claims for loss, cost, damage, expense or liability that
may arise out of or in connection with the use, sale, licence or other distribution of the products in such applications.
This document may contain information regarding the use and installation of non-Alcatel products. Please note that this
information is provided as a courtesy to assist you. While Alcatel tries to ensure that this information accurately reflects
information provided by the supplier, please refer to the materials provided with any non-Alcatel product and contact the
supplier for confirmation. Alcatel assumes no responsibility or liability for incorrect or incomplete information provided
about non-Alcatel products.
Alcatel has made reasonable efforts to ensure that the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, Release 8.0,
complies in all material respects with the "Referenced Detailed Functional Specification for Newbridge Product Date
Compliance" for all loads. To obtain this document, the Year 2000 Date Compliance status of the other products discussed
in this document, and other information related to Year 2000 Date Compliance, visit the Alcatel Year 2000 Date
Compliance website at the URL:
http://www.newbridge.com/year2000/index.html
However, this does not constitute a representation or warranty. The warranties provided for Alcatel products, if any, are
set forth in contractual documentation entered into by Alcatel and its customers.
This document was originally written in English. If the document you are reading is not in English, please refer to the
English version for a full legally binding description of the product/service.
PRINTED ON
RECYCLED PAPER
Preface
This General Information Book describes Release 8.0 (Generic S1118) of the
3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager.
The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager builds on the successful

architecture of the 3600 MainStreet Bandwidth Manager, and provides a scalable
option to meet the increasing demand for multiple services and higher bandwidths
on a single platform. The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager
supports a wide range of ATM adaptation, circuit- and packet-based voice and data
services, and is compatible with the 3600 MainStreet Bandwidth Manager,
providing seamless integration into existing networks and protecting equipment
investment.
This General Information Book is divided into four sections:
Product overview
Chapters 1 and 2 introduce the features and benefits of the 3600+ MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, and describe its many value-added applications.
A summary of major new Release 8.0 features and capabilities is provided at the end
of chapter 1.
A closer view
Chapters 3 through 10 provide detailed information about 3600+ MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager system design, cards, and interfaces.
Management
Chapters 11 and 12 provide detailed information about 3600+ MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager network and node management capabilities.
iii
Preface
Technical specifications
Chapters 13 through 15 provide a convenient reference summary of
3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager system, card, and power
information.
Following the Technical specifications section are a list of abbreviations and an

index.
iv
Table of contents
Product overview 1 Introduction ........................................................................... 3

End-to-end multiservice delivery..................................................................................4
Built-in intelligence and flexibility................................................................................6
Exceptional software control ...................................................................................... 13
Comprehensive system protection features .............................................................. 15
Easy-access maintenance features .............................................................................. 16
Modular architecture................................................................................................... 19
Major new release 8.0 features.................................................................................... 20
2 Applications......................................................................... 23
SONET and SDH switching ....................................................................................... 26
ATM adaptation........................................................................................................... 28
ISDN bandwidth on demand..................................................................................... 31
Subrate data applications ............................................................................................ 39
Inverse multiplexing .................................................................................................... 66
Super-rate data: up to 1984 kb/s................................................................................. 69
Voice applications ........................................................................................................ 70
Frame relay switching.................................................................................................. 91
X.25 packet switching.................................................................................................. 97
A closer view 3 Design ................................................................................ 105

Shelf architecture........................................................................................................ 106
Alarm panel ................................................................................................................ 109
Power supplies............................................................................................................ 110
Ringing generators..................................................................................................... 111
Cooling equipment.................................................................................................... 112
Distribution panels.................................................................................................... 112
Data termination units.............................................................................................. 116
Site requirements ....................................................................................................... 120
System integrity.......................................................................................................... 121
Control packet switching system.............................................................................. 131
SONET and SDH data communications channels................................................ 133
Node and network synchronization ........................................................................ 133
v
Table of contents
4 Connections ....................................................................... 139

Network connections ................................................................................................ 139
External equipment connections ............................................................................. 142
5 System cards...................................................................... 143

Control card................................................................................................................ 144
Timing card ................................................................................................................ 145
Test card ...................................................................................................................... 146
Test module................................................................................................................. 146
Common Carrier card............................................................................................... 146
Control card configurable features .......................................................................... 147
Test card and
Test module configurable features........................................................................ 150
6 High-speed aggregate cards.............................................. 153

HSA DS3 card............................................................................................................. 155
OC-3 card ................................................................................................................... 155
STM-1 card................................................................................................................. 155
TU-12 mapper card................................................................................................... 155
VT-1.5 mapper card................................................................................................... 156
Configurable parameters........................................................................................... 156
7 Aggregate cards ................................................................ 165

ATM Services card ..................................................................................................... 167
E1 cards ....................................................................................................................... 168
Multiport Aggregate card.......................................................................................... 170
T1 cards....................................................................................................................... 170
TTC2M card............................................................................................................... 173
V.35 PRI card.............................................................................................................. 174
X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI cards............................................................................. 174
Optical Extension cards............................................................................................. 175
8 Voice interface cards and channel units ............................ 193

4WDX channel unit................................................................................................... 195
4WTO line card.......................................................................................................... 195
E&M interfaces........................................................................................................... 195
LGE interfaces............................................................................................................. 196
LGS interfaces............................................................................................................. 196
MRD interfaces .......................................................................................................... 197
vi
Table of contents
9 Data interface cards and channel units ............................. 201

DNIC line card........................................................................................................... 203
2B1Q line card............................................................................................................ 203
2B1Q channel unit..................................................................................................... 203
27LC2 line card........................................................................................................... 204
27LC3 line card........................................................................................................... 204
28LC line card............................................................................................................. 204
4WTO channel unit................................................................................................... 205
DS0-DP channel unit ................................................................................................ 205
BRI S/T card ............................................................................................................... 205
64 kb/s Codirectional card........................................................................................ 206
OCU-DP channel unit .............................................................................................. 206
RS-232 DCC............................................................................................................... 206
RS-422 DCC............................................................................................................... 206
V.35 DCC.................................................................................................................... 207
X.21 DCC.................................................................................................................... 207
10 Application and packet switching cards.......................... 219

Call Processing card................................................................................................... 221
Data Communications Processor card.................................................................... 221
Digital Signal Processing cards and modules, and Inverse Multiplexing cards... 222
FRE card...................................................................................................................... 222
FRS card ...................................................................................................................... 223
PE card ........................................................................................................................ 224
Management 11 Management overview .................................................... 241

Types of management................................................................................................ 242
Service management.................................................................................................. 242
Network management............................................................................................... 244
Node management .................................................................................................... 249
Open interfaces .......................................................................................................... 250
12 Node management .......................................................... 253

Node management sessions...................................................................................... 253
System serial ports...................................................................................................... 255
Configuration and cross-connections ..................................................................... 255
Database management .............................................................................................. 255
Maintenance and diagnostics ................................................................................... 257
vii
Table of contents
Technical 13 System specifications ...................................................... 267

specifications Power supplies............................................................................................................ 267
Ringing generators..................................................................................................... 267
External timing inputs and outputs......................................................................... 268
Standards conformance............................................................................................. 269
14 Voice interface specifications.......................................... 271
15 Power dissipation ............................................................ 289
Abbreviations
Index
viii
Product overview
1
Introduction
Network operators around the world, both carrier and corporate, are faced with the
challenge of keeping their networks in step with the increasing demands of users in
terms of bandwidth, performance, and services offered. A key element is to be able
to efficiently consolidate legacy and new services on a single managed network, as
well as protect the investment in the existing network infrastructure.
The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager is a multiservice

edge/access platform built on Alcatel’s highly successful 3600 MainStreet
Bandwidth Manager. Fully compatible with all the interfaces and functionality of
the 3600 MainStreet Bandwidth Manager, the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice
Bandwidth Manager provides both higher bandwidth and narrowband capacity
for increased density and cost savings, as well as the ability to transport and manage
wideband and broadband services.
When integrated into an existing MainStreet network, the 3600+ MainStreet

Multiservice Bandwidth Manager provides investment protection through the
common use of the UCS interface and resource cards, as well as a highly efficient
link into the backbone network fully managed by the powerful Alcatel 5620
Network Manager.
3
Product overview
Key features of the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager include:
• end-to-end multiservice delivery

• built-in intelligence and flexibility
• exceptional software control
• comprehensive system fault protection features
• easy-access maintenance features
• modular architecture
End-to-end The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager can be used in PTT
multiservice networks to provide end-to-end services, while interworking with existing core
delivery networks. The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager acts as an
access device, feeding a range of circuit- and packet-based services to the local
exchange where the SONET or SDH link is terminated either by a higher-order
ADM, or by a SONET- or SDH-compatible DCS. The ADM or DCS divides the
incoming traffic into the appropriate service networks.
For circuit-switched services, all POTS traffic is directed to the local digital switch
for access to the PSTN. All special services and leased line services are connected to
the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager for access to a special
service overlay network. For packet-based services, traffic is directed to an Alcatel
7470 MSP for ATM and frame relay switching.
Figure 1-1 shows the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager

integrating a wide range of circuit- and packet-switched services from each access
location into the core network.
4
1. Introduction
Figure 1-1: End-to-end multiservice delivery
Access network Core network

Highrise
Alcatel 5620
Network Manager
PBX
T1/E1
3630 MainStreet node
T1/E1
SONET/SDH
inter-office network
Office park or campus Switched
services
TDM
services Special
T1/E1 services
T1/E1 3600+ MainStreet node
OC-3/STM-1 SONET/SDH
3600 MainStreet node DCS/ADM ATM services
access ring
3600+
MainStreet
node
Router
3600 3600+ MainStreet node
MainStreet node
Remote office
2B1Q
V.35
3600+ MainStreet node

Fax
T1/E1
DTU
3600
MainStreet
Video
node
15158
5
Product overview
Built-in By embracing industry standards, 3600+ MainStreet nodes address the public,
intelligence and private, and hybrid network requirements for concurrent circuit, frame relay, and
flexibility X.25 packet switching, for ATM adaptation, and for SONET/SDH multiplexing. Its
software-downloadable resource cards and wide range of WAN, voice, and data
interfaces make it one of the most flexible platforms available on the market today.
Strict adherence to The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager was developed in
international standards accordance with recognized industry standards to provide interfaces and services
that comply with diverse international requirements.
To assist in the planning and implementation of your specific services, your local
Alcatel representative can provide detailed compliance information for your
region, as well as access to the full range of the Alcatel international network
services.
For more information about the standards to which the 3600+ MainStreet
Multiservice Bandwidth Manager conforms, see chapter 13.
Private network Enhancements to standards, where implemented, are optional; their use is at the
efficiencies with central discretion of network designers and operators. Where applicable, enhancements
office services are designed to work within the boundaries of established communications
standards. For example, HCM provides an 800 b/s resolution for subrate data while
respecting standard, 64 kb/s channelized aggregate timeslot boundaries.
Versatile service The 3600+ MainStreet system is designed not only to meet initial service
capabilities and requirements, but to expand easily to handle growth in service demands. With a
applications nonblocking information bandwidth capacity of up to 448 Mb/s (narrowband) or
3 × 155 Mb/s (broadband), the 3600+ MainStreet multiplexer can perform a variety
of high-capacity networking hub and backbone node applications simultaneously.
These applications are:
• digital cross-connect switching

• SONET or SDH switching
• frame relay switching
• X.25 packet switching
• ATM service adaptation
• inverse multiplexing over ATM
• ISDN bandwidth on demand
• line and circuit grooming
• 2.048 Mb/s E1-to-1.544 Mb/s T1 format conversion
• aggregate multiplexing at the customer premises or at a CO
• drop and insert, and bypass multiplexing
• integrated voice and data multiplexing
• inverse multiplexing
6
1. Introduction
• low- and high-speed data transmission and control

• subrate data switching and multiplexing (including data and compressed
voice)
• multidrop data bridging and MJUs
• PCM bridging – digital multipoint
• super-rate data transmission – domestic and international
• G3 fax signal demodulation/modulation
• V.32 modem relay
• voice conference bridging (Hoot ‘n’ Holler)
• ADPCM, HCV, CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A) and LD-CELP (G.728)
voice compression, super-tandem operation, and transport of compressed
voice signals over frame relay (VoFR)
• international Mu-law and A-law companding, signaling, and ringing
conversion
Choice of switching Because the 3600+ MainStreet system provides circuit, frame relay, and X.25 packet
technology – circuit or switching, network designers can choose the switching technology that best
packet
accommodates the transmission characteristics of each end-to-end connection.
The low transit delay and constant bit rates provided by circuit switching are ideal
for highly interactive communication such as voice and video conferencing. In
addition, the cost of a dedicated, end-to-end circuit-switched connection is
justified by the steady and high-average bandwidth usage typical of bulk file
transfer applications. The 3600+ MainStreet system provides a fully nonblocking
DS0 DCS. It performs circuit switching between all interface and resource cards at
the DS0 level. For example, the 3600+ MainStreet system cross-connects voice
channels from an LGS card to a T1 or E1 aggregate card.
Because frame relay has dynamic bandwidth allocation and high transmission
rates, it is ideal for bursty, high-speed, and low-average bandwidth usage
applications such as LAN internetworking. Circuit-switched channels and frame
streams can be configured on the same aggregate link.
The 3600+ MainStreet system supports standards-compliant frame relay services

on the FRS, FRE, and PE cards. These cards provide relay and routing functions at
the data link layer (Layer 2 of the OSI reference model). In addition to supporting
frame relay PVCs, the cards also support:
• frame relay-to-X.25 network and service interworking

• HDLC-based protocol encapsulation
• QoS and fragmentation/defragmentation features for support of
delay-sensitive traffic, such as VoFR and voice and data integration on frame
relay networks
7
Product overview
X.25 packet switching provides reliable data transfer, and port and bandwidth
sharing for access line speeds from 1.2 kb/s to 2 Mb/s. The X.25 FRE and PE cards
provide fully standards-compliant X.25 and X.75 services appropriate for both
public and private networks. To further optimize bandwidth usage in the network,
the MainStreet X.25 Service uses frame relay PVCs as high-speed backbone trunks
between nodes.
The X.25 FRE and PE cards consolidate frame relay and X.25 services on the same
card, providing seamless network and service interworking features, which
simplifies the migration path from X.25 to frame relay and protects hardware
investment.
Software-driven services Node software maintains extensive subrate voice and data applications. These
applications are downloaded to, and run on, DSP cards and modules at the request
of the network operator.
The 3600+ MainStreet system supports DSP cards and modules that provide
different levels of processing power so that customers can purchase only the
processing power they need. Also, because DSP cards are application-independent,
they provide the flexibility to change with network requirements.
Upgrades of node firmware provide an ever-increasing choice of DSP applications,

often without a need to acquire new hardware.
In addition to software-downloadable DSP cards, several optimized,

application-specific DSP modules are available. For example, the VCM3 provides
M48 and M60 ADPCM transcoding. The VCM3 is supported on Dual T1 and
Dual E1 cards.
8
1. Introduction
800 b/s switching The resolution of the 3600+ MainStreet system core switching matrix can be
resolution with subrate enhanced by the SRS DSP application. This application can be downloaded to one
switching or more DSP4 cards at the request of network operators. Fully flexible
space-switching and time-switching between similar data formats is supported for
DDS DS0-A and DS0-B (and DDS-compatible services), ITU-T X.50 Division 3,
HCM, and I.460 (transparent) subrate data channels. For example, drop and
insertion of individual subrate data channels to and from DS0-A and DS0-B, X.50,
HCM, or transparent aggregate channels is supported. For HCM aggregates, the
switching resolution allows drop and insertion of 800 b/s data channels.
SRS is ideal for grooming subrate voice and data circuits prior to their transmission
over the backbone network (for example, when the 3600+ MainStreet system is
configured as a hub to multiple feeder nodes whose aggregate DS0s are
underutilized).
Noncontiguous bandwidth Further bandwidth efficiency is achieved through Alcatel 5620 NM support for
– ideal for rerouting noncontiguous, 800 b/s HCM bandwidth elements. This capability greatly
increases the bandwidth available to the Alcatel 5620 NM to route subrate data
channels during normal and fault conditions. Also, super-rate channels can use
noncontiguous aggregate DS0s.
Choice of aggregate and The 3600+ MainStreet system provides switching capacity for 448 Mb/s
high-speed aggregate (narrowband) or 3 × 155 Mb/s (broadband) of full-duplex, nonblocking
interfaces information bandwidth. With the availability of up to 16 UCSs, the
3600+ MainStreet system supports any combination of up to 32 T1 and/or 104 E1
interfaces. The switching capacity of the 3600+ MainStreet system allows for future
developments with greater port density.
The 3600+ MainStreet system supports the following aggregate and high-speed
aggregate interfaces:
• OC-3 and STM-1 high-speed aggregate cards which, when working in

conjunction with TU-12 and VT-1.5 mapper cards, allow mapping of
narrowband (64 kb/s) voice and data services onto broadband (155 Mb/s)
circuits
• the HSA DS3 card, which allows connection to other DS3-compatible
equipment via coaxial cable
• 4 Mb/s and 16 Mb/s ATM Services cards, which provide ATM service
adaptation for four T1 or E1 interfaces and inverse multiplexing over ATM
(IMA)
These interfaces are recommended for providing adaptation of low-speed,
legacy services to ATM cells for transmission through a multiservices
broadband network.
9
Product overview
• channelized 2.048 Mb/s Single E1, Dual E1, Dual E1-2, and Octal E1 cards with
CAS, CCS, or 31-channel signaling
These interfaces are recommended for accessing both public network facilities
and CPE, such as digital PBXs and LAN bridges.
• channelized 1.544 Mb/s Single T1, Dual T1, Dual T1-2, Octal T1, and
fractional T1 cards with D4 or ESF framing
These interfaces are recommended for accessing both public network facilities
and CPE, such as digital PBXs, remote channel banks and external echo
cancellation units.
• 4-port, n × 48, n × 56, n × 64 kb/s MPA cards with software-configurable
RS-449/V.36, RS-530-A, V.35, or X.21 interfaces
This multiport card provides end users with a low-cost aggregate interface or
network trunks in areas where T1 or E1 links are unavailable.
• single- and dual-port Optical Extension cards with IOTUs for converting
2.048 Mb/s E1 electrical signals to optical signals
These interfaces are used to extend transmission links beyond distances
supported by current copper technology.
• channelized 2.048 Mb/s TTC2M cards, which provide a CMI interface to PBXs
• V.35 PRI, X.21, or X.21 ESI cards for 56 and n × 64 kb/s links between
multiplexers over private or leased lines
These interfaces support n × 56 kb/s and n × 64 kb/s super-rate channels, and
D4 or CAS voice signaling codes.
Direct connect data For direct connection to computers, peripherals, front-end processors, video
interfaces codecs, modems, and digital network links, the 3600+ MainStreet system supports
cards for connection to X.21/V.11, V.35, and V.24/RS-232 interfaces. Subrate
speeds as low as 150 b/s and super-rate speeds of up to 1984 kb/s are supported.
For example, the RS-422 DCC provides four full-duplex interfaces, each
independently configurable as either RS-530-A, RS-449/V.36, X.21, or V.35. This
allows a single DCC to serve diverse data interfaces simply through software
configuration.
The RS-422 DCC is complemented by the UDP, which can be provisioned with
any combination of up to four DCE or DTE (or a combination of both) RS-530-A,
RS-449/V.36, X.21, or V.35 interface modules. Interface modules provide the
appropriate connector for each interface type supported by the RS-422 DCC. For
more information about the UDP, see chapter 3.
In addition, a 64 kb/s Codirectional card is available that provides four

synchronous interfaces to G.703-compatible, 64 kb/s codirectional circuits.
These circuits would typically be connected to 64 kb/s timeslots in a 2.048 Mb/s
G.704-framed signal.
10
1. Introduction
Basic rate (2B+D) The 3600+ MainStreet system offers basic rate (2B+D) interface circuits for the
interfaces and remote remote distribution of data to compact and network-manageable DTUs. The
DTUs 2B+D interface represents a combination of the NT and TA functions of the ISDN
reference model. DTUs offer V.24/RS-232, X.21/V.11, and V.35 interfaces.
For off-premises applications, the combination of an extended-range 2700

MainStreet series DTU and a 2B1Q line card, 27LC2 or 27LC3 line card, or 2B1Q
channel unit provides two fully network-manageable 64 kb/s channels over a single
twisted pair—an attractive alternative to the traditional OCU and DSU
configurations used for access to DDS network services. Also, this combination
allows PTT authorities to provide flexible X.50 network access services over existing
2-wire facilities.
All DTUs are completely network-manageable, provide remote DCE or DTE ports,
and use a 2-wire, twisted-pair loop. DTUs can be located beside desktop equipment
that is physically remote from the 3600+ MainStreet system. The maximum loop
length supported depends on the DTU series, the type of copper cable used, and the
cable’s associated resistance factor. For example, the 2600 MainStreet series DTUs
support a loop length of up to 3.3 km (2 mi) using 24 AWG copper cable with a
resistance of 84 Ω/km; the 2700 MainStreet series DTUs support a loop length of
up to 7.2 km (4.5 mi) using 24 AWG copper cable with a resistance of 84 Ω/km.
Multirate HDSL interfaces The 3600+ MainStreet system offers multirate HDSL interface circuits for the
and remote DTUs remote distribution of data to compact, network-manageable 2801 MainStreet
HDSL DTUs. Two versions are available:
• the 2-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, with the 28LC line card, provides
n × 64 kb/s (up to 1 Mb/s) service over a single twisted-pair loop
• the 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, with the 28LC line card, provides
n × 128 kb/s (up to 2 Mb/s) service over a double twisted-pair loop
Both versions provide one remote DCE port and support V.35, V.36/RS-449, or
X.21 interfaces.
11
Product overview
The DTU can be collocated with desktop equipment that is physically remote from
the 3600+ MainStreet system. The maximum loop length supported depends on
variations in cable characteristics and impedance, the presence of bridge taps,
impulse noise, electrical noise, and crosstalk. For example, the 2-wire version of the
2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU supports a loop length of up to 4.0 km (2.5 mi) using
26 AWG cable with a data rate of 256 kb/s. The 4-wire version supports a data rate
of 512 kb/s over the same distance.
Analog voice interfaces Analog voice interfaces allow analog telephone CO exchanges, PBXs, and
telephone sets to connect to the 3600+ MainStreet system. Six different analog voice
interfaces are supported:
• LGS, which connects the network directly to either a PBX or telephone set
• LGE, which connects the network directly to a telephone CO exchange or PBX
• E&M, the popular, short-distance private-wire circuit used to connect
switching systems (for example, PBXs) to each other over T1 or E1 facilities
• MRD, which provides an on- or off-premises, single-circuit, 2-wire terminal
interface
• 4WTO, which is commonly used in analog cellular networks to provide
on-premises, 4-wire applications for which there is no requirement for
signaling
• 4WDX, a 4-wire transmission line interface that provides bidirectional on- or
off-hook signaling, and is used to interface with equipment that converts DX
signaling to E&M signaling
Analog voice interfaces are available on multiport cards and on single-port channel
units. Cards are intended for on-premise applications; channel units are intended
for off-premise and CO applications. Digital voice access over T1 and E1 is also
supported.
Central office compliant Channel units, the Common Carrier and Test cards, and the Test module have
and international voice been specifically designed to meet public telephone company requirements.
frequency channel units
The following channel units are available:
• LGS
• LGE
• E&M
• MRD and 2WMRD
• 4WTO
• 2B1Q
• OCU-DP
• DS0-DP
• 4WDX
12
1. Introduction
The Common Carrier card accommodates any combination of up to four channel

units, each with individual circuit modularity (that is, a channel unit can be
removed from the Common Carrier card without affecting service on the other
three channel units).
The Test card provides metallic test access, and the optional Test module provides
analog and digital test access to any channel unit, and 64 kb/s digital access to the
OCU-DP channel unit. Test configurations are controlled by software and include
direct and high-impedance monitor, split access, 4-wire loopback, and integral
BERT.
Dissimilar voice and data The 3600+ MainStreet system connects dissimilar voice and data interfaces over
accommodated digital transmission facilities. For example, an X.21 device can be cross-connected
to a V.35 device, or an LGS circuit can be cross-connected to an E&M trunk, either
directly within a node or at endpoint nodes joined by an aggregate link. The
conversion between interfaces is performed internally by node system software.
Exceptional All hardware for the 3600+ MainStreet system is software-configurable; there are
software control no mechanical switches or jumpers on any card. This reduces the number of
on-site visits by skilled personnel, as node configuration and reconfiguration can
be performed by software commands, issued locally or from a remote network
control center anywhere. For example, software commands can be issued to
configure an E&M card for 2-wire or 4-wire circuits, to specify transmission level
points for any voice port, to select the speed and format of data transmission, or to
set cross-connections between ports, aggregates and resource cards.
Node and network The 3600+ MainStreet system can be managed using these products:
management products
• Alcatel 5620 Network Manager
This sophisticated network manager uses a GUI that runs on a UNIX-based
workstation from Sun Microsystems.
• Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Network Manager
This PC-based software product provides remote access to the
Alcatel 5620 NM from laptops and personal computers.
• Alcatel 5521 PC Element Manager
This PC-based software product provides menu-based management of up to
100 nodes from laptops and personal computers.
• Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager
This PC-based software product is intended for on-site node commissioning
and maintenance using the Control, frame relay, and X.25 cards. The software
runs on laptops and personal computers.
• ASCII terminal
Any ASCII (VT100) terminal or PC-based terminal emulation software can be
used to initiate a node management session with the Control, frame relay, X.25
and call processing cards through a built-in NMTI.
13
Product overview
Communications The Control card manages the following communications functions for the
3600+ MainStreet system:
• intrashelf communications (card-to-card)

• external communication to a management system, such as the Alcatel 5620
NM, through either a serial or Ethernet port using CPSS
• external communication to other equipment using CPSS over inband
channels
• external communication to the SONET or SDH data communications
channel (section or regenerator DCC for 192 kb/s channels)
See chapter 3 for information about CPSS, and SONET and SDH data
communications channels.
Software upgrading and The 3600+ MainStreet system features fully upgradeable system software. The
downloadable Control card and some application cards can be easily upgraded to exploit the latest
software-based
system software release simply by downloading the software remotely from the
applications
Alcatel 5620 NM.
Certain cards (such as the ATM Services, frame relay, X.25, and call processing
cards as well as some digital signal processing cards) support software upgrading.
This feature greatly simplifies system upgrades by allowing new versions of card
software to be downloaded locally to a card using the Alcatel 5521 EM or Craft
Interface.
Within the node, DSP card and DPM applications are software-downloadable
from the common control DSP application library. This allows a single DSP or
DPM to serve different applications at different times.
Centralized network The centralized approach to network management reduces internode control
management overhead on the network. Connection management functions are handled by the
5620 NM using a state of the art standard processor.
In the centralized network architecture, the higher-level networking functions,

such as path routing, are controlled by the Alcatel 5620 NM. Functions, such as
managing port configuration parameters and cross-connect information, are
assigned to the nodes.
In older, distributed network architectures, each node must communicate with

every other node. Any change in node status must be reported to all nodes in the
network. These architectures create a flood of status messages, effectively limiting
the size of the network. In contrast, centralized control reduces network traffic,
enabling much larger networks to be constructed.
14
1. Introduction
In addition to supporting more nodes, the Alcatel 5620 NM is designed to run on

industry-standard computer platforms offered by Sun Microsystems. The Sun
platforms provide high performance and allow customers to take advantage of
third-party development of workstation technology at no extra cost. Furthermore,
because network managers perform the network management functions, the nodes
require simpler, less expensive CPU components.
Shared node usage – The combination of centralized network management and fully
network partitioning software-controlled nodes provides a powerful foundation for advanced network
management functions. For example, the Alcatel 5620 NM allows a physical
network to be managed as multiple VBNs, VSNs, or a combination of the two.
Corporations gain economic advantages by multiplexing all enterprise information

over common transmission facilities, while at the same time letting operational
groups within the organization manage their parts of the network. For
transmission service providers, the ability to provide end-customer control of
managed bandwidth services represents new revenue-generating services that stem
bypass and extend the life of their equipment investment.
Comprehensive A suite of system protection capabilities ensures that 3600+ MainStreet nodes
system protection provide high levels of availability and accessibility. Protection begins at the
features component level with state-of-the-art, low-power IC technology. At the system
level, protection options include full control and switching redundancy, power
supply redundancy, interface redundancy, and automatic path rerouting.
Energy-efficient design The 3600+ MainStreet system requires less power than comparable products from
other vendors. A fully loaded 3600+ MainStreet system requires only 300 W to
operate, reducing power and heat dissipation problems. A separate, dedicated UPS
is seldom required because the low power requirement of the 3600+ MainStreet
system allows it to tie into existing PBX or computer power backup systems.
Hot standby protection All 3600+ MainStreet shelves support redundant control complex and load-sharing
power supplies for hot standby capability that automatically switches to the backup
cards and power supplies when a fault is detected. All redundant cards and power
supplies can be independently installed and removed without interrupting service.
In addition, the Single 2.048 Mb/s E1, Octal E1, Single 1.544 Mb/s T1, X.21 PRI,
and V.35 PRI aggregate cards, and the high-speed aggregate cards, can be
configured for one-to-one card redundancy.
If the node becomes isolated from the network manager, it continues to function
as programmed. To reduce the likelihood of node isolation, redundant and remote
Alcatel 5620 NM configurations are supported. In addition, CPSS is designed to
reroute around link failures, and can be configured to use backup modem links.
15
Product overview
Alternate path routing End-to-end circuit paths can be protected by an alternate route should the
preferred route become unavailable. The 3600+ MainStreet system supports the
following types of path protection:
• RAPID and ISDN leased-line protection, which are implemented at the node
level by the 3600+ MainStreet system
• AAR, which is implemented at the network level by the Alcatel 5620 NM
• unidirectional path switched rings, which are implemented at the network
level by the 3600+ MainStreet system
Timing sources The 3600+ MainStreet system can be programmed to derive system timing from a
variety of sources:
• external dedicated timing sources

• interface cards
• Timing card (when this source is chosen, timing is in free-run mode and the
system is synchronized to a Stratum 3 oscillator with a long-term accuracy
within ±4.6 ppm)
When a source is impaired, the 3600+ MainStreet system enters holdover mode. In
holdover mode, the system is synchronized to the long-term average frequency of
the last timing source used.
For more information about timing and synchronization, see “Node and network
synchronization” in chapter 3.
Easy-access A suite of system maintenance features provides network operators with easy access
maintenance to status information and diagnostic tests.
features
Dual maintenance ports The Control and DCP cards are equipped with dual V.24/RS-232 maintenance
ports for connection to network management products or the NMTI. These ports
can be configured for direct local access or for modem access. In control-
redundant configurations, the currently inactive Control card ports are disabled to
allow Y-cabling and ensure communications with the active Control card. The
frame relay, X.25, and call processing cards also provide V.24/RS-232 maintenance
ports.
16
1. Introduction
Automatic and directed Startup diagnostics, which provide program integrity, memory, and equipment
diagnostics configuration checks, are run automatically during system initialization. During
regular operation, the system can be configured to run background diagnostics on
a cyclical basis, and the system operator can activate diagnostics selectively
(including analog and digital loopbacks). If a voice circuit (or an aggregate channel
cross-connected to a voice circuit) is required for a call while a test is in progress,
the test on that circuit is aborted.
Digital connection Digital connection maintenance allows access to the data paths through the central
maintenance switching matrix of the 3600+ MainStreet system, so that you can verify and change
data and signaling carried between two connected target circuits.
Connection maintenance provides these functions:
• monitor maintenance
• split-through and split-back maintenance
• terminate and leave maintenance
For more information about digital connection maintenance, see chapter 12.
Digital and metallic split The optional Test card provides both digital and metallic test access connections.
and monitor test access
Digital test connections allow access to any DS0 from the faceplate of the Test card
to configure interface speed, error correction, and fault signaling.
Metallic test connections provide direct metallic access to tip and ring pairs from
the faceplate of the Test card. The Test card supports these metallic test
connections:
• direct monitor
• high-impedance monitor
• split access
• 4-wire loopback
For more information about digital and metallic split and monitor test access, see
chapter 12.
Analog, digital, and BER The optional Test module, which is installed on the Test card, generates an analog
tests or digital sinusoidal test tone that has a configurable frequency and output level.
Analog tone testing conducts tests on cabling connections, external equipment,
channel units, and digital components. Digital tone testing measures the amplitude
and frequency of the test tone on voice circuits in digital PCM format.
BER tests allow you to check the quality of data paths.
17
Product overview
Continuous alarm The 3600+ MainStreet system is continuously monitored for abnormal conditions
monitoring and significant events. The Control cards monitor events and conditions for the
system components, as well as for the system, interface, and application cards. The
frame relay and X.25 cards monitor local events and conditions on the card, and
maintain card-specific alarm queues. The types of alarm notification that may be
raised by the 3600+ MainStreet system are:
• configuration alarms
• equipment faults
• loss of aggregate link signaling or framing alignments
• external alarm activities (tail circuit status)
• synchronization timing source changes
• external contact closures (alarm panel)
• startup diagnostic errors
Categorized and recorded The cards and shelves are monitored for significant events and abnormal
alarms conditions. When such an event or condition is detected, an alarm record is
created. Individual alarms are logged to alarm queues of varying degrees of severity.
Each alarm management mode (standard mode or TEP-1(E) mode), has different
names for the severity classifications.
Alarm messages in both modes can be viewed, acknowledged, and deleted using an
Alcatel 5620 NM or the NMTI. All queues hold up to 1000 alarms, except for the
frame relay and X.25 card alarm queues, which hold up to 256 alarms. Queues can
be configured to discard new alarms when the queue is full, or to overwrite the
oldest alarms.
Standard mode
Standard mode supports two types of trouble and event notification:
• alarms
• diagnostic notifications
Alarms indicate conditions that have an immediate or potential impact on the

operation of the node. Alarms require technical attention; the severity of the alarm
dictates the level of attention required.
Diagnostic notifications report system events (for example, a database reset) or

alarms raised during node maintenance. Every diagnostic alarm raised by the node
is automatically cleared and stored to provide historical maintenance information;
they do not require technical attention.
Standard mode classifies alarms and diagnostic notifications according to the

following severities: critical, major, minor, or diagnostic.
18
1. Introduction
TEP-1(E) mode
In TEP-1(E) mode, each alarm may be categorized by the operator as either
prompt, deferred, or in station. Once categorized, alarm messages are recorded in
the corresponding alarm queue. All alarms are identified by the date and time, a
unique number, and a message describing the alarm. Alarms can also be
categorized as none (meaning alarm occurrences are ignored and no information
is logged).
Remote or local alarm Alarms can be logged locally to a printer, the NMTI, or a network management
logging product directly connected to the node. Alarms can also be logged remotely to the
network operations center using either CPSS or a modem link to transport alarm
information.
Flexible external alarm The 3600+ MainStreet system supports extensive external alarm capabilities, such
support as:
• blower unit, power supply, and ringing generator failure alarm inputs
• user-configurable external alarm names
• major and minor visual and audio external alarm outputs
Loopbacks The 3600+ MainStreet system supports up to 100 circuit loopbacks, up to 184 slot
(or link) loopbacks, and up to 40 port loopbacks (on the MPA card)
simultaneously. Loopbacks can be invoked by the network operator or by
network-generated requests, such as DDS. Analog loopbacks occur at the attached
device interface, and digital loopbacks occur at the junction of the card and
backplane. Loopbacks can be applied to individual channels on a link or to an
entire link.
Modular The minimum configuration of a 3600+ MainStreet system provides access to eight
architecture UCSs and provides a switching capacity of 128 Mb/s. Access to all 16 UCSs can be
gained by adding a Narrowband Switching module on the Control card. The
addition of a Narrowband Switching module provides a switching capacity of
448 Mb/s. Access to the HSA slots is gained by adding a Broadband Switching
module on the Control card. The addition of a Broadband Switching module
provides a 155 Mb/s switching capacity at the VT or TU level for each HSA slot.
Universal card slots The UCSs accommodate any of the aggregate interface cards, voice and data
determine application interface cards, and application cards. The cards chosen from these many card
options determine the functionality any one 3600+ MainStreet system can provide.
19
Product overview
Shelf options There are two variants of the 3600+ MainStreet shelf: a 19-inch shelf and a 23-inch
shelf. The shelves are compact in design: the 19-inch shelf measures 78 cm (31.5 in.)
high, 47.8 cm (19 in.) wide, and 24.5 cm (9.5 in.) deep; and the 23-inch shelf
measures 62.2 cm (24.5 in.) high, 58.5 cm (23 in.) wide, and 30.8 (12.1 in.) deep.
The 19-inch shelf fits directly into standard 19-inch racks or into 23-inch racks
using extender brackets.
Major new release This section summarizes the major new features and enhancements that are
8.0 features supported in Release 8.0.
System features Release 8.0 introduces a new memory module.
Memory module 2
The Memory module 2 is introduced for use with Release 8.0 generics onward. The
Memory module 2 contains 8 Mb of Flash and 16 Mb of DRAM.
Aggregate features Release 8.0 introduces the HSA DS3 card, the Octal T1 card, and 32-port versions
of the TU-12 mapper card and VT-1.5 mapper card.
HSA DS3 card

The HSA DS3 card allows for connection to other DS3-compatible equipment via
a coaxial cable, and supports a total of 28 T1 line interfaces. The HSA DS3 card
terminates the DS3 rate signal, multiplexes and demultiplexes the constituent DS1
signals asynchronously, and cross-connects constituent DS0s to different outgoing
signals.
Octal T1 card
The Octal T1 card accesses both fractional and full T1 network services and CPE
such as digital PBXs and remote channel units. It provides eight T1 interfaces and
is available with a DSX-1 termination.
Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter

The Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter provides an alternate means of connecting
CPE directly to a 3600+ MainStreet unit. It allows I/O connectors to be connected
via wire-wrap rather than via the typical AMP/CHAMP cable and distribution
panel.
32-port TU-12 mapper card

The new version of the TU-12 mapper card extends the port density to 32
narrowband E1 ports, each with a fixed connection to an associated broadband
circuit on the TU-12 card.
20
1. Introduction
32-port VT-1.5 mapper card

The new version of the VT-1.5 mapper card extends the port density to 32
narrowband T1 ports, each with a fixed connection to an associated broadband
circuit on the VT-1.5 card.
For more information about the HSA DS3 card, see chapter 6. For more
information about the Octal T1 card, and about the 32-port TU-12 mapper card
and the 32-port VT-1.5 mapper card, see chapter 7.
Data features Release 8.0 introduces the 27LC3 line card and DPM3 module, support for a 4-wire
2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, the 2752 MainStreet DTU, and new functionality for
the 2751 and 2753 MainStreet DTUs.
27LC3 line card and DPM3 module

The 27LC3 line card provides 12 ports of 2B1Q connectivity for the 2751, 2752, and
2753 MainStreet DTUs. The functionality of the 12-port 27LC3 line card is
identical to that of the 6-port 27LC2 line card, except that it supports double data
bandwidth.
The DPM3 module is supported with the 27LC3 line card, providing subrate
multiplexing for all 12 ports. The DPM3 supports only HCM in this release.
For more information about the 27LC3 line card, see chapter 9.
Support for 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU

The new 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU allows for low-cost, high-bandwidth
access from the edge of the network, with selectable loop and customer data rates.
The 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU provides two wires to each of two
(1 Mb/s) ports on the 28LC line card, for a maximum line speed of 2 Mb/s.
For more information on the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, see chapters 3 and 9.
2752 MainStreet DTU and expanded functionality for 2751 and 2753 MainStreet
DTUs
The 2752 MainStreet DTU supports both X.21 and RS-449 interfaces in either a
redundant or a 2-port nonredundant configuration.
Enhanced functionality for the 2751 and 2753 MainStreet series DTUs includes
data port redundancy support, visual indicators, OOS lead handling, integral
BERT, built-in self tests and reporting, and n × 64 kb/s super-rate data interface
speed.
For more information about these DTUs, refer to chapter 9 and to the
2600/2700/2800 MainStreet Family Data Termination Units (DTUs) data sheet.
21
Product overview
Management and Release 8.0 improves control redundancy by introducing failure switching as an
configuration features alternative to demerit switching (supported in earlier releases).
Failure switching determines the system health based on the severity of failures that
occur on each control complex. The control complex with the most severe failure
is the inactive complex. An activity switch occurs when the active complex develops
a problem that is more severe than any problem on the inactive complex, even if
the inactive complex has several minor problems.
Other features Release 8.0 introduces an enhanced version of the external ringing generator. The
enhanced external ringing generator assembly provides:
• wider input voltage operational range of -38 to -75 V dc

• dual dc inputs for dc feed redundancy on a separate connector
• customer-selectable ringing frequency and dc bias
• pull-out tray for easy access to ringing units from the front panel
For more information about the external ringing generator, see chapter3.
22
2
Applications
This chapter describes the wide range of value-added applications supported by the
3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, including:
• SONET and SDH switching

• ATM adaptation
• ISDN bandwidth on demand
• subrate data applications: DDS, X.50, HCM, and I.460 transparent rate
adaption; multidrop data bridging; subrate multiplexing; subrate switching
and Switched 56 kb/s access
• inverse multiplexing
• super-rate data access (up to 1984 kb/s)
• voice applications: ADPCM G.721, HCV, CS-A-CELP G.729 and G.729
Annex A, LD-CELP G.728 voice compression, super-tandem operation, and
VoFR; G3 fax and V.32 modem relay; and echo cancellation; international
aggregate and voice signaling, and companding conversion; analog interface
conversion; voice conference bridging
• frame relay switching
• X.25 packet switching
23
Product overview
Both Telco-standard and optional proprietary applications are supported using

one or more of the following resources:
• high-speed aggregates
• multipurpose, software-downloadable application cards and modules, such as
the IMC, DSP card, and the DPM
• hardware-optimized, application-specific cards and modules, such as the FRS,
FRE, X.25 FRE, and PE cards, and the VCM3 and CCM
• system software Generic 1118, which resides on the Control card
Table 2-1 lists the applications supported by the 3600+ MainStreet system and the
specific resources they require.
Table 2-1: 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager value-added applications
Application Card or module
C D D D D D D I F D D V C F P O S T V A
P S S S S S S M R P P C C R E C T U T T
C P P P P P P C S M M M M E 3 M 1 1 M
2 3 4 5 5 1 2 3 1 2 5 S
H C
SONET mapping ✓ ✓
and switching
SDH mapping and ✓ ✓

switching
ATM adaptation ✓
X.25 services ✓ ✓
Frame relay ✓ ✓ ✓
switching
Subrate switching ✓
ISDN bandwidth ✓
on demand
Inverse ✓ ✓
multiplexing
DDS Access ✓ ✓ ✓
DDS Core ✓ ✓
X.50 (Div. 3); X.50 ✓ ✓ ✓
Telco (Div. 2 and 3)
HCM or ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
transparent rate
adaption
HCM with 4 kb/s ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

CPSS
PCM bridging ✓ ✓ ✓
ADPCM ✓
24
2. Applications
Application Card or module
C D D D D D D I F D D V C F P O S T V A
P S S S S S S M R P P C C R E C T U T T
C P P P P P P C S M M M M E 3 M 1 1 M
2 3 4 5 5 1 2 3 1 2 5 S
H C
ADPCM with G3 ✓
fax
✓
CS-A-CELP(G.729
and G.729A)
CS-LD-CELP ✓
(G.728)
Bulk HCV ✓ ✓
HCV ✓
HCV and G3 fax ✓
Super-tandem ✓ ✓ ✓
operation
VoFR ✓ ✓
Echo cancellation ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Voice conference ✓
bridging
PCM companding ✓
conversion
G3 fax ✓
V.32 bis modem ✓
relay
25
Product overview
SONET and SDH SONET and SDH are standards for signaling in fiber optic networks in
switching North America and Europe, respectively. The SONET and SDH standards define
the format, optical line rate, wavelength, power levels, pulse shape, and coding for
optical networks. The creation of these standards ensures a long-term solution for
inter-vendor development of interfaces that allow the transport of existing digital
services over fiber optic networks. The 3600+ MainStreet system supports the OC-3
SONET level through the OC-3 card, and the STM-1 SDH level through the
STM-1 card.
Since SONET and SDH networks are synchronous, only single-stage multiplexing
and demultiplexing is required; there is no requirement, as there is in asynchronous
networks, for multistage multiplexing. Single-stage multiplexing and
demultiplexing eliminates the need for back-to-back multiplexing while inserting
data into or extracting data from a network. Data can be added to or dropped from
a SONET or SDH signal without demultiplexing and remultiplexing the entire
SONET or SDH signal. This makes SONET and SDH equipment compact and
efficient. A SONET or SDH signal is bandwidth-flexible and can support
transmission of a combination of services including broadband data switching,
high-speed packet-switching and video conferencing. A basic SONET or SDH
signal is a structured frame that is divided into overhead layers and a payload
envelope. The overhead layers contain transport and payload information and can
be used for maintenance operations. The payload carries signals that have been
mapped into a payload envelope.
The flexibility of the SONET and SDH frame formats allows for efficient mapping
of network services into payload envelopes. On the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice
Bandwidth Manager, the mapping function is provided by the TU-12 Mapper and
VT-1.5 Mapper cards.
TU-12 Mapper cards have TU-12 broadband circuits and VT-1.5 Mapper cards
have VT-1.5 broadband circuits. Each Mapper card has a fixed broadband
circuit-to narrowband port connection. When Mapper card broadband circuits are
connected to broadband circuits on OC-3 or STM-1 cards, the Mapper cards
transmit narrowband DS0-based data and voice from circuits connected to the
narrowband port to a SONET or SDH network.
The 3600+ MainStreet system can be set up to support four basic applications:
high-density time-division multiplexing, linear add/drop multiplexing, signal
termination, and ring multiplexing. Traffic protection is supported in all shelf
configurations.
26
2. Applications
High-density time-division The 3600+ MainStreet shelf can be set up to support time-division multiplexing.
multiplexing The basic shelf configuration provides access to 8 UCSs; if a Narrowband module
is installed on the Control card, access to 16 UCSs is provided. In this application,
no HSA cards are installed; therefore, no SONET or SDH functionality is
supported.
Linear add/drop For this application, a series of 3600+ MainStreet shelves are set up to support the
multiplexing and signal adding and dropping of data in a linear network. The shelves at either end of the
termination
linear network provide signal termination. HSA cards can be used in these
applications, providing SONET or SDH functionality. Traffic protection is
supported on a link level.
Figure 2-1 shows an example of how 3600+ MainStreet shelves are used in linear
add/drop multiplexing and signal termination applications.
Figure 2-1: Example of linear add/drop multiplexing and signal termination applications
Linear broadband network
3600+ MainStreet 3600+ MainStreet 3600+ MainStreet

node node node
Narrowband Narrowband
and broadband and broadband
signal termination signal termination
9770
Ring multiplexing The ring topology consists of a minimum of three 3600+ MainStreet shelves. The
advantages of ring multiplexing include support for linear add/drop multiplexing
and signal termination applications, and traffic protection at the circuit level which
allows for quick recovery of service in the event of a failure.
Figure 2-2 shows an example of how 3600+ MainStreet shelves are set up in a ring.
27
Product overview
Figure 2-2: Example of a ring application
3600+ MainStreet
node
Corporate
PBX 3600+ MainStreet 3600+ MainStreet 3600+ MainStreet 3600+ MainStreet
node node node node
Linear add/drop
SONET or
SDH UPSR
3600+ MainStreet
node
POTS
Public
network
9771
ATM adaptation This section describes the ATM adaptation methods supported on the ATM
Services cards, and how bandwidth is distributed to support these adaptation
methods.
Adaptation methods Two adaptation methods are supported on the ATM Services cards: AAL1 which
provides circuit emulation service, and AAL5 which provides HDLC service.
The circuit emulation service formats data and signaling for n × 64 kb/s circuits
into constant bit rate AAL1 cells for transport over an ATM network. Circuit
emulation service can be applied to traffic from voice, data, aggregate and DSP
circuits, and frame relay packets.
The HDLC service formats HDLC and frame relay packets into variable or
unspecified bit rate AAL5 cells for transport over an ATM network. HDLC service
can be applied to traffic from data, aggregate and DSP circuits, and frame relay
packets.
The ATM Services card supports service and network interworking modes. Service
interworking mode translates frame relay into ATM for transport across an ATM
network to ATM devices. Network interworking mode transports frame relay
across an ATM network to another frame relay network.
28
2. Applications
In addition to supporting ATM adaptation, the ATM Services card provides:
• traffic management for frame relay and ATM

• connection admission control
• scaling factor
• redundancy (load sharing of traffic)
• timing and synchronization
Figure 2-3 illustrates the multiservice aspect of ATM adaptation.
Figure 2-3: Multiservice ATM adaptation
Central office Business park/customer premises
PSTN 4WTO
E&M/LGS
Alcatel 5620
Network Manager Subrate
(DDS, X.50)
ISDN
n x 56/64 kb/s
ATM V.35/X.21
infrastructure n x T1/E1 ATM
T1/E1
DDS 3600+ MainStreet

node Frame relay
X.50
with ATM Services card
PSTN
ISDN
Internet
X.25
15159
Bandwidth distribution Bandwidth distribution is instrumental in providing adaptation services. The ATM
Services card uses two types of bandwidth: backplane and network bandwidth. The
3600+ MainStreet unit provides 16 Mb/s of backplane bandwidth. The 4 Mb/s
ATM Services card supports 4 Mb/s of backplane bandwidth, and the 16 Mb/s
ATM Services card supports 16 Mb/s of backplane bandwidth. Network
bandwidth support is the same for each card variant, but is allocated differently
depending on the configuration.
29
Product overview
The ATM Services card provides four T1 or E1 network interfaces (physical ports),
and is equipped with an IMA module, which provides one ATM network interface
(logical port). Each T1 or E1 port provides an independent network link, or can be
assigned to an IMA group for combined transmission. An IMA group can be
inversely multiplexed to form an aggregate ATM cell stream (see “Inverse
multiplexing” in this chapter for more information).
Each T1 port provides 1.5 Mb/s of network bandwidth, for a total of 6 Mb/s; each
E1 port provides 2 Mb/s of network bandwidth, for a total of 8 Mb/s. The IMA
module provides a logical port for an IMA group, which can be composed of up to
four T1 or E1 physical ports and their associated links. The effective network
bandwidth for the IMA port is approximately n × 1.5 Mb/s (T1) or n × 2 Mb/s
(E1), where n is the number of ports in the IMA group. The values are approximate
as IMA overhead must be factored into the total bandwidth.
Transport entities
The ATM Services card uses bandwidth to support:
• ASC circuits
An ASC circuit represents 64 kb/s of TDM bandwidth on the system
backplane. ASC circuits, which are organized into ASC circuit groups, act as
intermediate points between the TDM and ATM sides of the ATM Services
card. On the TDM side, the circuits cross-connect through the Control card
switching matrix to 64 kb/s circuits on other UCS cards. On the ATM side, the
circuits are assigned VC parameters to define an AAL1 VC, or are assigned to
a frame stream circuit that connects to an AAL5 VC.
The 4 Mb/s ATM Services card provides 60 ASC circuits, organized into two
circuit groups with 30 circuits per group.
The 16 Mb/s ATM Services card provides 248 ASC circuits, organized into
eight circuit groups with 31 ASC circuits per group. The four physical ports
and ATM overhead limit the number of usable ASC circuits to a maximum of
104 E1 or 84 T1 circuits.
• frame stream circuits
A frame stream on the ATM Services card specifies the bandwidth over which
HDLC-formatted connections operate. HDLC-formatted traffic includes
frames configured for transparent HDLC applications or frame relay HDLC
applications. A frame stream circuit is the entity used to configure and connect
a frame stream. Frame streams are specified by frame stream circuit identifiers.
The 4 Mb/s ATM Services card supports 44 FSCs, providing 2816 kb/s
(44 × 64 kb/s), providing a combined bandwidth of up to 2816 kb/s for
HDLC-formatted traffic. An individual stream carries up to 1920 kb/s. Future
developments on the AAL1/5 variant include support for 62 FSCs.
30
2. Applications
The 16 Mb/s ATM Services card supports 44 FSCs, providing 2816 kb/s
(44 × 64 kb/s), providing a combined bandwidth of up to 2816 kb/s for
HDLC-formatted traffic. An individual stream carries up to 1984 kb/s. Future
developments on the AAL1/5 variant include support for 62 FSCs.
• DLCs
An FSC configured for frame relay interworking can support up to 250 DLCs;
however, the 4 Mb/s and 16 Mb/s ATM Services cards support a total of 1024
DLCs. Each FSC configured for transparent HDLC traffic counts as one DLC
toward the 1024 DLCs per card limit.
• VPs
The ATM Services card supports 32 VPs per port (E1, T1, and IMA), with a
VPI range of 0 to 31 and a VCI range of 32 to 65535 (per VP).
• PVCs
A PVC connects a backplane circuit to a VC on an ATM link. VCs carrying
AAL5-adapted traffic require frame relay-to-ATM PVC configuration. VCs
carrying AAL1-adapted traffic require AAL1 PVC configuration.
ISDN bandwidth ISDN in 3600+ MainStreet systems provides customers with an alternate transport
on demand facility for leased-line applications. For example, customers can use ISDN
bandwidth to address the backup and disaster recovery requirements of their
leased-line network; service providers can offer ISDN access to their managed
bandwidth services networks (see Figures 2-4 and 2-5).
Figure 2-4: Advanced managed bandwidth services
Remote
CPE
3600+
MainStreet
node
3600+
MainStreet 3600+
node MainStreet
T1/E1
ISDN node
Multiservice backbone
network
ISDN as an access facility ISDN

to extended leased-line or frame relay
services to customers who: T1/E1 T1/E1
• are not directly accessible
• only require part-time connectivity 3600+
MainStreet
node
ISDN within the backbone network:
• for backup and disaster recovery solutions
• to access nodes only reachable through
another provider's network
3600+ MainStreet
node
11238
31
Product overview
Figure 2-5: Extended corporate networks
Remote
CPE
3600+
MainStreet
node
3600+
MainStreet 3600+
T1/E1 node MainStreet
node
ISDN
Multiservice backbone
network
T1/E1 ISDN
ISDN as an access facility
to multiservices backbone network:
branch office, telecommuter connectivity T1/E1
remote learning, telemedicine
3600+
MainStreet
ISDN as an adjunct to leased lines within node
the multiservices backbone network:
rapid deployment of interim
and overflow services
leased versus switched tariff optimization
flexible leased-line backup and
disaster recovery solutions 3600+ MainStreet
node
11237
The 3600+ MainStreet system supports a variety of ISDN applications on the CPC,
IMC, BRI S/T card, Dual T1-2 card, Dual E1 card, Dual E1-2 card, and
2B1Q channel unit. These applications fall under four categories:
• ISDN access
• ISDN channel search
• ISDN protocol tracing and status message monitoring
• ISDN transport
ISDN access ISDN leased-line backup is supported on the CPC and can be used to back up
two, twenty-three or thirty 64 kb/s B channels, depending on whether the interface
is basic rate, T1 primary rate, or E1 primary rate.
ISDN leased-line backup

The ISDN backup application provides RAPID protection of leased lines using
ISDN. For situations in which out-of-band signaling is not needed and the call
setup for the backup connection can have a delay of 1 or 2 seconds, ISDN
B-channel backup is more cost-effective than standard RAPID.
In backup applications, a protected channel normally transported by a leased line

uses a BRI or PRI interface as its alternative path. RAPID uses a one-to-one
mapping of channels from preferred to alternative paths.
32
2. Applications
When a failure is detected at one endpoint node, the node immediately switches the
leased-line circuits to a BRI or PRI with the appropriate preprogrammed dialling
information. You can program a variable delay setting to prevent simultaneous
dialling by both endpoints, which may result in a glare situation.
When it answers an incoming ISDN call, the node disconnects the specified
channel from its preferred path and connects it to the B channel specified by the
network. One end node can be programmed for answer-only mode.
Figure 2-6 shows a channel connected from 3600 MainStreet node #1 to

3600+ MainStreet node #2 through intermediate 3600+ MainStreet nodes A and B
on a leased line. If a failure is detected by 3600 MainStreet node #1, it initiates an
ISDN call through the PSTN to the 3600+ MainStreet node #2. Each
3600+ MainStreet node then connects the backed-up channel to the ISDN
B channel.
Figure 2-6: ISDN backup application

Preferred connection
3600 MainStreet 3600+ MainStreet 3600+ MainStreet

node #1 node #2 node #3
Node Node
A B
Backup Backup
PSTN
3600+ MainStreet node #4

11226
On 3600+ MainStreet systems, ISDN is used to set up 56 kb/s or 64 kb/s clear

channel bandwidth between two points. CPE signaling, if required, is transported
inband (for example, inband voice signaling using HCV).
Super-rate connections can also be backed up with ISDN. Some ISDNs support
n × 64 kb/s connections or specific speeds, such as 384 kb/s (H0); for networks that
do not, the 3600+ MainStreet system provides inverse multiplexing capability (for
more information, see “Inverse multiplexing” in this chapter).
33
Product overview
Figure 2-7 shows the connections required in the 3600+ MainStreet system for the
ISDN leased-line backup application. The D channel for each interface used for
ISDN signaling must be connected to an HDLC circuit on the CPC through the
switching matrix. Up to 31 D channels can be connected to each CPC. The
B channels are not connected until the need for backup occurs, or a preferred
connection is programmed.
Figure 2-7: ISDN backup connections

BRI CPC
D channel HDLC
BRI-1
2B D channel
BRI-2
2B D channel
BRI-3
2B
D channel
BRI-8
2B
B channels are unconnected Connected through

except when a call is in progress switching matrix
7916
ISDN backup is ideal for providing sporadic backup for leased lines because it is
tariffed on a usage-only basis. ISDN backup can be used in situations where there
is not enough leased-line bandwidth available. You can set up a link for a few hours
in an overflow situation, or for several weeks until more leased lines can be
installed.
ISDN channel search ISDN channel search allows multiple circuits within an ISDN interface to have the
same directory number. The channel search facility is ideal for applications in
which many, short-duration calls are made to the same number (for example,
credit card authorization and 1-800 services).
Circuits with the same directory number are part of the same hunt group. When a
call is received, the node searches the group that contains the specified number, and
connects the incoming B channel to the first available circuit.
As with ISDN backup, the D channel for each BRI interface must be connected to
an HDLC circuit on the CPC. However, each circuit connection does not have to
contain a unique directory number.
ISDN protocol tracing and The ISDN protocol tracing feature allows you to record and view Layer 2 and
status message Layer 3 protocol messages for any circuit on the CPC. When ISDN protocol tracing
monitoring is activated for a particular circuit, each Layer 2 and Layer 3 message transmitted by
the CPC physical layer over that circuit is recorded. The messages are stored in the
trace buffer.
Layer 2 and Layer 3 messages currently stored in the trace buffer can be viewed
using short or detailed formats. Layer 2 trace status information of the circuit or
group of circuits specified can also be viewed.
34
2. Applications
ISDN transport There are two ISDN transport applications: ISDN leased lines and ISDN loop
extension. Both the leased-line and loop extension applications are supported on
the BRI S/T card; loop extension is supported on the 2B1Q channel unit.
Leased lines
This application allows CPE to be connected to the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice
Bandwidth Manager through a BRI or PRI. The B channels and D channels are
treated as regular 16 kb/s, 64 kb/s or n × 64 kb/s connections. On the network side,
the 3600+ MainStreet system can use the BRI S/T card for leased-line connectivity
in countries such as Germany and Japan where the Sofv and I interface,
respectively, are so prevalent.
Figure 2-8 shows a typical 2B+D leased-line application. In this example, a

3600+ MainStreet node is used in a private network to access a 2B+D leased-line
network. The 2B+D leased line is carrying six 8 kb/s compressed voice calls, three
D channels with the signaling for the voice calls, three 9.6 kb/s X.21 data calls and a
4 kb/s CPSS channel. (The X.21 data calls are connected to an X.21 DCC in the
3600+ MainStreet node.) The 3600+ MainStreet node passes the D channels
transparently to the network.
Figure 2-8: Leased-line application
B1 B2 D
Front end
processor or 4 kb/s
Voice 1
Voice 2
Voice 3
Voice 4
Voice 5
Voice 6
mainframe CPSS
9.6 kb/s
D1
D2
D3
and 2 x
9.6 kb/s X.21
9.6 kb/s X.21
ISDN
PBX
2B+D
2B+D BRI BRI 2B+D leased
S/T S/T line network
3600+ MainStreet
node
11224
ISDN loop extension

When cost or distance factors make it impractical to access an ISDN network, a
non-ISDN digital facility can be used to extend the ISDN loop. Figures 2-9 and
2-10 show an ISDN loop extension.
In Figure 2-9, at either end of the loop extension, a BRI S/T card provides the 2B+D
interface. At the customer premises, the BRI S/T card operates in NT mode. At the
network end, it operates in TE mode.
35
Product overview
Figure 2-9: ISDN loop extension with the BRI S/T card
3600+ MainStreet 3600+ MainStreet

node node
ISDN Non-ISDN
device digital
facility
BRI BRI ISDN
TE S/T E1 E1 S/T NT1 network
2B+D 2B+D
format format
(NT) (TE)
1st DS0 2nd DS0 3rd DS0
B1 B2 11001 D 1
3DS0 format
11225
The loop extension scheme on the BRI S/T card uses three DS0 channels on a DS1
interface to transport the basic rate traffic between the two 3600+ MainStreet
nodes. One DS0 is used for each B channel and the third DS0 carries a D channel
containing signaling. In Figure 2-9, an ISDN device gains access to a remote ISDN
network using 3DS0 transport over an E1 link. If the application needs delay
equalization, the B1, B2, and D channels can be configured as a super-rate group;
otherwise, each channel can be connected individually.
In Figure 2-10, at either end of the loop extension, a LUNT and LULT provide the
termination for the U-interface. The LULT and LUNT are very similar to an LT
and NT (respectively), but have slight differences that make them suitable for loop
extensions. In 3600+ MainStreet systems, the 2B1Q channel unit acts as a LUNT or
LULT.
Figure 2-10: ISDN loop extension with the 2B1Q channel unit
Alcatel 5620 Network Manager

ISDN CO local node remote node Local
loop CPE
3DS0
LT LUNT format LULT NT1
LT LUNT T1 T1 LULT
SS7 LT LUNT LULT
network Managed
T1 private line T1
LT LUNT network LULT
facilities
(4-5 interoffice
T1 links)
Basic rate 2B1Q CU 2B1Q CU
U reference soft-configured soft-configured
point as defined by for LUNT mode for LULT mode
ANSI T1.604 - 1992
15160
36
2. Applications
One loop extension scheme, defined by Bellcore in TR-TSY-000397, uses three DS0
channels on a DS1 (or higher) interface to transport the basic rate traffic between
the LULT and LUNT. In the 3DS0 format, one DS0 is used for each B channel and
the third DS0 carries a D+ channel containing signaling.
Figure 2-11 shows a typical 3DS0 loop extension application. In this example, the
U-interface- compatible device gains access to a remote ISDN network using 3DS0
transport over a T1 link. The B1, B2, and D+ channels are treated as parts of one
192 kb/s super-rate circuit connected to the T1 card.
Figure 2-11: 3DS0 ISDN loop extension with the 2B1Q channel unit

NT node node
U 2B1Q Digital 2B1Q U

interface CU facility CU interface LT
T1 T1
LULT LUNT
ISDN
U-interface ISDN
computer network
DS0n DS0n+1 DS0n+2
B1 B2 D+
192 kb/s data over 3 DS0s

11223
Another transmission scheme, specified in ITU-T Q.512, carries the data stream for
two U-interfaces on five DS0 channels of a digital facility. Four DS0s correspond to
the B channels from both interfaces. Two 32 kb/s D+CV channels, which consist of
D channel bits and overhead bits, are multiplexed onto a fifth DS0.
Figure 2-12 shows a typical 5DS0 loop extension application. In this example, two
U-interface-compatible devices use 5DS0 transport over a T1 link to access a
remote ISDN network. An SRM multiplexes two D+CV channels into one DS0.
The B1 and B2 channels are connected to the T1 link directly as parts of one
128 kb/s super-rate circuit.
37
Product overview
Figure 2-12: 5DS0 loop extension application
ISDN
U-interface
telephone
3600+ MainStreet node 3600+ MainStreet node
2B1Q B11 B21 B11 B21 2B1Q U

CU CU LT
U interface
interface LULT LUNT
D1 CV1 Digital D1 CV1

facility ISDN
NT SRM T1 T1 SRM network
D2 CV2 D2 CV2
U
interface 2B1Q 2B1Q
U
CU CU LT
LULT B12 B22 B12 B22 LUNT interface
ISDN
U-interface
computer
DS0n DS0n+1 DS0n+2 DS0n+3 DS0n+4
B11 B21 B12 B22 D1CV1 D2CV2
320 kb/s over 5 DS0s

11222
38
2. Applications
Subrate data T1 and E1 specifications define framing structures based on the 64 kb/s channels
applications required for digitizing one voice call. Data devices often operate at rates well below
64 kb/s, rates that T1 and E1 framing were not specifically designed to support.
Consequently, data formats have been developed that rate-adapt subrate data onto
64 kb/s channels.
The 3600+ MainStreet system supports both standard and proprietary subrate data
formats:
• DDS and all DDS-compatibles – DS0-A, DS0-B, MJU, and Switched 56

Special Access
• ITU-T X.50 – Division 2 and Division 3 framing, X.54 channel allocation, and
X.51 bis transmission format
• HCM – a proprietary technique that provides a multiplexing resolution of
800 b/s while respecting channelized T1 and E1 boundaries
• ITU-T I.460 – transparent n × 8 kb/s subrate channels
The 3600+ MainStreet system performs the following subrate data applications on
each of these data formats (where applicable):
• rate adaption
Rate adaption applies a particular data format to a subrate circuit for
transmission on a 64 kb/s T1 or E1 channel.
• MDDBs and MJUs
MDDBs and MJUs allow several subrate circuits to use the same transmission
bandwidth on the assumption that only one circuit will use the shared
bandwidth at any one time (typical of mainframe computer to multiterminal
communication networks).
• subrate multiplexing
SRMs combine several discrete subrate circuits onto the same 64 kb/s T1 or E1
channel.
• subrate switching
SRSs allow network operators to switch (groom) subrate circuits on aggregate
DS0 channels.
Other subrate data services include:
• control lead propagation through the network

• end-to-end continuity checking and error correction
• independent (pass-through) clocking
• network- and operator-requested loopbacks
• multiplexing low bit-rate voice and data in the same DS0
39
Product overview
Most subrate data applications use independently programmed DSP resources

(see Table 2-1) to emulate SRMs for DDS, X.50, HCM, and I.460 (transparent)
service.
Dataphone Digital Service DDS is an all-digital data transmission service. It provides full-duplex
point-to-point and multipoint data transmission for subrate data circuits.
The 3600+ MainStreet system supports DDS access over OCU-DP channel units,
DNIC and 2B1Q line cards or 2B1Q channel unit-attached DTUs, and X.21, V.35,
and V.24/RS-232 DCCs.
The 3600+ MainStreet system supports DS0-A, DS0-B, and MJU devices for both
DDS and DDS-compatible services and provides the following user-
programmable DDS resources:
• traditional DDS Access on the OCU-DP channel unit, using OCU-DP channel
units (providing 4-wire CSU interfaces) programmable for standard or
Switched 56 Special Access
• DDS Access, a DSP application for standards-compliant DDS DS0-A, DS0-B,
and MJU functions (including 19.2 kb/s DS0-B and MJU, BCH error
correction for 19.2 kb/s DS0-A connections and DS0-A formatted MJU
connections, and MJU antistreaming) used at the edges of large networks and
throughout networks with small DDS requirements
• DDS Core, an optimized version of the DDS Access for high-volume DS0-B
and MJU functions; intended for bulk DDS processing on the backbone
network
• subrate switching, a DSP4 card application for DS0-B channel time and space
switching, and DS0-A channel drop and insertion
There are three possible configurations for DDS access on the 3600+ MainStreet
system: traditional, CSSNA, and local (T1) access. Figure 2-13 shows the DDS
access configurations, and Figure 2-14 shows DDS subrate DS0 frame structures.
40
2. Applications
Figure 2-13: 3600+ MainStreet node DDS Access configurations
Central office
Customer premises
MJU
SRM
DSU/ T1 DDS
DTE OCU-DP DS0-A card network
CSU
4-wire
conditioned
Traditional loop DS0-B
access Carrier card SRM
Central office
Customer premises MJU

SRM
DTE 2700 2B1Q DDS

MainStreet line DS0-B T1
SRM card network
series DTU card
DTE 2-wire
twisted pair
loop (24 AWG)
CSSNA 7.2 km (4.5 mi)
access DS0-A
SRM
Central office
Customer premises MJU

SRM
DTE 2700
2600 DNIC DDS
MainStreet line DS0-B T1 network
series DTU card SRM card
DTE 2-wire
twisted pair
loop (24 AWG)
Local 3.3 km (2.1 mi)
access DS0-A
SRM
10850
41
Product overview
Figure 2-14: DDS DS0-A and DS0-B frame formats
• Framing bit • Standard CSU-to-CSU

• User data for MSB 8-bit DS0 LSB communication channel
56 and 64 kb/s • DDS secondary channel, plus:
operation - end-to-end control lead propagation
- continuity checking
• Switched 56 signaling channel
• Primary channel • User data for 64 kb/s operation
- user data
- inband
maintenance
codes
Frame 2.4 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 56 or 64 kb/s
1 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 1 1
2 5 6 7 8 3 4 2 2
3 9 10 11 12 5 6 3 3
4 13 14 15 16 7 8 4 4
5 17 18 19 20 9 10 5 5
5 frames, 5 frames, 5 frames, 5 frames, 1 frame,

20 channels 10 channels 5 channels 1 channel 1 channel
DS0-A: DS0-A: DS0-A: DS0-A: DS0-A:

• user data repeated • user data repeated • user data repeated BCH (17,9) OFF • 56 kb/s operation:
in all 20 cells in all 10 cells in all 5 cells • user data divided user data occupies
• majority vote 12/20 • majority vote 6/10 • majority vote 3/5 between cells framing bit plus
DS0-B: DS0-B: DS0-B: 2 and 3 primary channel
• each cell • each cell • each cell • pad characters bits (7 bits total)
(numbers 1 to 20) (numbers 1 to 10) (numbers 1 to 5) elsewhere • 64 kb/s operation:
represents a separate represents a represents a DS0-A_EC (using the OCU-DP
2.4 kb/s channel separate 4.8 kb/s separate 9.6 kb/s • user data divided channel unit) user
channel channel between cells data occupies
1 and 2 framing bit, primary
• BCH code in cells channel bits, and
3 and 4 secondary channel
• framing in cell 5 bit (8 bits total)
DS0-B: • BCH (17, 9) code in
• each cell second DS0
(numbers 1 to 5)
represents a separate
9.6 kb/s channel
• 19.2 fits onto 2 and 3
and/or 4 and 5
5964
In traditional DDS implementations, DTE on the customer premises connects to a

DSU or CSU. The CSU provides the line drivers necessary for transmission over the
local loop. At the CO, the local loop terminates on an OCU, such as the
3600+ MainStreet OCU-DP channel unit.
The OCU-DP channel unit rate adapts the local loop signal to form a DS0-A
channel suitable for multiplexing into a single 64 kb/s timeslot on a DS1 (T1)
network link or cross-connected to:
• a DS0-B device, which produces an aggregate DS0-B signal composed of up to

20 DS0-A channels
• an MJU device, which produces a composite DS0-A signal (that is, a
DDS-based multidrop data bridge)
42
2. Applications
DS0-B and MJU functions are performed by the 3600+ MainStreet system using
SRMs.
In CSSNA implementations, 2700 MainStreet series DTUs are located on the

customer premises and 2B1Q line cards or 2B1Q channel units are installed in the
3600+ MainStreet system located at the CO. SRMs are used to provide the desired
DDS rate adaption, subrate multiplexing, and multipoint configurations.
CSSNA provides several advantages over traditional DDS implementations. For

example, the same local loop that supports one DSU/CSU data port will support
four ports using 2700 MainStreet series DTUs and either 2B1Q line cards or 2B1Q
channel units (dual-port DTUs use a 2-wire, unconditioned loop).
The CSSNA approach also enables network management (CPSS) out to the
customer premises, since DTUs are fully software-configurable.
For local (T1) access to the DDS Network, a 3600+ MainStreet unit and
2600 MainStreet series DTUs can be located on the customer premises.
Traditional DDS with the OCU-DP channel unit

The OCU-DP channel unit can be installed in any of the four channel unit
positions on the Common Carrier card to provide single-circuit modularity.
Built-in DS0-A functionality includes:
• majority vote error correction for 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-A signals and
BCH (17, 9) forward error correction code support for 19.2, 56, and 64 kb/s
DS0-A signals
• upstream and downstream control code support (see Figure 2-15)
• network- and operator-generated latching and alternating loopbacks (see
Figure 2-16)
• DS0-A rate adaption for the attached DSU or CSU primary and secondary
channels (see Figure 2-17)
The OCU-DP channel unit can also be configured to interface to Switched 56 kb/s
services offered by interexchange carriers. In this mode, on- or off-hook status and
dialing information from the CSU are translated into standard D4, T1 RBS E&M
codes.
Access is supported on the customer loop by installing OCU-DP channel units at

the CO, or by installing a 3600+ MainStreet system and OCU-DP channel units at
the customer premises and accessing the Switched 56 network over T1 and a SW56
CSU.
The Common Carrier card provides network bandwidth support for all
configurations, including four OCU-DP channel units configured for 56 kb/s
primary channels with error correction.
43
Product overview
Figure 2-15: DDS control codes supported by the OCU-DP channel unit
DSU/ OCU-DP T1
CSU CU
Upstream Downstream
control codes control codes
IDLE Control Mode Idle (CMI)
Zero code suppression CSU loopback (CSU)
Out of service DSU loopback (DSU)
Out of frame OCU loopback (OCU)
Loopback (customer control) Abnormal Station Code (ASC)
Mux out-of-sync (MOS)
Unassigned Mux Channel (UMC)
Test
Test Alert (TA)
MJU Alert (MA)
Loopback Enable (LBE)
Far End Voice (FEV)
Transition In Progress (TIP)
Block code (BLK)
Release code (Rls)
11248
44
2. Applications
Figure 2-16: DDS loopbacks
Upstream device (1)

DSU/ OCU-DP DDS Access MJU, DS0-B
DTE DDS Core MJU, DS0-B
CSU CU
4-wire SRS
DDS network via T1/FT1
Alternating Alternating Alternating Loopback

DSU and latching and latching C
loopback CSU OCU (switching shelf)
loopbacks loopbacks
DTE Upstream device (1)

2B1Q/ DDS DDS Access MJU, DS0-B
DTU (2) DNIC Access DDS Core MJU, DS0-B
interface SRM (3)
DTE 2-wire SRS
DDS network via T1/FT1
Alternating Alternating Alternating Loopback

DSU and latching and latching C
loopback CSU OCU (switching shelf)
loopbacks loopbacks
DTE Upstream device (1)

DDS DDS Access MJU, DS0-B
DCC (4) Access DDS Core MJU, DS0-B
SRM (3) SRS
DTE DDS network via T1/FT1
Alternating Loopback
DSU CSU OCU C
loopback (switching shelf)
Alternating
and latching
loopbacks
Notes
1. Upstream DDS Access and Core SRMs pass network-generated loopback commands to the downstream terminating DDS device.
Upstream DDS Access and Core MJU SRMs also pass loopback commands, provided the appropriate MJU Branch Select is invoked.
2. DDS loopbacks are applied on an individual DTU port basis. DSU and CSU loopbacks occur in the DTU’s Rate Adaption Gate Array
near the DTE interface (DSU) and the 2B1Q/DNIC interface (CSU).
3. For DTU and DCC tributary or branch circuits, all DDS Access SRM functions can be used as the terminating DDS device (for example,
DDS Access DS0-B and MJU SRMs include DS0-A rate adaption functionality). Terminating DDS Access DS0-A and MJU SRMs
support latching and alternating OCU, CSU and DSU loopbacks (terminating DDS Access DS0-B SRMs support alternating loopbacks).
DDS Access MJU SRMs also support Branch Select, Branch Block, MJU loopback and Global Release.
4. DDS loopbacks are applied on an individual DCC port basis. DSU and CSU loopbacks occur in the DCC’s Rate Adaption Gate Array
near the DTE interface (DSU) and the backplane interface (CSU).
11249
45
Product overview
Figure 2-17: Valid tributary and branch channel sources for DDS resources
DDS resources and applications

OCU-DP DDS Access DDS Core SRS (1)
DS0-A MJU DS0-B SRM MJU DS0-B DDS
DS0-A SRM SRM (maximum # of tributaries)
SRM (maximum # of tributaries)
port
2.4 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s 2.4 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 19.2 kb/s
CSU
2.4
4.8
kb/s 9.6
19.2
Eligible tributary/branch channel sources
56
DTU/DCC (2)
1.2/2.4 (3) 20 10 5 3
4.8 10 5 3
kb/s 9.6 5 3
19.2 2 2
56 1 1
DS0-A (4)
2.4 20 10 5 3 20 10 5 3
4.8 10 5 3 10 5 3
kb/s 9.6 5 3 5 3
19.2 2 2 2 2
56 1 1 1 1
DS0-B (5)
2.4 1 1
4.8 1 1
kb/s 9.6 1 1
19.2 1 1
(6)
Secondary supported trans- trans- trans- trans- trans- trans- trans- trans- trans-
channel parent parent parent parent parent parent parent parent parent
Notes
1. A " " in this column indicates that the tributary/branch channel source can be cross-connected to a
DDS-configured subrate switching application port.
2. Data ports include 2600 and 2700 MainStreet series DTUs, V.24/RS-232 DCC and V.35 DCC.
3. DTU and DCC ports rate adapt 1.2 kb/s to 2.4 kb/s prior to DDS Access DS0-A rate adaption.
4. DS0-A sources include OCU-DP (all speeds), DDS Access DS0-A SRMs (all speeds), DDS
Access/Core MJU SRMs (2.4, 4.8, 9.6 and 56 kb/s), and T1, E1 and PRI timeslots (all speeds).
OCU-DP 56 kb/s and DS0-A signals connected to an SRM should have error correction disabled.
5. DS0-B sources include DDS Access DS0-B SRMs, DDS Core DS0-B SRMs and T1, E1 and PRI timeslots.
6. Secondary channel data from CSU supported by OCU-DP and passed transparently by other devices indicated.
7931
46
2. Applications
DDS Access
The DDS Access application uses SRMs to provide a standards-compliant suite of
DS0-A, DS0-B, and MJU functionality. DDS Access is intended for access
applications. For example, it would be used at a 3600+ MainStreet system
configured to groom several data streams from attached 2600 MainStreet series
DTUs and 2700 MainStreet series DTUs for transmission through a DDS network.
DDS Access is also used when the volume of DS0-B or MJU traffic (or both) is less
than the processing capacity of one DSP card (DDS Core is best suited for
higher-volume DDS traffic).
DDS Access runs on DNICs equipped with a DPM2, or on a pair of DSP resources
residing on a DSP2 or DSP3 card (see Figure 2-25 and Table 2-3). The propagation
delay through an SRM running DDS Access is only 1.5 ms, independent of data
rate.
DDS Access DS0-A functionality includes:
• majority vote error correction on all incoming 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-A
signals
• BCH error correction on incoming 19.2 kb/s DS0-A formatted connections
• latching loopbacks as described in Bellcore TA-TSY-000077 and alternating
loopbacks (see Figure 2-16)
• support for all DDS maintenance codes
• transmission of CMI when the attached HCM/transparent device is idle (RTS
low)
• optional continuity checking using the secondary channel
• optional end-to-end RTS-to-DCD control lead propagation for DTU and
DCC data interfaces; DCC and DTU interfaces also allow control leads to be
forced high or low
DDS Access DS0-B functionality includes all of the DS0-A features noted above, as
well as:
• 19.2 kb/s DS0-B

• Bellcore TA-TSY-000189 compliance (DS0-B framing algorithm and reframe
performance)
• transparent upstream and downstream control code transmission (except
when configured as the terminating DDS device, in which case, alternating
loopbacks are supported)
• UMC and DS0 OOS support
47
Product overview
DDS Access MJU functionality includes all of the DS0-A features listed above as
well as:
• antistreaming
• 19.2 kb/s MJU
• Bellcore TA-TSY-000192 Issue 2 MJU compliance for primary channel
• hub ID report as TR-TSY-000476
• latching HL96 and DS0 DP loopbacks processed as an OCU loopback for
directly connected HCM/transparent branch channels (otherwise, control
codes are passed transparently)
• maintenance code support for Branch Select Branch Block/Unblock MJU
loopback MJU antistreaming Global Release (unblock all)
DDS Core
The DDS Core application is an optimized version of DDS Access. DDS Core
supports a fourfold increase in DS0-B and MJU traffic (twelve 9.6 kb/s DS0-B
SRMs for each DSP card versus three for DDS Access) and lower SRM propagation
delays (only 0.625 ms versus 1.5 ms for DDS Access). DDS Core is intended for
high-volume DS0-B and MJU requirements at hub locations. It supports DS0-A
and DS0-B channels originating from OCU-DP channel units, the DDS network,
and DTU/DCC circuits formatted using DDS Access (see Figure 2-17).
The DDS Core application uses an entire DSP2 or DSP3 card (see Table 2-3).
DDS SRM enhancements

The 3600+ MainStreet system offers several enhancements to DDS. These
enhancements include:
• the use of 2700 MainStreet series DTUs

• secondary channel continuity checking
• SRS
Secondary channel continuity checking is a proprietary continuity checking

algorithm supported by DDS Access SRMs using the secondary channel
(DDS Core DS0-B SRMs pass secondary channel data transparently). For data
paths that span several nodes, endpoint devices detect faults on intermediate links,
even though a Red Alarm has not been raised on the link to which they are directly
connected.
Continuity checking can also be used to detect faults on individual DS0-B

subchannels (that is, subchannels that are carried partially by links other than the
one carrying the DS0-B aggregate).
48
2. Applications
The error threshold is 20%. The time to declare continuity gained from startup
varies from 657 ms for 2.4 kb/s channels to 33 ms for 56 kb/s channels. When a fault
occurs, the time to declare loss of continuity varies from 15 ms for 2.4 kb/s channels
to 0.8 ms for 56 kb/s channels.
Figure 2-18 shows a number of paths for which continuity checking (labeled CC in
the figure) can be applied. The first path is between two DDS Access DS0-B SRMs
(labeled DS0-B II in the figure). The remaining paths pass continuity checking
information transparently through these two SRMs, which can be either DDS
Access or DDS Core SRMs as specified in Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-18: Secondary channel continuity testing
-1-
Terminating DS0-B DS0-B Terminating

SRM II II SRM
DCC DS0-A -2- DS0-A DCC
(a) DTU DTU (a)

(b) DTU DS0-B -3- DS0-B DTU (b)
(c) DTU DTU (c)
Slave channels
DCC
DCC
MJU -4- DS0-A DTU
DTU
Master
DTU
channel
CC DSP Application:
on path Terminating SRM DS0-B II SRM
1 Any DDS device DDS Access (CC enabled)

2 DDS Access (CC enabled) DDS Access (CC disabled) or DDS Core
3 DDS Access (CC enabled) DDS Access (CC enabled or disabled) or DDS Core
4 DDS Access (CC enabled) DDS Access (CC disabled) or DDS Core
6075
DDS subrate switching

DDS subrate switching is performed by DSP4 cards running the subrate switching
application. This DSP application provides fully flexible subrate switching for 2.4,
4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-B aggregate channels as well as drop and insertion of 2.4, 4.8,
9.6, and 19.2 kb/s DS0-A channels (see “Subrate switching” in this chapter for a
complete description of the application).
49
Product overview
ITU-T X.50 X.50 is a subrate data multiplexing scheme used in E1 environments. It specifies
techniques for rate adaption and subrate multiplexing of 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and
48 kb/s synchronous data channels.
The 3600+ MainStreet system X.50 implementation complies with:
• ITU-T X.50 Division 2 and Division 3 envelope structure

• ITU-T X.54 channel allocation
• ITU-T X.51 bis transmission format for 48 kb/s channels
Support is also provided for 19.2 kb/s channel speeds (point-to-point), A-bit
operation, control lead propagation, bit-aligned framing, multidrop data bridging,
and subrate switching.
Table 2-2 describes the X.50 DSP applications supported on the 3600+ MainStreet
system.
Table 2-2: X.50 DSP applications
Application X.50 Telco Basic X.50
Division 2 Division 3 Division 3
Framing pattern 80 frame pattern: five phases of 20 frame pattern: five phases of 20 frame pattern: five phases of
16 frames each four frames each four frames each
Subrate channels • for each phase (1): • for each phase (2): • for each phase (2):
supported
1 x 9.6 kb/s 1 x 9.6 kb/s 1 x 9.6 kb/s
2 x 4.8 kb/s 2 x 4.8 kb/s 2 x 4.8 kb/s
4 x 2.4 kb/s 4 x 2.4 kb/s 4 x 2.4 kb/s
8 x 1.2 kb/s 4 x 1.2 kb/s 4 x 1.2 kb/s
16 x 0.6 kb/s • two phases: • two phases:
• two phases: 1 x 19.2 kb/s 1 x 19.2 kb/s
1 x 19.2 kb/s • all five phases: • all five phases:
• all five phases: 1 x 48 kb/s 1 x 48 kb/s
1 x 48 kb/s
50
2. Applications
Application X.50 Telco Basic X.50
Division 2 Division 3 Division 3
SRM inputs (3) 6 6 12
A-bit support √ (4) √ (4) –
Control lead – √ –
propagation
Bit-aligned framing √ √ –
MDDB (5) √ √ √
SRS – √ √
Notes
1. 1.2 and 0.6 kb/s channels occupy exactly 1.2 and 0.6 kb/s of bandwidth, respectively.
2. Each 1.2 kb/s channel connected to an X.50 or X.50 Telco Division 3 SRM is rate adapted by the X.50 application into 2.4 kb/s
worth of bandwidth for transport across the network (each 1.2 kb/s channel is made up of 3 data bits repeated as aabbcc to occupy
6 bits of bandwidth).
3. One input for each X.50 SRM can be an X.50 DS0 aggregate.
4. When the X.50 Telco SRM loses synchronization with the incoming signal, it sets the A-bit in the transmit direction. The
3600+ MainStreet system does not raise an alarm.
5. Only MDDBs with channel speeds below 19.2 kb/s are supported.
Both the X.50 and X.50 Telco applications use all DSP resources on DPM2s or all
pairs of DSP resources on DSP2 or DSP3 cards. Propagation delay through an X.50
or X.50 Telco SRM is 1.5 ms independent of data rate.
The 3600+ MainStreet system can access X.50 network services over E1 and 64 kb/s
Codirectional (G.703) links. DTE access is provided by applying the X.50 or
X.50 Telco DSP application to the HCM/transparent output of DTUs and DCCs
(see Figure 2-19).
Using 2700 MainStreet series DTUs and 2B1Q cards or 2B1Q channel units, PTTs
can provide flexible network access services over existing 2-wire facilities. The
NMTI and the Alcatel 5620 NM can be used to direct loopbacks on individual X.50
SRM tributaries and other points in the network.
51
Product overview
Figure 2-19: X.50 access and loopback
2600 and 2700 3600+ MainStreet node

MainStreet series
DTE DTUs B channel
2B+D X.50/
2B1Q/ B channel Upstream X.50
DNIC X.50 Telco devices network
2-wire SRM
DTE twisted
pair
loop • E1 timeslot
• 64 kb/s Codirectional
DTE Loopback Loopback • SRS
DCC (individual • X.50/X.50 Telco SRMs
tributaries)
Loopback Loopback
Loopback Loopback
11250
The X.50 aggregate DS0 is divided into five phases as shown in Figure 2-20.
Depending on the type of X.50 application applied, each phase can be individually
configured to accommodate the subrate channels listed in Table 2-2.
Figure 2-20: The X.50 framing structure
MSB 8-bit DS0 LSB
X.50 framing End-to-end control

and A-bit User data lead propagation
(one for each (X.50 Telco only)
superframe)
Data channels for each phase
X.50 Telco X.50
1 Phase 1 DIV 3
DIV 2 DIV 3
E1 frame
2 Phase 2 1 x 9.6 kb/s 1 x 9.6 kb/s 1 x 9.6 kb/s

4 x 2.4 kb/s 4 x 2.4 kb/s 4 x 2.4 kb/s
5 Phase 5 16 x 0.6 kb/s
2 phases can accommodate 1 x 19.2 kb/s
All 5 phases can accommodate 1 x 48 kb/s
7563
52
2. Applications
X.50 SRM enhancements

The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager offers several
enhancements to X.50. These enhancements include:
• control lead propagation

• bit-aligned framing
• multidrop data bridging
• SRS
The X.50 Telco Division 3 application provides C-to-I lead propagation for X.21
data interfaces and RTS and DCD lead propagation for RS-232 and V.35 data
interfaces when data interface control leads are configured for end-to-end
operation.
The X.50 Telco application supports bit-aligned framing. This means that an X.50
data stream need not be received from the network in the byte-aligned order in
which it was transmitted. The X.50 Telco application can extract framing from a
data stream that has been skewed (shifted) during transmission.
Multidrop data bridging allows several data devices to communicate with a host
processor using the same bandwidth within an X.50 aggregate (see “Multidrop data
bridging” in this chapter for a complete description of the application).
X.50 subrate switching

For X.50 and X.50 Telco Division 3, subrate switching is performed by the
DSP4 card SRS application. It provides flexible subrate switching of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6,
and 19.2 kb/s aggregate channels, and drop and insertion of X.50 data channels
(see “Subrate switching” in this chapter for a complete description of the SRS
application).
As shown in Figure 2-21, for X.50 Telco Division 2, back-to-back SRMs can be
configured to provide switching of subrate channels. For clarity, the X.50
five-phase framing structure is shown beside each of the four aggregate channels,
and each subrate channel has been assigned a number (which does not relate to
subframe position). For example, the 1.2 kb/s channel (4) is subrate-switched
between the X.50 aggregate shown in the upper left and the X.50 aggregate frame
shown in the lower left.
53
Product overview
Figure 2-21: X.50 Telco Division 2 back-to-back SRMs
X.50 aggregate DS0 X.50 aggregate DS0

1 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 1
2 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 2
3 9.6 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 3
4 11 12 1.2 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 6
1.2 kb/s 11 14
1
2
3
SRM 11
SRM
6
14
12
4 6 14
SRM SRM SRM

5
7
8
9
SRM 10
13
15
X.50 aggregate DS0 X.50 aggregate DS0

5 4.8 kb/s 2.4 kb/s 7 8 9 10
6 9.6 kb/s 4.8 kb/s 5
13 9.6 kb/s 1.2 kb/s 12 15
7 8 9 10 2.4 kb/s 9.6 kb/s 13
4 14 15 1.2 kb/s
7585
High Capacity HCM is a proprietary rate adaption and subrate multiplexing scheme that provides
Multiplexing – 98% a bandwidth granularity of 800 b/s throughout the network. This scheme
bandwidth efficiency dramatically improves the efficiency of today's networks, which are based on
56 and 64 kb/s channel connections. Using HCM, more than 98% bandwidth
utilization can be achieved on aggregate links, while still respecting standard carrier
DS0 channel boundaries.
HCM applications and the resources that provide them include:
• rate adaption, using a customized rate adaption gate array located on all DCCs
and DTUs
• multidrop data bridging, using SRMs (located on various cards and modules,
as noted in Table 2-3)
• subrate multiplexing, using SRMs (located on various cards and modules, as
noted in Table 2-3)
• subrate switching, using the subrate switching application on DSP4 cards
54
2. Applications
Table 2-3: Location and quantity of SRMs
Card or module DCC (1) DPM1 (2) DPM2 (2) DSP (3) DSP2 (3) or
DSP3 (3)
Number of DSP resources (4) 1 2 2 2 or 6 2 or 6
DDS Access (5)

Tributary channels (m) – – 6 – 6
Aggregate channels (n) – – 6 – 6
DDS Core (6) (7)

X.50 (5) (8)

X.50 Telco (5)

HCM/transparent (7) (9)

Tributary channels (m) 6 12 12 10 10
Aggregate channels (n) 3 4 4 4 4
Notes
1. Includes RS-232/V.24 DCC, V.35 DCC, and X.21 DCC. SRM tributary channels service on-card ports.
2. 2B1Q and DNIC line cards provide 23 and 48 backplane DS0s for single and double bandwidth UCSs, respectively. On-card
connections do not use a backplane DS0 channel (for example, connections between DNIC or 2B1Q ports and the card's DPM, or
connections between SRMs located on the same DPM; this is also true for DSP cards).
3. DSP, DSP2, and DSP3 cards provide 26 and 48 backplane DS0s for single and double bandwidth UCSs, respectively. On-card
connections do not use a backplane DS0 channel.
4. Only one composite input can be connected to an SRM. Cascaded SRMs are considered as a single SRM. Connecting a second
composite input disconnects the first.
5. This application uses a pair of DSP resources (m and n for each DSP resource pair).
6. DDS Core is a single DSP resource application but the entire DSP2 or DSP3 card must be configured. A DSP2 or DSP3 card
provides support for up to 12 DS0-B or MJU SRMs and 60 tributary channels. The system backplane supports 26 and 48 DS0s for
single and double bandwidth UCSs respectively (on-card connections do not use a backplane DS0 channel).
7. This application uses a single DSP resource (m and n for each single DSP resource).
8. This category also applies to the DDS application.
9. DSP2 and DSP3 cards support a maximum of 50 aggregate and branch channels.
HCM provides additional functionality, such as:
• independent (pass-through) clocking

• end-to-end signal propagation for up to eight control leads
• subrate multiplexing of HCM data with 8 and 16 kb/s HCV channels
HCM can be used with aggregate timeslots which provide transport bandwidths of
64, 56, 48 . . . 8 kb/s. HCM divides this n × 8 kb/s frame into 800 b/s bandwidth
elements (for example, a 64 kb/s HCM frame consists of eighty 800 b/s elements,
and a 56 kb/s HCM frame consists of seventy 800 b/s elements).
55
Product overview
The Alcatel 5620 NM and the NMTI display an HCM frame as a 10 row by 8
column matrix, as shown in Figure 2-22. The rows are named Frame 0 to Frame 9
(F0-F9) and the columns are named Bit 7 to Bit 0 (B7-B0). An element is identified
by its row and column, for example, F2-B2.
When an HCM channel is connected to a DS0 on an aggregate link, one row is sent
every aggregate frame. Because the HCM frame pattern is independent of the
aggregate framing pattern, the start of the HCM frame is flagged by a framing bit,
indicated by an F (found in position F0-B7 in Figure 2-22). Each tributary circuit
has an optional signaling bit (indicated by an S). This bit is required for each
subrate data channel using control lead propagation or independent clocking (or
both).
Bandwidth allocated to a circuit within an HCM frame is represented by HCM

elements containing a D (for data), where each D represents 800 b/s of bandwidth.
Figure 2-22 shows a 9.6 kb/s data channel with end-to-end signaling or
independent clocking, or both (9600 b/s plus 800 b/s).
Figure 2-22: A 64 kb/s HCM frame with eighty 800 b/s elements
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F0 F S D D D D D D
F1 D D D D D D - -
F2 - - - - - - - -
F3 - - - - - - - -
F4 - - - - - - - -
10 rows
F5 - - - - - - - -
F6 - - - - - - - -
F7 - - - - - - - -
F8 - - - - - - - -
F9 - - - - - - - -
8 columns (64 kb/s)

5969
Any combination of data rates can be used to fill an HCM frame: synchronous and
asynchronous, and 8 kb/s and 16 kb/s HCV channels. A wide range of synchronous
and asynchronous data rates are supported. Any element in the HCM frame that
does not contain an F, S, or D represents unused bandwidth.
HCM frames can also be reduced by 8 kb/s increments (that is, by 10 HCM
elements) to allow both HCM and transparent (I.460) data to occupy the same
aggregate DS0. This is useful when 8 or 16 kb/s CPSS channels are multiplexed
together with HCM data. Figure 2-23 shows a 9.6 kb/s data channel and a 16 kb/s
CPSS channel multiplexed with it. Transparent data can be positioned before or
after the HCM framing bit position.
The ability to reduce the HCM frame bandwidth in 8-kb/s increments also permits
use of 48 and 56 kb/s transmission services. Transparent (I.460) channels can be
configured before or after the framing (F) bit.
56
2. Applications
Figure 2-23: A combined 48 kb/s HCM and 16 kb/s transparent frame
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F0 F S D D D D T T
F1 D D D D D D T T
F2 D D - - - - T T
F3 - - - - - - T T
F4 - - - - - - T T
10 rows
F5 - - - - - - T T
F6 - - - - - - T T
F7 - - - - - - T T
F8 - - - - - - T T
F9 - - - - - - T T
6 columns (48 kb/s) 16 kb/s

HCM transparent
5970
The HCM S-bit provides end-to-end signal propagation for up to eight control
signals (control leads can also be forced high or low).
Independent (pass-through) clocking

The S-bit can also be configured to provide independent clocking when a particular
data circuit's timing cannot be locked to the MainStreet network. This typically
occurs when a data circuit between a host computer and a cluster controller is
transported by two transmission providers, and each provider’s network uses a
different clock. The HCM S-bit allows synchronous isochronous communications
with only 800 b/s of overhead (see Figure 2-24).
Figure 2-24: 9.6 kb/s synchronous isochronous communications with 800 b/s overhead
9.6 kb/s HCM + 800 b/s S bit 9.6 kb/s DDS
Transmission Transmission
service service
provider provider
A B
Network Network
DSU DSU
Host 3600+ A 3600+ B Cluster
MainStreet gives clock MainStreet gives clock controller
node to each node to each
Port MainStreet Port DSU
configured for node configured for
independent independent
clocking clocking
11231
57
Product overview
Optional multidrop data bridging

processor using the same HCM bandwidth (see “Multidrop data bridging” for a
complete description of the application).
HCM subrate switching

HCM subrate switching is performed by DSP4 cards running the SRS application.
This DSP application provides fully flexible subrate switching for data channels
within an HCM frame, as well as drop and insertion of individual HCM data
channels.
Transparent (I.460) rate The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager provides rate adaption,
adaption – 100% multidrop data bridging, subrate multiplexing, and subrate switching for
bandwidth efficiency
synchronous, n × 8 kb/s transparent/I.460 data channels. Transparent aggregate
channels support transport bandwidths of 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, and 64 kb/s.
Transparent data channels carry data, signaling, and framing information through
the 3600+ MainStreet system without adding any system overhead. For example,
8 kb/s and 16 kb/s CPSS circuits can be carried through the network using the
transparent data format.
As with HCM rate adaption, transparent rate adaption is applied by a customized

rate adaption gate array integral to DTUs and DCCs. SRMs are used to perform
subrate multiplexing and multidrop data bridging. Both HCM and transparent
data can be processed by the same SRM and transported in the same aggregate DS0
(see Figure 2-23). An HCM/transparent SRM can accommodate one terminating
CPSS channel at either 4 kb/s (HCM format) or n × 8 kb/s (transparent format).
Any number of nonterminating n × 8 kb/s CPSS channels can be transported as
normal data.
processor using the same bandwidth (see “Multidrop data bridging” for a complete
description of the application).
Transparent subrate switching is performed by DSP4 cards running the SRS

application. This DSP application provides fully flexible subrate switching for
transparent data channels within transparent or mixed HCM or transparent
frames. Drop and insertion of individual data channels is also supported.
58
2. Applications
Fully software- The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager uses versatile DSP
configurable SRMs technology to provide fully user-programmable SRM functionality. DSP cards are
available with two or six DSP resources. The DPM has two DSP resources. Some
SRM applications use a single DSP resource to provide several SRMs. Other SRM
applications require that DSP resources be configured in pairs (that is, two DSP
resources combined to provide several SRMs).
The type of DSP card or module and the SRM application determine the number
of SRMs provided by a given DSP resource or resource pair, and the number of
tributary and branch channels it supports. Figure 2-25 shows a DSP resource or
resource pair configured to provide SRM functionality. Table 2-3 lists the number
of SRMs supported.
Figure 2-25: A DSP resource configured for SRM operation
Voice card or DSP4 card DSP3 card Primary rate

channel unit with card
Fax module
Device 2
Network
Device 1 SRM
Device 2 Device 1 HCM frame on SRM

B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
F0 F F0 F F0 F
Device 1
F1 F1 F1
F2 F2 F2 Device 2
F3 F3 F3
F4 F4 F4
F5 F5 F5 Other HCM
F6 F6 F6 connections
F7 F7 F7
F8 F8 F8
F9 F9 F9
Transport position = F0-B5 Transport position = F0-B5 Reserved for

Transport bandwidth = 48 kb/s Transport bandwidth = 48 kb/s transparent
Data position = F1-B0 Data position = F1-B0
Data bandwidth = 9.6 kb/s Data bandwidth = 8 kb/s
11244
59
Product overview
Subrate switching Subrate switching is a DSP4 card application. It is a resource-efficient application

ideally suited for the grooming of subrate voice and data circuits prior to their
transmission over the backbone network (for example, when a 3600+ MainStreet
system is configured as a hub to multiple feeder nodes whose aggregate DS0s are
underutilized).
The SRS application performs:
• space switching (for example, a specific channel can be switched between two
aggregate DS0s)
• time switching (for example, a switched channel can occupy a different
position or phase within each aggregate DS0)
• drop or insert of individual channels
The SRS application runs on the entire DSP4 card and provides 48 DS0 ports on
each card (30 in single bandwidth UCSs). The 3600+ MainStreet system supports a
total of 12 DSP4 cards performing subrate switching and up to 6 cards in each shelf.
Concurrent DDS, X.50 Division 3, HCM, and transparent switching is supported
on the same card, with switching between like data formats (that is, DDS to DDS,
X.50 Division 3 to X.50 Division 3, HCM to HCM, and transparent to transparent).
The Alcatel 5620 NM is specifically programmed to control the SRS application.

Using its advanced GUI, the Alcatel 5620 NM creates SRLs between SRS
applications, SRMs, and aggregate timeslots throughout the network. The
Alcatel 5620 NM uses SRLs to automatically route and reroute (under fault
conditions) end-to-end subrate data paths.
The Alcatel 5620 NM supports noncontiguous HCM bandwidth elements between

HCM SRLs and SRSs. The criteria that determines whether a subrate channel can
be transported by a particular aggregate DS0 is the aggregate's total unused
bandwidth, not the amount of contiguous bandwidth. This feature fully exploits
HCM's 800 b/s bandwidth granularity and greatly increases rerouting options
during network fault recovery.
DDS subrate switching

Full switching flexibility is provided for 2.4, 4.8, and 9.6 kb/s DS0-B aggregate
channels, as well as drop and insertion of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 19.2 kb/s DS0-A data
channels. DS0-A channels experience a delay of 2.5 ms. DS0-B channels
experience these typical and worst-case delays:
• 2.4 kb/s DS0-B: 5 ms and 7.5 ms

• 4.8 kb/s DS0-B: 3.75 ms and 5 ms
• 9.6 kb/s DS0-B: 3.125 ms and 3.75 ms
60
2. Applications
Figure 2-26 shows subrate switching of DS0-A and DS0-B channels from a remote
channel bank (A), a remote 3600+ MainStreet system (also running SRS) at (B), a
collection of local terminations including an OCU-DP channel unit (C) and two
2600 MainStreet series DTUs or 2700 MainStreet series DTUs (D), and the DDS
network (E). Some of the channels switched include:
• one 9.6 kb/s DS0-A channel (1) switched between (A) and (B)
• two 4.8 kb/s channels (2) and (3) within a 9.6 kb/s DS0-B at (B) switched to a
4.8 kb/s DS0-B at (E)
• one 19.2 kb/s DTU channel (6) switched to 9.6 kb/s DS0-B at (E)
Figure 2-26: DDS subrate switching capabilities
A 3624 MainStreet E
Channel Bank
1 9.6 kb/s DS0-A DDS network
9.6 DS0-B
SRS
2 4.8 kb/s T1 (DSP4) 2 3
3 4.8 kb/s 5 7
T1
4 9.6 kb/s 9
1 4.8 kb/s
T1 DS0-B
SRS T1 DDS link OCU 9.6 kb/s

te 6
subra DS0-B
DP
B 3600+ 2B1Q/ 6
MainStreet DNIC
node via 4
DDS Access
9.6 kb/s DS0-B
SRM 8
C DSU/CSU DTU D DTU
5 4.8 kb/s Port (a): 6 19.2 kb/s 8 9.6 kb/s
Port (b): 7 2.4 kb/s 9 4.8 kb/s
11232
X.50/X.50 Telco Division 3 subrate switching

Full switching flexibility (including drop and insert) is provided for 2.4, 4.8, 9.6,
and 19.2 kb/s X.50/X.50 Telco Division 3 data channels (X.50 Telco Division 2 does
not support the SRS application). The typical delay through the application is 5 ms;
the worst-case delay is 7.5 ms.
Figure 2-27 shows subrate switching of X.50 Division 3 formatted channels

from a third-party device (A), a remote 3600+ MainStreet system (also running
SRS) at (B), two 2600 MainStreet series DTUs or 2700 MainStreet series DTUs at
(C), and the X.50 network (D). Some of the channels switched include:
• one 9.6 kb/s channel (1) switched between (A) and (D)
• one 4.8 kb/s channel (4) switched between (B) and (D)
• one 2.4 kb/s channel (12) switched between (C) and (D)
61
Product overview
Figure 2-27: X.50 Division 3 subrate switching capabilities
X.50 aggregate A D
9.6 kb/s 1 3rd party
equipment X.50 network
9.6 kb/s 2
9.6 kb/s 3
64 kb/s X.50 aggregate
Codirectional
X.50 aggregate 9.6 kb/s 1
4.8 kb/s SRS 9.6 kb/s 2

4 5
(DSP4) E1 9.6 kb/s 3
9.6 kb/s 6
9.6 kb/s 6
4.8 kb/s 11 14
2.4 kb/s 7 8 9 10
E1
X.50 aggregate
2.4 kb/s 7 8 9 10
2B1Q/
50 nk DNIC 4.8 kb/s 4 5
X. te li
r a 2.4 kb/s 12
SRS E1
s ub via X.50 or
X.50 Telco 9.6 kb/s 13
B 3600+ SRM
MainStreet
node DTU C DTU
Port (a): 11 4.8 kb/s 13 9.6 kb/s
Port (b): 12 2.4 kb/s 14 4.8 kb/s
11233
HCM subrate switching

Full switching flexibility is provided for all HCM data channels, including drop and
insert and use of noncontiguous HCM bandwidth elements. The typical delay
through the application is 3.75 ms; the worst-case delay is 5 ms.
A special CPSS capability enables the SRS application to extract 4 kb/s HCM CPSS
channels from HCM aggregate channels. These channels can be dropped or
inserted directly to or from 4 kb/s CPSS ports on the Control and DCP cards.
Figure 2-28 shows subrate switching of HCM formatted channels between

3612 MainStreet feeder multiplexers at (A) and (B) and 3600+ MainStreet nodes at
(C) and (D). Some of the channels switched include:
• one 19.2 kb/s channel (1) switched between (A) and (C)
• one 4.8 kb/s channel (2) switched between (A) and (D)
• one 19.2 kb/s channel (3) switched between (B) and (C)
• one 9.6 kb/s channel (4) switched between (B) and (D)
• one 9.6 kb/s channel (5) switched between (C) and (D) using noncontiguous
bandwidth at (C)
• one 9.6 kb/s channel (6) switched between (C) and (D)
• two 4 kb/s CPSS channels extracted from (A) and (B)
62
2. Applications
Figure 2-28: HCM subrate switching capabilities
56 kb/s HCM frame

48 kb/s HCM frame
F 4 kb/s CPSS
F
3600+ MainStreet node 5
1
6
2 DCP card / SCC3 card
4 kb/s CPSS ports 4
CPSS CPSS
3612 (A) 3612 (B) 2
SRS
(DSP4) I/F SRS
3612 nk 3600+
A MainStreet I/F I/F
Sub rate li
D MainStreet
node node
56 kb/s HCM frame I/F I/F

F 4 kb/s CPSS 64 kb/s HCM frame
F
3 Subrate 1
link
4 5a
I/F
3
SRS
3612 6
MainStreet 3600+
node MainStreet 5b
B node
C
11234
Transparent subrate switching

Full switching flexibility is provided for transparent data channels including
n × 8 kb/s (I.460) data channels, 8 and 16 kb/s HCV channels, and n × 8 kb/s
CPSS channels. The delay of transparent data through the SRS application with a
DSP card is 2.5 ms.
Multidrop data bridging Multidrop data bridging, which is a subrate data application, allows a master host
processor to communicate with two or more slave devices using the same transport
bandwidth (see Figure 2-29). As with DDS MJUs, multidrop data bridges operate
on digital data. By contrast, PCM bridges operate on modem outputs, which are
the PCM representation of voice band data. All SRMs configured for HCM,
transparent, or X.50/X.50 Telco (Divisions 2 and 3) support multidrop data
bridging.
63
Product overview
Figure 2-29: Multidrop data bridging
SRMs map all slave circuit data

into the same phase (X.50) or
element (HCM/transparent)
Polling information
broadcasted to slaves Slave
SRM Slave
Master
SRM SRM Slave
Slave
Tributary Slave responses Tributary

not involved (user application must ensure not involved
in MDDB only one slave transmits at in MDDB
any one time)
7568
Digital multidrop data bridging

The data for all circuits involved in a multidrop data bridge must use the same rate
adaption technique and must occupy the same elements (HCM or transparent) or
phase positions (X.50, X.50 Telco Divisions 2 and 3).
The master device sends out polling messages and receives data from slave devices
in these elements or phase positions. The host communication protocol must
ensure that only one slave transmits information at any time (for example,
SNA/SDLC).
Large multidrop data bridging applications can be configured by cascading SRMs.

Cascaded SRMs may be collocated or situated throughout the network on remote
nodes. Any aggregate DS0 bandwidth not used by the multidrop bridging can be
used for normal subrate multiplexing.
PCM multidrop data bridging

PCM multidrop data bridging is a 3600+ MainStreet system DSP application that
provides multipoint data bridging for analog, VF data circuits. For example, the
multiplexer can bridge multipoint modem circuits between a master host
processor and two or more slave devices.
Figure 2-30 shows a typical application with a host processor as the master device
and cluster controllers or intelligent data terminals as slaves.
The master polls the slaves by broadcasting polling information to all of them.
The addressed slave responds to the host with the requested information. Each
slave may only communicate with the host and not with other slaves. The
communications protocol, such as SNA/SDLC, Pole Response or Bisync, must
ensure that only one slave communicates at any one time. The PCM bridge is
responsible for identifying the active slave channel and for switching the slave data
to the host.
64
2. Applications
Figure 2-30: PCM bridging (digital multipoint)
Slave responses
(user application must ensure
only one slave transmits at Polling information
any one time) broadcasted to slaves
DSP resource 64 kb/s

PCM E&M
configured for T1 T1 voice In-house
PCM bridging module copper
3624 MainStreet
E&M Channel Bank
Host
processor Outside plant
4WTO copper
channel
units

4-wire modems
used throughout
11251
The PCM bridging application provides the following features:
• bridging on DSP cards

The PCM bridging application runs on a single DSP resource located on any
DSP card. One or two bridges can be configured for each DSP resource; up to
10 slave channels are used for one bridge, and up to 10 slave channels are
shared between two bridges. DSP cards installed in single bandwidth UCSs
support 26 backplane DS0 channels, while double bandwidth UCSs support
48 (on-card connections between bridges do not use backplane channels).
• antistreaming
PCM bridging will automatically remove a slave channel from the bridge if the
end device using the channel fails to return to an idle state upon completion of
its host messaging. The disconnect threshold can be set for each slave channel;
the range is from 1 to 255 seconds, in 1-second intervals.
• dynamic connections
Individual slave channels can be dynamically connected to and disconnected
from active bridges.
• multipoint configurations
The master channel from one bridge can be connected as a slave on another to
form large, noncollocated and/or physically diverse multipoint configurations.
• RAPID protection
The PCM bridge master (composite) channel can be protected with RAPID.
65
Product overview
• support for high-speed data and low-speed control channels

Data rates supported by PCM bridging are dependent on the modems’ voice
frequency data modulation (that is, if two modems can communicate over the
MainStreet network in a point-to-point configuration, they will also
communicate in a PCM bridge configuration). The PCM bridge identifies and
transmits the PCM representation of the two loudest slave channels’ VF
signals. This supports applications that use both a high-speed data channel and
a low-speed control channel.
• low processing delay
The processing delay through the PCM bridge is 1.0 ms.
• support for 4-wire modems
Four-wire modems are supported with any combination of E&M and 4WTO
interfaces.
Inverse The 3600+ MainStreet system supports two inverse multiplexing applications:
multiplexing inverse multiplexing over ATM, and BONDING-based inverse multiplexing.
Inverse multiplexing over Inverse multiplexing over ATM, which is supported on an IMA module installed
ATM on an ATM Services card, distributes an aggregate ATM cell stream onto an IMA
link, which is composed of one or more E1 or T1 links. Cells on these circuits are
passed via the IMA link to the far end through an ATM network. At the far end,
round-robin schedulers on the IMA module control the collection and distribution
of cells on the active circuits in the IMA link, and recombine them to form the
original aggregate ATM cell stream. The IMA module is compliant with ATM
Forum standard AF-PHY-00086.
Figure 2-31 illustrates the inverse multiplexing process over ATM.
Figure 2-31: Inverse multiplexing over ATM
Transmit IMA link Receive

direction (multiple physical direction
links)
Aggregate IMA IMA Aggregate

module ATM network module
Receive Transmit
direction direction
10112
66
2. Applications
BONDING-based inverse BONDING-based inverse multiplexing, which is supported on the IMC, breaks
multiplexing down an n × 56 kb/s or n × 64 kb/s super-rate circuit into individual 56 kb/s or
64 kb/s circuits, passes these individual circuits through a network with variable
transit delay paths, and recombines them at the far end to form the original
super-rate circuit.
Figure 2-32 shows how a data stream may become delayed as it is inversely
multiplexed and then sent over channels with varying delays.
Figure 2-32: Data transmission without BONDING-based inverse multiplexing
64 kb/s
ABC network ? ? ?
A Channel 1 A Channel 1
B Channel 2 B Channel 2
C Channel 3 C Channel 3
6615
Figure 2-33 shows how the same data stream is handled by the IMC. Based on the
BONDING specification for delay equalization, inverse multiplexing compensates
for the differential delays among the individual data streams, allowing the data
passing over the super-rate circuit to remain intact.
Figure 2-33: Data transmission with BONDING-based inverse multiplexing
BONDING 64 kb/s BONDING

ABC ABC
network
n x 64 kb/s n x 64 kb/s
A Channel 1 A Channel 1
B Channel 2 B Channel 2
C Channel 3 C Channel 3
6616
67
Product overview
Typically, inverse multiplexing is used when the underlying network cannot assure
the end-to-end sequence integrity of super-rate data passing through it, or when
insufficient bandwidth is available to transport the circuit on any one aggregate link
(which would normally result in the circuit being passed over multiple and often
diversely routed links). Inverse multiplexing equalizes the delays of data streams
and maintains data integrity.
Figure 2-34 shows a typical leased application in which two communicating data
devices (in 3600+ MainStreet nodes #1 and #3) do not have enough bandwidth for
direct connection. The network manager uses the available three 64 kb/s timeslots
between 3600+ MainStreet nodes #1 and #3 and three timeslots between
3600+ MainStreet nodes #1 and #2, as well as the three timeslots between
3600+ MainStreet nodes #2 and #3. Since the delay is unpredictable, inverse
multiplexing resources on 3600+ MainStreet nodes #1 and #3 determine and then
equalize the delay.
Figure 2-34: Typical leased application
3600+ MainStreet node #1 3600+ MainStreet node #3

with BONDING with BONDING
3 x 64 kb/s
Data device #2 Data device #1

(384 kb/s) (384 kb/s)
3 x 64 kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s
3600+ MainStreet node #2

11243
68
2. Applications
Super-rate data: The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager provides super-rate
up to 1984 kb/s network access and transport on the cards listed in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4: Supported super-rate speeds
Card Supported data rates n × (64, 56, 48 . . . 8 kb/s)
1.544 Mb/s T1 and Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1 n = {1, 2, 3 . . . 24} (1)

2.048 Mb/s E1 and Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 n = {1, 2, 3 . . . 30} (2)
X.21 and V.35 aggregate n = {1, 2, 3 . . . 30} (3)
X.21 and V.35 DCC n = {1, 2, 4, 6 . . . 30}
RS-422 DCC (4) n = {1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 62} for double bandwidth
FRE, X.25 FRE and PE (4) n = {1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 62} for double bandwidth
FRS n = {1, 2, 3, 4 . . . 31}

28LC line card (2-wire configuration) n = {1, 2, 3, ... 16}, n = {1, 2, 3, ... 8}, or
n = {1, 2, 3, 4} (5)
28LC line card (4-wire configuration) n = {1, 2, 3, ... 32}, n = {1, 2, 3, ... 16}, or
n = {1, 2, 3, ... 8 } (6)
Notes
1. User-defined aggregate timeslot usage supports contiguous and noncontiguous super-rate
channels (including AT&T Publication 54019A IBR format).
2. User-defined aggregate timeslot usage supports contiguous, noncontiguous and equidistant
super-rate channels (including ITU-T G.735, G.737).
3. Timeslot 0 is partially used by the supervisory channel. User-defined aggregate timeslots
usage supports contiguous and noncontiguous super-rate channels.
4. The card can access up to 3968 kb/s (for double bandwidth). Any one circuit can be configured
for up to 1984 kb/s.
5. The 28LC HDSL line interface can be configured for a maximum of 4, 8, or 16 DS0s in 2-wire
configuration. Longer loop lengths are possible with the lower line interface speeds.
6. The 28LC HDSL line interface can be configured for a maximum of 8, 16, or 32 DS0s in 4-wire
configuration. Longer loop lengths are possible with the lower line interface speeds.
The use of noncontiguous timeslots for super-rate circuits adds flexibility,

particularly when rerouting is required (for example, the alternate path can consist
of unused DS0 timeslots within a link). Contiguous super-rate channels can also be
cross-connected to noncontiguous super-rate channels between T1, E1, and X.21
and V.35 aggregate links.
CAS and CCS E1 links also support equidistant super-rate channels around TS16.
For single E1 cards, the SAM provides this capability (if the channels allocated to a
super-rate circuit are confined to one side or the other of TS16, a SAM is not
needed).
69
Product overview
Voice applications The 3600+ MainStreet system provides a wide range of voice applications,
including:
• voice compression: ADPCM (G.721), HCV, CS-A-CELP (G.729 and

G.729 Annex A), LD-CELP (G.728)
• voice over frame relay
• G3 fax relay
• V.32 bis modem relay
• super-tandem operation
• echo cancellation
• international aggregate signaling and companding conversion
• analog interface conversion
• voice conference bridging
Uncompressed PCM voice circuits require the full 64 kb/s bandwidth provided by
an aggregate’s timeslot. Voice compression reduces this bandwidth requirement
and maintains voice quality. The 3600+ MainStreet system supports the following
voice compression algorithms:
• 32 kb/s ADPCM
• 32 kb/s ADPCM G3 fax, which is a modified ADPCM algorithm that passes
9600 b/s G3 fax signals
• 16 kb/s HCV, which is a proprietary compression algorithm adapted from the
CELP coding that provides equivalent quality to 32 kb/s ADPCM with reduced
bandwidth requirements
• 8 kb/s HCV, which is a bandwidth-optimized version of 16 kb/s HCV that
provides exceptionally high quality
• 8 and 16 kb/s bulk HCV (supported on DSP5 and DSP5H cards), which
multiplexes two compressed voice circuits onto a single aggregate circuit
before transmission. Up to 20 compressed voice circuits can be multiplexed
onto the 10-circuit card
• HCV with G3 fax (supported on the DSP4 and DSP5H cards), which monitors
PCM voice channel content and dynamically invokes HCV or G3 fax. Voice
channels can originate from an analog voice card or a digital aggregate link
• HCV with G3 fax and V.32 bis modem relay (supported on DSP5 cards),
which monitors PCM voice channel content and dynamically invokes HCV,
G3 fax, or V.32 bis modem relay
• CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729 Annex A) with V.32 bis modem relay
(supported on DSP5 cards), which monitors PCM voice channel content and
dynamically invokes 8 kb/s A-CELP voice compression or V.32 bis modem
relay
70
2. Applications
• LD-CELP with V.32 bis modem relay (supported on DSP5 cards), which
monitors PCM voice channel content and dynamically invokes
16 kb/s LD-CELP voice compression or V.32 bis modem relay
• super-tandem operation (supported on the DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards),
which eliminates the voice degradation resulting from the compression and
decompression of tandem-switched calls
Table 2-5 summarizes the capabilities of ADPCM, HCV, CS-A-CELP, LD-CELP,

G3 fax, V.32 bis modem relay, and super-tandem.
71
Table 2-5: 3600+ MainStreet system voice compression algorithms
72
Digital voice Transport G3 fax V.32 Super- Signaling type (1) Voice DSP capacity (voice circuits for each card or
compression bandwidth (max modem tandem channels for module)
algorithm and format rate in relay each
kb/s) (max aggregate
rate in (maximum)
kb/s)
Product overview
T1 E1 T1 E1 DSP3 DSP4 DSP5 DSP5H VCM3 (2)
PCM 64 kb/s – – – RBS (Inband) CAS 24 30 – – – – –

TS24 (3) CCS 23 30
ADPCM 32 kb/s I.460 – – – M44 M55 44 55 – – – – 44/48 T1

(G.721)
M48 (Inband) M60 (Inband) 48 60 55/60 E1
ADPCM 32 kb/s I.460 9.6 – – M44 M55 44 55 – – – – 44/48 T1

(G3 fax)
M48 (Inband) M60 (Inband) 48 60 55/60 E1
CS-A-CELP HCM: 8, 9.6, 4.8 4.8 ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – – 10 – –

(G.729) 10.4, 12.8, 9.6 7.2
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s 14.4 9.6
I.460: 8 or 12
16 kb/s 14.4
CS-A-CELP HCM: 8, 9.6, 4.8 4.8 ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – – 20 – –

(G.729A) 10.4, 12.8, 9.6 7.2
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s 14.4 9.6
I.460: 8 or 12
16 kb/s 14.4
HCV 8 kb/s 8 kb/s HCM – – – Inband Inband 192 240 6 – – – –

or I.460
HCV 16 kb/s 16 kb/s HCM – – – Inband Inband 96 120 6 – – – –

or I.460
rate in (maximum)
kb/s)
HCV 8 kb/s HCM: 8, 9.6 4.8 – ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – 6 – – –

or 16 kb/s 9.6
I.460: 8 or
16 kb/s
HCV 16 kb/s HCM: 16 kb/s 9.6 – ✓ Inband Inband 96 120 – 6 – – –

I.460: 16 kb/s
HCV 8 kb/s HCM: 8, 9.6, 4.8 4.8 ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – – 20 – –
10.4, 12.8,
9.6 7.2
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s 14.4 9.6
I.460: 8 or 12
16 kb/s 14.4
HCV 16 kb/s HCM: 16 kb/s 4.8 4.8 ✓ Inband Inband 96 120 – – 20 – –

I.460: 16 kb/s 9.6 7.2
14.4 9.6
12
14.4
HCV 8 kb/s HCM: 8, 9.6, 4.8 – ✓ Inband Inband 192 240 – – – 20 –

10.4, 12.8, 9.6
14.4, 15.2, or
16 kb/s
I.460: 8 or
16 kb/s
HCV 16 kb/s HCM: 16 kb/s 4.8 – ✓ Inband Inband 96 120 – – – 20 –

I.460: 16 kb/s 9.6
LD-CELP HCM: 9.6, 4.8 4.8 – Inband Inband 96 120 – – 10 – –

9.6 kb/s 10.4, 12, 9.6 7.2
12.8, 14.4,
15.2, or 14.4 9.6
16 kb/s 12
I.460: 16 kb/s 14.4
73
2. Applications
74
rate in (maximum)
kb/s)
LD-CELP HCM: 12.8, 4.8 4.8 – Inband Inband 96 120 – – 10 – –

Product overview
12.8 kb/s 14.4, 15.2, or 9.6 7.2

16 kb/s
14.4 9.6
16 kb/s HCM
or I.460 12
14.4
LD-CELP HCM: 16 kb/s 4.8 4.8 – Inband Inband 96 120 – – 10 – –

16 kb/s I.460: 16 kb/s 9.6 7.2
14.4 9.6
12
14.4
Notes
1. If not otherwise indicated, the signaling type supports out-of-band signaling.
2. This module is supported on Dual T1 and Dual E1 cards.
3. To support this signaling type, Dual T1 cards require a TSM, and Dual T1-2 cards require a DRM.
2. Applications
ADPCM voice compression ADPCM voice compression is based on bundles of six DS0s which accommodate
1 signaling and 11 voice channels. In T1 environments, the M44 and M48 signaling
formats are supported, giving 44 and 48 voice channels (respectively) and four
delta signaling channels (for M44 only) in 24 DS0s. In E1 environments, the M55
and M60 signaling formats are supported, giving 55 and 60 voice channels
(respectively) and five delta signaling channels (for M55 only) in 30 DS0s.
The 3600+ MainStreet system supports ADPCM (ITU-T G.721, AT&T Publication
54070 and Bellcore TR-TSY-000120) and ADPCM G3 fax in both Mu-law and
A-law companding environments.
ADPCM is provided by the VCM3 on Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1 and Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1
cards. The VCM3 functions as a full M48 or M60 ADPCM or ADPCM/G3 fax
transcoder. Typical applications include satellite or terrestrial links between PBXs
or COs (or both) at different locations.
Up to 48 (T1) and 60 (E1) voice circuits, received at the Dual T1 or Dual E1 line
interfaces, can be compressed by the VCM3 and cross-connected to another
aggregate card. All 48 T1 channels can be compressed.
Unused DS0s within a bundle can be used by other voice and/or data circuits.
Uncompressed voice circuits that occupy one of these unused DS0s transmit
signaling information in the normal way, for example, RBS for T1 and TS16 for E1.
HCV voice compression HCV is a proprietary algorithm that reduces the voice and signaling bandwidth of
a regular 64 kb/s voice call to 8 or 16 kb/s. The use of inband signaling eliminates
all signaling bandwidth overhead, and facilitates bandwidth management
flexibility by supporting subrate multiplexing with other HCV circuits and HCM
or transparent data.
The following list highlights the specifications and features supported by HCV.
• The compressed output is configurable for HCM or transparent subrate data

formats, and is fully supported in subrate multiplexing and subrate switching
applications involving other subrate data.
• The signaling and companding law is configurable for each endpoint,
including different settings at opposite ends of the same channel, for example,
in an international voice channel (see Figure 2-35).
• An intelligent slip handling mechanism minimizes speech distortion when
aggregate frame slips occur, and maintains channel synchronization at channel
bit error rates up to 10-3 (by comparison, T1 and E1 aggregate links declare a
severely errored second at bit error rates of 10-5).
• HCV passes 10 and 20 pps dialling, DTMF tones and AC15 call initiation
tones.
• The end-to-end speech delay of approximately 60 ms is compensated by the
HCV integral 8 ms echo cancellation facility.
• The end-to-end delay for signaling ABCD bits is 5.75 to 9.0 ms.
75
Product overview
Using the internationally accepted MOS test in which listeners rate speech quality
on a scale of 1 to 5, 16 kb/s HCV was ranked slightly better than 32 kb/s ADPCM
(4.28 for HCV, 4.26 for ADPCM) while 8 kb/s HCV was ranked as near toll-quality
with a score of 3.56.
In addition, HCV provides an optional 8 ms of echo cancellation to support tail

circuit lengths to approximately 1200 km (800 mi). The echo clipper can be used
to remove residual echoes when strong echoes are present.
HCV is performed using DSP3, DSP4, DSP5 and DSP5H cards. On the DSP3 and
DSP4 cards, each DSP resource can perform 8 kb/s or 16 kb/s HCV (voice
information and signaling) on one PCM voice channel. On the DSP5 and DSP5H
cards, each DSP resource can perform 8 kb/s or 16 kb/s HCV on two PCM voice
channels.
The compressed output format is configurable for HCM or I.460 (transparent) rate
adaption (8 or 16 kb/s based on compression ratio). A 9.6 kb/s HCM format is also
supported by the HCV with G3 fax application. PCM (uncompressed) voice
channels can originate from any voice interface or aggregate card.
As shown in Figure 2-35, the 3600+ MainStreet system provides full HCV support
for international networks. Each endpoint HCV compressor can select the
signaling type from one of the signaling groups designated in the figure as A,
B or C. For example, LGS-LS and LGE-RE can be used at opposite ends of the same
HCV channel, and Mu-law or A-law companding can also be selected for each end
of the HCV channel. Direct cross-connections between the HCV compressor’s
PCM side and T1 or E1 links or analog voice ports are supported. International
voice support is extended to include G3 fax data using the HCV with G3 fax
application. A typical G3 fax application would have the PBXs (shown in the figure)
programmed to switch G3 fax traffic to trunks, which the 3600+ MainStreet
multiplexer cross-connects to a DSP4 card.
76
2. Applications
Figure 2-35: HCV support for international networks
London
Tokyo
A-law
Mu-law companding
companding E1 (CAS, R2D)
T1 (RBS) A) E&M-Type V, LGS-PLAR
A) E&M-Type V B) LGS/LGE-RE
C) LGS/LGE-EC
3600+
MainStreet 3600+
node MainStreet
node
HCV
HCV
PBX T1
FT1 E1 PBX
V.35 PRI X.21 PRI
Digital
network
HCV
HCV
T1
E1 FT1
X.21 PRI V.35 PRI
3600+
MainStreet
3600+ node
MainStreet PBX
PBX node New York
Mexico City Mu-law
companding
Mu-law
companding T1 (RBS)
A) E&M-Type I, II, III, IV, V,
E1 (CAS using T1 AB bits) V with filter, LGS PLAR
A) E&M-Type I, II, III, IV, V, V with filter, LGS PLAR B) LGS/LGE LS
B) LGS/LGE LS C) LGS/LGE GS
C) LGS/LGE GS
1125
CS-A-CELP voice CS-A-CELP complies with ITU-T Recommendations G.729 and G.729 Annex A.
compression CS-A-CELP compresses voice to 8 kb/s and provides a low, constant end-to-end
compression/decompression delay of 45 to 55 ms. CS-A-CELP provides a
higher-quality compressed voice signal than HCV.
The DSP5 card provides 10 circuits for transmission of CS-A-CELP (G.729)

compressed voice, and 20 circuits for transmission of CS-A-CELP (G.729A)
compressed voice.
77
Product overview
LD-CELP voice LD-CELP, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.728, compresses voice
compression to 9.6, 12.8, or 16 kb/s, and provides a low, constant end-to-end compression/
decompression delay of 10 to 12.5 ms. LD-CELP provides a higher-quality
compressed voice signal than HCV.
The DSP5 card provides 10 circuits for transmission of LD-CELP compressed

voice.
Super-tandem operation Super-tandem operation provides improved voice quality, additional bandwidth
savings, and simplified network design with HCV and CS-A-CELP (G.729 and
G.729A) voice compression.
Super-tandem operation is recommended for use in large networks where

engineering many point-to-point paths is difficult and usually results in a network
configuration that consists primarily of multihop paths.
Typically, three to five links are assigned to a path. With standard voice
compression, the voice signal is compressed and decompressed at each link,
reducing voice quality. To offset this, the voice paths are engineered for higher
bandwidth, which counteracts the benefits of voice compression.
Furthermore, during the voice compression stage, an encoding and decoding delay
occurs. This delay accumulates at each tandem node in a multihop network.
With super-tandem operation, calls pass transparently through any digital-

connected PBX without loss of voice quality, because they are cross-connected
through the PBX as compressed voice circuits. By eliminating the need to compress
and decompress the voice signal each time the calls pass through a PBX, voice
quality remains high, regardless of how many hops are required to route the calls.
In addition, super-tandem greatly simplifies network design. To minimize the

number of multihop calls in networks that use standard voice compression,
network designers must determine not only the estimated voice traffic between
adjacent PBX sites, but also the traffic between PBXs, whether they are or are not
adjacent.
Figure 2-36 shows a network configuration using standard voice compression. This
configuration is required to provide single compression and decompression
between any two PBXs. Additional trunks are required between PBX-A and
PBX-C, whether the traffic levels do or do not warrant the additional bandwidth.
This network configuration preserves voice quality, but is an expensive solution for
bandwidth usage.
78
2. Applications
Figure 2-36: Standard voice compression network
A B C
node node node
HCV trunks HCV trunks
PBX PBX PBX
Phone Phone Phone

11240
Figure 2-37 shows a network configuration using super-tandem. Using

super-tandem eliminates the need to determine voice traffic levels between all
PBXs and to install additional trunks. In addition to allowing for a simpler network
design, using super-tandem provides significant bandwidth savings.
Figure 2-37: Super-tandem network configuration
A B C
node node node
Super-tandem Super-tandem
trunks trunks
PBX PBX PBX
Phone Phone Phone

11241
79
Product overview
Voice over frame relay Voice over frame relay (VoFR) is a method of compressing voice calls and
transporting them over a frame relay network. The statistical multiplexing
capability of frame relay allows bandwidth to be shared between voice and data
virtual circuits, which improves bandwidth utilization. For example, a voice call
only uses bandwidth when a call is in progress, which means that other data traffic
or voice calls can occupy the bandwidth when a call is not being made.
The Alcatel implementation of VoFR focuses on transporting voice using

compression and circuit-switching techniques to deliver predictable and consistent
quality of voice, even at low bit rates. This is made possible by:
• adopting the Frame Relay Forum Implementation Agreement (FRF.11),

which ensures vendor interoperability for VoFR technology
• using advanced DSP technology
• providing enhancements to frame relay technology and standards that
guarantee quality of service for delay-sensitive packet traffic
The VoFR application uses the CS-A-CELP (G.729A) voice compression algorithm
selected by the Frame Relay Forum for voice communications over frame relay.
The CS-A-CELP (G.729A) 8 kb/s voice compression is performed by the DSP5
card. Voice calls are compressed and packetized by the DSP5 card for transport
within the payload of a frame relay frame. Including the frame relay overhead, this
equates to approximately 9.6 kb/s for each voice channel.
Silence suppression
VoFR offers the potential for significant savings in bandwidth and cost. With the
Alcatel solution, further savings are achieved with silence suppression, a technique
that disables the transmission of voice frames when a caller is not speaking. When
CS-A-CELP is used in conjunction with silence suppression, acceptable quality
voice is delivered over frame relay at approximately 6 kb/s.
The Alcatel approach to VoFR takes advantage of the characteristics of voice to

increase bandwidth availability. Advanced voice processing techniques are used to
detect silent periods, and halt the transmission of packets during these silent
periods. The extra bandwidth saved from the silent period of one voice channel can
be used by another voice or data channel. This technique can improve bandwidth
utilization by 40% or more since conversations are half-duplex. Silence
suppression can be enabled or disabled for each channel, depending on the
bandwidth requirements of the network applications.
80
2. Applications
To create a natural-sounding conversation, sample background noise is

transmitted to the far end, where it is played back for the listener. This is
particularly beneficial when the background noise level is high or variable, as the
listener perceives more natural-sounding speech.
Quality of service
To provide a measurable quality of service, it is essential to determine frame
transfer delay and frame loss ratios. With the use of these parameters, the Alcatel
5620 NM can specify and guarantee support for real-time voice traffic, without
significantly affecting data traffic that is not real-time.
Quality of service techniques used with the Alcatel VoFR solution address:
• end-to-end delay
• jitter control
• distortion and noise
• frame loss
• echo
As voice is transmitted over a frame relay network, frames encounter slight delays
across each link and through each switch. The end-to-end delay has an impact on
the perceived quality of speech. To provide the best possible speech quality over a
frame relay network, voice traffic must be given priority over data passing through
the same frame relay infrastructure. This is achieved by transmitting the frames
from queues with different priority levels, and servicing the high-priority queue
first.
The bursty nature and variable frame sizes of frame relay networks may result in
variable delays between consecutive packets. The time difference between each
arriving packet is known as jitter. Jitter occurs in packet networks when an
intermediate switch is already busy with a packet and another packet arrives. The
second packet is held in a buffer at the switch until transmission of the first packet
is complete. The resulting delay is dependent on the length of the first packet.
If the jitter exceeds the buffering capacity of the receiving device, it can interfere
with the smooth regeneration of voice at the receiving end. A large gap in
regenerated voice packets results in distorted sound. Extreme jitter can cause voice
frames to be dropped. If a voice frame arrives too late, it may be discarded.
81
Product overview
To avoid speech distortions and dropped frames, frames are buffered at the speech
decoder. The buffer must be large enough to accommodate the worst case of jitter
through the network. The Alcatel VoFR algorithm uses a unique, state-of-the-art
technique called Adaptive Delay Equalization, which provides efficient
equalization of delay jitter end to end in the network. The size of the jitter buffer
can be adapted according to the delay profile of received speech frames. The result
is low end-to-end delay during low congestion periods, and no jitter buffer
overflow during congested periods.
The proprietary super-tandem algorithm has been extended to the Alcatel VoFR
implementation. In addition to rendering the compression and decompression
cycle unnecessary, the implementation of super-tandem VoFR eliminates the need
for voice packets to be queued in the playback jitter buffer. The jitter buffer is used
to compensate for variation in network delays, and is normally active in the
conversion from VoFR back to PCM. By eliminating the need for playback buffer
at the tandem switching node, the end-to-end delay across the network can be
significantly reduced, and a high-quality speech path can be maintained.
Figure 2-38 illustrates the implementation of super-tandem VoFR.
Figure 2-38: VoFR with super-tandem operation
Leased line Frame

relay
3600+ MainStreet 3608 MainStreet

PBX 3612 MainStreet Packet Access Mux PBX
node
node
T1/E1
VoFR
Router with Router
super-tandem
Router
Tandem PBX
12604
82
2. Applications
Echo cancellation
Echo is a phenomenon in which transmitted voice is reflected back to the
transmission point. Depending on its severity, echo can disrupt the normal flow of
conversation. Frame relay networks have no capacity to handle echo, so the
problem must be resolved by the equipment at the network edge. The Alcatel VoFR
algorithm provides integral G.165 echo cancellation (no tone disabling) with up to
16 ms tail circuit length, a convergence time of 500 ms, and a software-configurable
minimum echo return loss with optional nonlinear suppressor.
Interoperability
VoFR is interoperable across multiple MainStreet platforms (see Figure 2-39),
providing an integrated end-to-end solution for small remote offices right
through to high-capacity backbone switches, all of them managed from a single
network management platform. VoFR technology is supported on the 3608 and
3609 MainStreet packet access multiplexers for smaller remote or branch office
access; it is supported on the 3612 MainStreet Narrow-band Multiplexer for access
at larger branch sites. For backbone locations, the integration of VoFR technology
directly into the 3600 and 3600+ MainStreet series bandwidth managers provides
a unique, scalable central-site solution.
83
Product overview
Figure 2-39: End-to-end VoFR solution
Remote office
LGS
Phone 3609 MainStreet

Packet Access Mux
(with integral router)
E&M
Phone
PBX
Fax
Alcatel 5620
Network Manager
Remote office
Router Central site office
Phone E&M Public

frame relay
E1 Phone
3608 MainStreet
PBX Packet Access Mux
Fax
Up to 256 kb/s PBX
Fax
Branch office 3600+ MainStreet
node
Router frame relay with QoS
V.35
SBRI
Phone analog Up to 512 kb/s
Router
Fractional Private
E1 backbone
network
PBX 3612 MainStreet
Fax node
Regional office
Router
Phone T1/E1 n x T1/E1
PBX 3600 MainStreet

Fax node
15161
84
2. Applications
G3 fax G3 fax modulation and demodulation is supported in conjunction with both

ADPCM, HCV, LD-CELP (G.728) and CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A).
ADPCM with G3 fax

The VCM3, in conjunction with the Dual T1 and Dual E1 cards, provides ADPCM
voice compression or ADPCM-based G3 fax capability in both Mu-law and A-law
companding environments. The VCM3 can provide up to 44 or 48 (T1) or up to
55 or 60 (E1) ADPCM G3 fax channels, each running at 32 kb/s.
HCV, CS-A-CELP, LD-CELP and VoFR with G3 fax

HCV, CS-A-CELP, LD-CELP and VoFR with G3 fax is a special DSP application
that provides optimum transport bandwidth efficiency for shared voice and G3 fax
channels. Six channels are supported using the 6-circuit DSP4 or 10-circuit DSP5
and DSP5H cards.
Each channel is independently monitored for activity. When G3 fax tones are
present, the DSP resource dynamically invokes G3 fax demodulation to extract the
digital fax data. When G3 fax tones are not present, voice compression is applied.
At the far end, the digital signal is either remodulated or uncompressed for fax and
voice respectively. Figure 2-40 shows a sample application.
The demodulated fax and compressed voice information can be formatted as

HCM or transparent data. Various transport bandwidths are supported (see
Table 2-5). The G3 fax feature is fully compatible with the G3 fax capabilities of all
other Alcatel products, such as the 3608, 3809, and 3612 MainStreet nodes.
85
Product overview
Figure 2-40: HCV with G3 fax support
3600
3600+ MainStreet
MainStreet node
node

DSP-n or
DPM
LGS DSP4
G3 fax T1/E1 Digital
with SRM network
fax etc...
E&M module
T1/E1
SRM used to subrate multiplex

PBX HCV, HCV with G3 fax, CPSS and
G3 fax other HCM/transparent data channels
3612
MainStreet
node
15538
In addition, international companding and voice signaling support is extended to

allow international fax connections. For example, the PBXs in Figure 2-35 could be
programmed to route fax traffic over a specific trunk; the multiplexer would apply
the voice compression algorithm with G3 fax application to it. This would result in
transparent, international support for voice/fax calls using optimum transport
bandwidth.
V.32 modem relay V.32 modem relay on the DSP5 card complies with V.32 and V.32 bis ITU
standards. When the DSP5 card detects V.32 modem signals, it automatically
switches from voice to data mode.
Echo cancellation Echo cancellation removes voice echoes caused by reflections from a far-end
2- to 4-wire analog conversion hybrid and telephone set. Echoes become annoying
when voice circuits are transmitted through a network with long delays (for
example, networks with satellite links). Generally, a maximum delay of 25 to 30 ms
can be tolerated before echo cancellation is required. The echo return loss is also a
factor in determining the need for echo cancellation; loud echoes are more
annoying than quiet ones. The echo cancellation resources on the
3600+ MainStreet can be used to remove up to 26 ms of tail circuit echoes (tail
circuit lengths of approximately 4000 km [2500 mi]). This feature is shown in
Figure 2-41.
86
2. Applications
Figure 2-41: Echo cancellation, tail circuit lengths and transit delays
Tail circuit
length (1) Tail circuit length (1)
Echo (2) Echo (3) Echo (2)
2- or 4-wire conversion hybrid Echo

and echo cancellation (4) cancellation (5) 2- or 4-wire
conversion hybrid
Digital
network
2-wire 4-wire 4-wire 4-wire 2-wire
T1/E1 T1/E1 T1/E1
PBX
3600+ 3600+
MainStreet MainStreet
node A node B
Network transit time
Notes
1. Negligible tail circuit length at node A: 2- and 4-wire conversion hybrid and echo cancellation
at same physical location, consequently the tail circuit length consists of just the local loop.
For the echo cancellation circuit in node B, the tail circuit length consists primarily of the
distance between node B and the PBX.
2. On-hook (worst case) and off-hook echoes introduced by telephone set.
3. Echo introduced by 2- and 4-wire conversion hybrid.

4. Echo cancellation at node A prevents echoes from returning to node B. Though not shown,
the 2- and 4-wire conversion hybrid at node A also produces an echo.
5. Echo cancellation at node B prevents echoes from returning to node A.

11235
The 3600+ MainStreet system uses an ITU-T G.165-compliant echo cancellation

algorithm. The minimum ERL is 6 dB while the residual echo level is –48 dBm0.
Any DSP resource located on DSP1, DSP2, and DSP3 cards can be configured for
echo cancellation, with one PCM channel for each resource. Alternatively, all voice
compression algorithms provide an optional 8 ms of echo cancellation.
By default, the minimum ERL is 6 dB, but you can configure the ERL for 3 dB. The
3 dB ERL feature should be used for tail circuits with severe impedance
mismatches.
For specialized applications requiring particularly long echo cancellation, Alcatel

offers the 3901 and 3902 MainStreet Digital Echo Canceller products.
87
Product overview
International signaling The 3600+ MainStreet system supports the international PCM voice signaling and
and companding companding conversions necessary in networks using both T1 and E1 and
conversion
multinational telephone equipment, including:
• conversion of RBS, used in D4 and ESF T1, to ITU-T G.732 signaling, used in
CAS E1
• conversion of analog voice signaling, such as North American LGS LS to
European LGE RE signaling
• conversion of Mu-law companding to A-law
• transport of T1 AB signaling bits over E1 links
Figure 2-42 shows how the 3600+ MainStreet system can be used in international
voice networks. The T1 link (a) and/or the E1 link (b), can be used to interconnect
the North American and European nodes. Note that one of the T1/E1 cards
terminating the transatlantic link must have a CCM.
For the T1 link (a), companding and signaling conversion is performed at the
European node (the T1 link carries Mu-law and T1 AB signaling channels). For the
E1 link (b), companding conversion occurs at the North American node. Signaling
conversion is performed at the European node, when T1 signaling is used on the E1
link, or at the North American node, when the E1 CAS timeslots are
cross-connected to T1 timeslots.
Figure 2-42: International PCM voice conversion
North America Europe
3600+ MainStreet node 3600+ MainStreet node

(a)
T1
PRI
E&M
LGS
LGE
E1
PRI
E&M
LGS
T1 T1 LGE
CCM
E1 (b)
CCM E1
Mu-law port side A-law port side

• T1 (RBS) • E1 (CAS)
• PRI (TS0) • PRI (TS0)
• Analog • Analog
Endpoint signaling pairs
E&M (type I, II, III) E&M (type IV, V, V with filter)
LGS PLAR LGS PLAR
E&M (type I, II, III) R2D (E-1)
LGS LS LGE RE
LGS GS LGE EC
LGE LS LGS RE
LGE GS LGS EC
11253
88
2. Applications
The conversion or translation of T1 RBS (AB bits) to E1 CAS (ABCD bits) is

performed when T1 timeslots are directly cross-connected to E1 timeslots through
the 3600+ MainStreet multiplexer. For example, conversion is used when a T1
timeslot transporting an LGS LS channel is cross-connected to an E1 timeslot
transporting an LGE RE channel.
The use of a CCM on either the T1 or E1 card provides Mu-law to A-law

companding conversion. Conversion is applied when T1 signaling devices are used
in networks that have E1 aggregate links (for example, in Mexico and
Latin America).
With the ability to program A-law voice cards for either T1 or E1 signaling, it is
possible to provide PCM voice conversion by directly cross-connecting an A-law
voice port to a T1 link. In addition, the ability of the 3600+ MainStreet multiplexer
to support T1 signaling on E1 links enables direct cross-connection of Mu-law
voice ports to E1 links. Companding conversion will be performed in both cases
when the T1 or E1 cards have CCMs.
HCV can also be used for international voice signaling and companding
conversion applications. The Application Note, International Voice Signaling
Applications (01NCN353), available from your Alcatel representative, provides
detailed configuration information on both PCM and HCV usage in international
networks.
The 3600+ MainStreet system can also convert between the ITU-T ADI A-law
PCM output code format (generally used on 2.048 Mb/s E1 links) and the AT&T
Mu-law true-sign inverted magnitude PCM output code format (generally used on
1.544 Mb/s T1 links).
Analog interface In addition to international voice signaling conversion, the 3600+ MainStreet
conversion system can provide signaling and interface conversion to enable cross-connections
within the following groups of voice circuits:
• LGS Loop Start – LGS PLAR – E&M

• LGS Ground Start – LGS PLAR – E&M
Voice conference bridging The VCB application provides a simultaneous communication path between two
or more PCM voice channels (Hoot ‘n’ Holler service). It is intended for nailed-up
or long-duration applications, such as brokerage dealer board applications. The
VCB application does not support signaling. It can be used to provide an
organization-wide voice conference facility. The VCB is a single DSP resource
application and is supported on DSP3 cards. A sample configuration is shown in
Figure 2-43.
89
Product overview
Figure 2-43: Voice conference bridging
PSTN E&M, LGS, PLAR
T1/E1
E&M/LGE
3600+
MainStreet
T1/E1 node
E&M/LGE T1 (PCM)
VCB
HCV
3624
PBX MainStreet
T1/E1 Channel Bank
V.35/X.21 (PCM) 3600+
(HCV) MainStreet
node
VCB
to other equipment including:

3612 • VCBs
MainStreet • PBXs
node • other 3600+ MainStreet series nodes
• telephone sets
11227
Key features of VCB are:
• up to 4 VCBs and 14 PCM conferees for each DSP resource; up to 5 VCBs can
be cascaded to form large bridges (see Figure 2-44)
• companding conversion for conferees using different companding laws (A-law
and Mu-law)
• input and output gains of –16 to +9 dB in 0.1-dB increments, configurable for
each conferee
• listen-only and broadcast-only modes
• optional side tone generation (–16 to 0 dB in 0.1-dB increments, or none)
• low processing delay (500 µs)
• support for 2-wire voice channels with echo cancellation or terminating
devices that do not present an open circuit when the VCB is active, and 4-wire
voice channels (4-wire voice channels are recommended)
90
2. Applications
Figure 2-44: Cascading VCBs to form large voice conference bridges
Daisy chain
3600+ 3600+
node node
VCB VCB VCB
City A
Hierarchical T1/E1
(PCM)
City B
3600+ 3600+ 3600+
MainStreet MainStreet MainStreet
node node node
VCB VCB VCB
City C City D City E

11236
PCM connectivity is recommended between large, cascaded VCBs, particularly

when HCV is used to transport conferee channels. The distortion caused by
multiple voice compression/decompression hops may be acceptable for listen-only
conferees, but may prove unsatisfactory for actively broadcasting conferees.
Compressed voice channels must be converted to PCM before being connected to
a VCB.
Frame relay Frame relay is a service that statistically multiplexes individually addressed frames
switching onto a digital link. It differs from traditional packet services, such as X.25, by its
delegation of error correction and flow control responsibilities to the attached user
devices. (With X.25, these are network node-to-node responsibilities; with frame
relay, they are end-to-end user device responsibilities.) With less network
overhead, frame relay can focus network resources on the transmission of frames
from one end of the network to the other, at much higher transmission rates than
legacy packet networks.
These characteristics have made frame relay ideal for its traditional role—the
interconnection of LANs where bursty, low-average bandwidth and high-
throughput usage is typical. But these same advantages have allowed frame relay to
evolve into the first truly universal packet WAN service offering data and voice
integration. Combining intrinsic statistical gains, low overhead, and its ability to
dynamically assign bandwidth, frame relay has become the protocol of choice for
transmitting packetized voice.
91
Product overview
Alcatel frame relay On the 3600+ MainStreet system, frame relay services are supported by the FRS,
FRE, and PE cards. Each card is an independent frame relay switch, providing
frame routing, dynamic bandwidth allocation, congestion control, and frame error
checking. Up to eight FRS cards, eight FRE cards, or six PE cards can be installed in
a 3600+ MainStreet shelf. The cards can be easily upgraded through software to add
new features and functionality without affecting the operation of the
3600+ MainStreet system.
For existing 3600+ MainStreet networks, the frame relay cards are the key elements
of a seamless, cost-effective migration path from circuit switching to advanced
packet- and cell-switched networks. In addition to investment protection, the
benefits of the Alcatel frame relay solution include:
• integration of frame relay services into networks of any size or complexity

• full compliance with the broadest possible range of international frame relay
standards
• interoperability with the equipment of other vendors
• seamless, single-platform management of all network equipment and services
through the Alcatel 5620 NM
• integrated circuit and packet switching with guaranteed throughput and
advanced congestion management techniques
• advanced support for voice and data integration over frame relay, including
toll-quality voice and end-to-end quality-of-service guarantees
• RAPID protection for frame relay circuits
Frame relay features Frame relay features include:
• fully standards-compliant frame routing, dynamic bandwidth allocation,

congestion control, and frame error checking
• HDLC-based protocol encapsulation in frame relay using widely accepted
standards
• support for CPSS over frame relay
• advanced quality of service and frame fragmentation features for effective
switching of delay-sensitive traffic, such as VoFR
• frame relay-to-X.25 and frame relay-to-ATM network and service
interworking
• full network management by the Alcatel 5620 NM, and comprehensive node
management through the integrated NMTI (VT100)
• redundancy for frame relay circuits provided by RAPID protection switching
or the Alcatel 5620 NM AAR
• extensive maintenance and performance monitoring functions, including
alarms, statistics, and loopbacks
92
2. Applications
Integrated frame relay – With the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager, frame relay
circuit-switching hybrid technology can be easily phased into existing circuit-switched networks to create an
integrated, circuit- and packet-switched backbone network. Frame relay and
circuit-switched data can be cross-connected to, and transported by, the same T1
or E1 link. Frame relay is supported on any aggregate link.
On the 3600+ MainStreet node, the switching shelf cross-connects frame streams
(from data, LAN and aggregate cards) to frame relay cards, as well as
circuit-switched information between ports, aggregates, and DSP resources. For
packet data, the switching matrix circuit switches DS0 and super-rate frame
streams from aggregate, data, and LAN interfaces to FRS, FRE, and PE cards. The
frame relay cards perform the frame switching.
Easy phase-in of frame Figure 2-45 shows how a backbone network based solely on circuit switching
relay requires dedicated WAN channels for each LAN-to-LAN interconnection, and
dedicated LAN equipment to terminate each channel. With the addition of frame
relay cards, and the enabling of the LAN device FRAD capability, fewer WAN
channels and LAN devices are required.
In conventional circuit switching (without frame relay), each outlying LAN router
requires a dedicated channel and a dedicated router at the central site on the right.
With frame relay, the outlying LAN router traffic is funneled into fewer links (only
one connection is shown in Figure 2-45) which allocates the full bandwidth of the
link (or that portion of the DS1 that is configured as a frame stream) to each router
only when needed. At the central site, fewer routers are necessary because the frame
relay cards provide the required frame switching. The actual number of WAN
channels (frame streams) and routers necessary will depend on the required frame
throughput and the number of frames generated.
Telephone companies and carriers can use frame relay cards to concentrate frame
relay traffic from multiple frame relay-compatible user devices in order to achieve
greater bandwidth utilization on gateways to public CSSNA and frame relay
networks.
93
Product overview
Figure 2-45: LAN interconnectivity with and without frame relay
Regional offices Corporate data centre
Without frame relay
3600+ MainStreet
Router node
3600+ MainStreet
node
Router
Dedicated channel for each

LAN-WAN-LAN interconnection
3600+ MainStreet
Router node
Point-to-point LAN
With frame relay
2721 3600+ MainStreet

MainStreet node
FRS
3600+ MainStreet
node
2721
MainStreet
Shared channel(s) for all
LAN-WAN-LAN interconnections FRS
2721 3600+ MainStreet

MainStreet node
Point-to-multipoint LAN
FRS
15215
94
2. Applications
Figure 2-46 shows the 3600+ MainStreet system as a gateway node to circuit- and
packet-switched networks, and as an element in a high-speed public frame relay
network. The integrated access loop supports both circuit- and packet-switched
data in the same aggregate. The 3600+ MainStreet system can be applied as
customer-premises equipment, both Telco and customer-owned.
Figure 2-46: Gateway concentrator to frame relay networks
High-speed
public
frame relay PSTN
network
Central Integrated Customer Voice

office access loop premises PBX
Circuit switched connections Video
LAN
Private/hybrid Bridges
FRS integrated and
card(s) networks routers
Frame relay connection
Packet- Low-speed
switched data
network (1) Third-party
Metropolitan frame relay
area network (2) terminal adapters
Notes
1. Traditional low-speed
(<64 kb/s) X.25 services
with frame relay interfaces
2. MAN with DS1 frame relay interfaces
7558
Upgrade to a With a minimum of two FRE or PE cards and the addition of the FASTbus, a
high-capacity frame relay 3600+ MainStreet node is upgraded to a high-capacity frame relay switching
system
system. The FASTbus is a fully redundant FDDI ring that provides 100 Mb/s
connectivity between up to 64 FRE or PE cards.
Subrate frame relay The SRIM is an optional module that can be installed on the FRS card to process
data at subrate speeds that are not limited to multiples of 8 kb/s. Circuits that are
not configured for the SRIM support only subrate speeds that are multiples of
8 kb/s.
Table 2-6 lists the subrate speeds and rate adaption protocols supported by the
SRIM.
95
Product overview
Table 2-6: Subrate speeds and rate adaption supported by the SRIM
Rate adaption protocols Subrate speeds supported (kb/s)
DDS (DS0-A and DS0-B) 2.4

4.8
9.6
19.2
56 (DS0-A only)
HCM 1.2
2.4
4.8
9.6
14.4
19.2
38.4
X.50 (Div. 2, Div. 3 and Div. 5) 2.4

4.8
9.6
19.2
48 (X.50 bis)
Link management Link management protocols are used to communicate PVC status information and
protocols configuration changes between end-user devices, such as routers, and network
devices, such as the FRE and FRS cards. The frame relay cards support the three
accepted protocols for communicating frame relay link status information.
• LMI
• Annex D of ANSI T1.617
• Annex A of ITU-T Q.933
Congestion management The frame relay cards provide congestion management and recovery facilities that
and recovery detect the onset of congestion, limit the extent of congestion, and expedite the
recovery from severe congestion. Congestion is monitored at several levels,
including:
• frame switch
• processor
• frame stream
User-configurable MCT, SCT, and ACT levels are used to limit and expedite the
recovery from congestion.
96
2. Applications
Maintenance and The frame relay cards offer a range of maintenance and performance monitoring
performance monitoring functions.
• alarms
The cards maintain separate alarm queues that are categorized according to
severity. Alarms can be read, acknowledged, logged, deleted, and monitored
through the Alcatel 5620 NM and NMTI. Remote alarm logging through CPSS
is supported.
• statistics
The cards collect a range of frame relay switch, frame stream and data link
connection statistics. Statistics are viewed using an Alcatel 5620 NM or the
NMTI.
• loopbacks
Loopbacks are supported on PVCs and frame streams.
For detailed information about the Alcatel’s frame relay service, refer to the
MainStreet Frame Relay General Information Book.
X.25 packet X.25 is an internationally accepted ITU-T standard that defines a communication
switching protocol between data terminal devices and packet-switched data networks. The
X.25 protocol facilitates the interworking of packet-switched data services across
geographically dispersed public and private networks.
X.25 is a virtual call service that allows network users to set up calls using standard
X.121 and E.164 addresses. The network establishes calls over virtual circuits,
which are logical connections between the originating and destination addresses.
Through the use of statistical multiplexing methods, X.25 can support multiple
virtual circuits over a single physical circuit, thus providing port sharing and
dynamic bandwidth allocation.
The X.25 protocol implements various error correction and flow control
techniques to ensure the reliable transfer of data across the network. Call
subscription options and facilities allow network users to individually customize
their service based on the application requirements.
MainStreet X.25 service With the addition of a single PE or X.25 FRE card, a 3600+ MainStreet node
supports the MainStreet X.25 service, a complete X.25 switching product suitable
for public switched data networks, large service provider networks and corporate
data networks. The MainStreet X.25 service addresses the requirements for
high-speed access and the need for integrated, cost-effective migration paths to
advanced packet and cell switching technologies.
97
Product overview
The X.25 FRE and PE cards can be installed in any UCS in a 3600+ MainStreet
system. An X.25 FRE is a standard FRE card running X.25 software; an X.25 FRE
card can be ordered with the X.25 software pre-installed, or existing FRE cards can
be upgraded to support the MainStreet X.25 service. While the X.25 features are
almost identical on both cards, the PE card offers greater fan-out capacity, delivers
higher packet throughput performance, and has more memory, making it more
suitable for networks that require high-capacity accounting.
The PE and X.25 FRE cards provide a small footprint, high-performance X.25
switching platform. Functioning as independent packet and frame switches on the
3600+ MainStreet system, the cards can be easily upgraded through software to add
new features and functionality without affecting the operation of the
3600+ MainStreet system. Moreover, the cards support X.25 and frame relay
services simultaneously, and offer both network interworking and service
interworking between X.25 and frame relay.
While the MainStreet X.25 service is a key component of a multiservice

3600+ MainStreet system, it also takes advantage of the multiservices nature of the
system, supporting both subrate and super-rate X.25 access lines over TDM and/or
frame relay circuits, and incorporating a high-speed internal network using frame
relay PVCs as backbone trunks.
Figure 2-47 shows an example of a MainStreet X.25 network using 36110 and
36111 MainStreet multiprotocol concentrators.
98
2. Applications
Figure 2-47: Example of a MainStreet X.25 network
Subrate X.25 devices

(1.2 to 64 kb/s)
Public
X.25
network
DS0 or
ISDN 2B+D
IBM Private
X.75 X.75 X.25
DEC
BULL network
X.25 (up to
E1 rate) 3600
MainStreet X.25
node gateway
Subrate X.25 devices 3600+
(1.2 to 64 kb/s) MainStreet
node
T1 E3
T1
Router Frame Frame E3
relay relay
36111
MainStreet E1 T3 IP IPX
node 3600
MainStreet NetBIOS SNA
node
IP
IPX
NetBIOS
SNA 36110
Frame MainStreet
relay node
3600 Frame
3600+ Alcatel MainStreet relay
MainStreet 5620 NM node
node
36111 X.25
MainStreet
node 36110
X.25 MainStreet node
ISDN
Frame
relay BSC
Async. HDLC
X.25 36110 SDLC
MainStreet
36110 node
MainStreet 36110
node MainStreet node
IP IP
IPX IPX
NetBIOS NetBIOS
SNA SNA
15162
99
Product overview
MainStreet X.25 features MainStreet X.25 features include:
• access speeds from 1.2 kb/s to 1984 kb/s using existing MainStreet family access
devices and interface cards
• X.25 access over frame relay based on widely accepted encapsulation standards
• optimized X.25 performance in the network backbone using Alcatel frame
relay technology operating at up to T3/E3 speeds
• dynamic routing and load balancing on a per-packet basis
• full support for X.75 and X.35 gateways
• full network management by the Alcatel 5620 NM
• comprehensive node management through the integrated NMTI (VT100)
• redundancy for access lines and backbone trunks provided by RAPID
protection switching or the Alcatel 5620 NM AAR
• extensive maintenance and performance monitoring functions, including
alarms, statistics and diagnostics
Standards-compliant X.25 The MainStreet X.25 service fully supports the 1984, 1988, 1992, and 1996 versions
and X.75 of ITU-T Recommendations X.25 and X.75. The link layer supports modulo 8 and
modulo 128 frame sequencing, and supports both direct LAPB access and access
over frame relay encapsulation circuits.
The network layer offers a choice of DCE or DTE modes and fully supports:
• network-wide call redirection

• switch-wide and network-wide hunt groups
• CUGs and ICUGs
• X.25 PVCs and X.75 IPVCs
• PVC and SVC accounting
• NUI validation
MainStreet X.25 network The MainStreet X.25 service features a flexible and scalable architecture suitable for
components compact and large networks. The modular design provides interfaces to external
systems and allows rapid development and delivery of future features and
enhancements.
Figure 2-48 shows the various components that make up the MainStreet X.25
network. The PE and X.25 FRE cards are the key components. To support the full
range of X.25 network services, Alcatel offers the following optional subsystems:
• Alcatel Data Collector for accounting record collection and processing

• NexusPASS NUI validation servers
• NexusTRACE remote protocol monitoring software
100
2. Applications
Figure 2-48: MainStreet X.25 network architecture
X.25
Maintenance access device
tools CPSS over
X.25
Accounting and
statistics
data collection X.75
MainStreet internetwork
X.25 network gateways
NUI database
and
user interface
PE/X.25 FRE
cards
NMTI and
Alcatel 5620 X.25
Network frame relay service
Manager internetworking
7320
X.25-to-frame relay X.25-to-frame relay service interworking allows X.25 devices to communicate with
service interworking frame relay devices by converting X.25 data packets to frame relay frames.
For detailed information about the MainStreet X.25 service, refer to the
MainStreet X.25 Service General Information Book.
101
A closer view
3
Design
The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Managersupports interface and

application cards that are common to all MainStreet large multiplexer systems.
This reduces excess inventory and simplifies craft training across the whole 3600
MainStreet series bandwidth manager family. The 3600+ MainStreet system
components are field-upgradeable to provide a designed-in migration path as
networking applications evolve.
This chapter provides a detailed architectural view of the 3600+ MainStreet

Multiservice Bandwidth Manager. It describes:
• shelf architecture
• alarm panel
• power supplies
• ringing generators
• cooling equipment
• distribution panels
• data termination units
• site requirements
• system integrity
• CPSS
• SONET and SDH data communications channels
• node and network synchronization and the ANS protocol
105
A closer view
Shelf architecture The shelf is the basic metalwork (or frame) that houses the physical components of
a 3600+ MainStreet system. There are two variants of the shelf: a 23-inch variant
and a 19-inch variant. The shelves meet Class A EMC requirements when equipped
with Class B cards and a front cover. The 19-inch shelf can be installed in a 19-inch
rack, or in a 23-inch rack using rack-adapter brackets.
The shelves are divided as follows:
• UCS sections
• HSA and common control sections
• power section
• backplane and bulkhead/equipment interface areas
Figures 3-1 and 3-2 show the major divisions of the 3600+ MainStreet shelves and
how the slots are numbered. (The backplane and bulkhead/equipment interface
areas are located at the rear of the shelves, and are not visible in the figures.)
Figure 3-1: 23-inch shelf layout
ACO
3600+ MainStreet
Power Critical Alarm
Major Alarm Power Power
A B
Minor Alarm
TIMA
CTLA
CTLB
Power
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
H3A
H3B
supply
1
TIMB
UCS A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
sections Power Power
supply section
2
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
MTA
H1A
H1B
H2A
H2B
Power
supply
3
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
Frame
HSA and
common control
sections
12551
106
3. Design
Figure 3-2: 19-inch shelf layout
ACO
3600+ MainStreet
Power Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
UCS HSA and

sections common control
TIMA
sections
CTLA
CTLB
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
H3A
H3B
TIMB
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
UCS
MTA
H1A
H1B
H2A
H2B
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
Power Power
Feed A Feed B
Power Power Power

Frame supply supply supply
1 2 3
Power section
11833
UCS sections The UCS sections contain slots A1 to A8 and B1 to B8, which are reserved for the
interface (aggregate, data, and voice) and application cards listed in Table 3-1, and
the MTA slot, which is reserved for the Test card. For more information about
these cards, see chapters 7 through 10.
107
A closer view
Table 3-1: 3600+ MainStreet interface and application cards
Card type Card name
Aggregate 4 Mb/s ATM Services E1 card

4 Mb/s ATM Services T1 card
16 Mb/s ATM Services E1 card
16 Mb/s ATM Services T1 card
1.544 Mb/s T1 card
Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1 card
Dual 1.544 Mb/s T1-2 card
Octal T1 card
2.048 Mb/s E1 card
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 card
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1-2 card
Octal E1 card
Single Optical Extension card
Dual Optical Extension card
Multiport Aggregate card
TTC2M
X.21 PRI card
X.21 ESI PRI card
V.35 PRI card
Voice 4WTO line card

E&M card
LGE card
LGS card
4WDX channel unit
E&M channel unit
LGE channel unit
LGS channel unit
2WMRD channel unit
MRD channel unit
Data BRI S/T card

RS-232 DCC
X.21 DCC
V.35 DCC
RS-422 DCC
DNIC line card
2B1Q line card
27LC2 line card
27LC3 line card
28LC line card
64 kb/s Codirectional card
2B1Q channel unit
DS0-DP channel unit
OCU-DP channel unit
4WTO channel unit
108
3. Design
Card type Card name
Application CPC
DSP2, DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards
IMC
DCP card
FRS card
FRE card
X.25 FRE card
PE card
Common control and The common control section contains slots CTLA, CTLB, TIMA, and TIMB. The
HSA sections CTLA and CTLB slots are reserved for Control cards, and the TIMA and TIMB
slots are reserved for Timing cards. For more information, see chapter 5.
The HSA section contains slots H1A and H1B, H2A and H2B, and H3A and H3B,
which are reserved for HSA cards (HSA DS3, OC-3, STM-1, TU-12 mapper and
VT-1.5 mapper cards). For more information about HSA cards, see chapter 6.
Power section The power section contains slots PS1, PS2, and PS3, which are reserved for Power
Supply cards. For more information about the Power Supply cards, see “Power
supplies” in this chapter.
Backplane and The backplane electrically interconnects card slots and external connectors in the
bulkhead/equipment equipment interface area, and distributes power and ground potentials. Equipment
interface area interface area connectors protrude through the shelf bulkhead. The bulkhead
provides mechanical support and EMI shielding for the shelf components.
Alarm panel The alarm panel is an integrated component of 3600+ MainStreet shelves. It is
located at the top of the shelf. The alarm panel monitors and controls the alarm
inputs and outputs for shelf alarms and user-defined external alarms.
The alarm panel features are:
• support for standard and TEP-1(E) operating modes

• circuit breaker and power supply alarm reporting
• blower unit and ringing generator alarm reporting
• visual indicators
• an ACO push-button switch for alarm acknowledgment and lamp testing
• six user-configurable alarm inputs
• three user-configurable outputs for driving external equipment
• a voltage test strip for testing 3600+ MainStreet shelf voltage rails (±5 V, ±12 V
and –48 V)
• remote voltage measurement through NMTI
• over-current protection of the Ethernet port
109
A closer view
Figure 3-3 shows the alarm panel visual indicators and ACO push-button.
Figure 3-3: Alarm panel visual indicators
Power ACO Critical Alarm

Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
ACO ACO
Power Critical Alarm Power Critical Alarm
Power Power
Major Alarm Major Alarm
A B
Minor Alarm Minor Alarm
Power Power
Feed A Feed B
23-inch 3600+ MainStreet
shelf
19-inch 3600+ MainStreet

shelf
15163
Power supplies The 3600+ MainStreet system supports –48 V dc Power Supply cards. Although
each shelf requires two Power Supply cards to operate, a third Power Supply card
can be installed in a shelf to provide redundancy. Redundant Power Supply cards
operate together in load-sharing mode, each one ready to power the shelf alone
should the others fail. For quick field replacement, these Power Supply cards are
immediately accessible from the front of the shelf and can be independently
installed and removed while the shelf power is on. In a shelf with two Power Supply
cards, a third Power Supply card can be installed without interrupting service.
The –48 V dc Power Supply cards, which support single- or dual-input feed
configurations, are designed to operate from CO or exchange station batteries. For
Power Supply card input specifications, see chapter 13.
110
3. Design
Ringing generators The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager uses a ringing generator
to supply high-power alternating current to an LGS or MRD interface. This
informs a connected device (telephone, PBX, or key system) of an incoming call,
and drives the ringer on the destination telephone.
The 3600+ MainStreet system supports a variety of LGS and MRD interfaces (see
chapter 8 for a description), and provides two connectors on the shelf bulkhead to
support external ringing generators. One connector provides ringing voltage to
UCSs A1 to A8; the other provides ringing voltage to UCSs B1 to B8. Ringing
voltage can be supplied by an Alcatel ringing generator or by a non-Alcatel CO or
customer-premises ringing generator.
The Alcatel ringing generator unit supplies 71 to 79 V rms (75 V rms, nominal)
ringing voltage at 16, 20, or 25 Hz (user-selectable). Typically, one unit can provide
ringing voltage for all the LGS and MRD interfaces installed in one shelf (up to eight
12-circuit LGS cards, 32 single-circuit LGS channel units or 32 MRD channel
units). LGS and MRD interfaces are designed to accommodate a
customer-premises ringing voltage of 65 to 110 V rms from 15 to 25 Hz.
The Alcatel external ringing generator is a 19-inch rack mount assembly that
consists of up to four ringing generators (for use in redundant or nonredundant
configurations) installed in a rack-mounted enclosure complete with power
distribution, external connectors, and status LEDs. The Alcatel external ringing
generator provides:
• input voltage operational range of -38 to -75 V dc

• dual dc inputs for dc feed redundancy on a separate connector
• customer-selectable ringing frequency and dc bias
• pull-out tray from the front panel for easy access to ringing units
Figure 3-4 shows an Alcatel external ringing generator assembly, which can
accommodate up to four ringing generators.
Figure 3-4: Alcatel external ringing generator assembly
dA
DC Fee
dB
DC Fee
Ringer 1A
I Ringer 1B
Shelf 1
O l
Ringer Fai
Ringer 2A
I Ringer 2B
Shelf 2
O
l
Ringer Fai
r
Generato
Ringing
15164
111
A closer view
Ringing voltage is usually applied in a specific on-and-off pattern called the ringing
cadence. LGS interfaces follow the cadence specified in the ABCD signaling bits of
the T1 link to which they are connected.
When configured for PLAR signaling, LGS interface cadence is controlled by

system software and is set for 2 seconds on, 3 seconds off. MRD interfaces do not
have a set cadence because cadence is controlled by the calling party by adjusting a
button on the telephone set of the calling party. MRD interfaces incorporate a
safety feature that limits continuous ringing to 5 seconds; after 5 seconds of
continuous ringing, the MRD interface forces ringing off for 1 second.
LGS interfaces provide a ringing timeout to protect against link failures while in the
ringing state. The LGS interface terminates ringing after 10 seconds if there is no
change in the ringing signaling bits.
Cooling equipment For optimum performance and reliability, the 3600+ MainStreet system must
operate within a certain temperature range (see “Site requirements”). To ensure
that a 3600+ MainStreet unit operates within the acceptable temperature range, a
blower unit must be installed below the shelf to provide forced air cooling. The
blower unit draws cool air in from the front of the shelf and forces it up through the
shelf.
Power to the blower unit is provided by a connector on the shelf bulkhead.
Distribution panels Distribution panels are optional rack-mounted units used to manage the physical
connection of external equipment to 3600+ MainStreet shelves. Alcatel offers
distribution panels for DCCs, ATM Services, Dual T1-2, Dual E1, Dual E1-2,
Octal E1, and BRI S/T cards.
DCC distribution panels Each UCS has a 25-pair connector in the shelf bulkhead/equipment interface area.
Its pin and signal assignment is determined by the type of card installed in the UCS.
When a multicircuit DCC is installed, each circuit is assigned to certain wire pairs
on this connector (and sometimes to a DCC faceplate connector as well). DCC
distribution panels are used to break out individual circuits from the 25-pair
equipment interface connector (or DCC faceplate connector) and deliver these
circuits to separate connectors of the type specified by the external data interface.
For example, the RS-422 DCC uses the UDP (see Figure 3-5), which
accommodates any combination of up to four RS-530, RS-449/V.36, V.35, and
X.21 interface modules.
112
3. Design
Figure 3-5: RS-422 DCC and Universal Distribution Panel
Equipment interface
connector: circuits 1 to 2
RS-422
RS-422 Card
DCC
Ready 1
2
3
4
Status
Faceplate
connector:
circuits 3 to 4
RS-422 DCC
UDP
RS-530 RS-449 X.21 V.35

circuit circuit circuit circuit
1 2 3 4
6809
Table 3-2 lists the DCC distribution panels available. Installation instructions and
pin and signal information are included with each distribution panel.
Table 3-2: DCC distribution panels
Interface Number of Connector type Part number

type circuits
RS-232 6 Female DB25 90-0350-01
X.21 8 Female DB15 90-0348-01
V.35 6 Female DB25 90-0349-01

6 Female M34 90-1066-01
RS-422 4 Male/female DB15, DB25, DB37, 90-1615-01

and/or M34
90-1615-02
PRI RJ45 Distribution PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels provide a means to connect NT devices to Dual T1-2,
Panels Dual E1, Dual E1-2, Octal E1, and ATM Services cards (T1, 100 Ω or E1, 120 Ω).
Figures 3-6 and 3-7 show the PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels. All connectors are
located on the rear of the distribution panels.
113
A closer view
One PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel variant has one 25-pair I/O connector and eight
RJ45 connectors (see Figure 3-6). The other variants have two 25-pair I/O
connectors and eight RJ45 connectors (see Figure 3-7).
Each RJ45 connector corresponds to one T1 or E1 link and provides one transmit
and receive pair. The 25-pair I/O connectors connect the RJ45 connectors to UCSs.
Figure 3-6: PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel with one 25-pair connector
PRI RJ45
Distribution Panel
Front
Chassis I/O Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Ground
Rear
15053
Figure 3-7: PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel with two 25-pair connectors
PRI RJ45
Distribution Panel
Front
Chassis Port 1 Port 2

Ground Configuration A - 8 Port I/O (A1 - A8) Configuration A - Not Connected A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
Configuration B - 4 Port I/O (A1 - A4) Configuration B - 4 Port I/O (B1 - B4) A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
Port 1 Port 2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5/ A6/ A7/ A8/

(A1-A8/A1-A4) (N.C./B1-B4) B1 B2 B3 B4
Rear
15054
Table 3-3 lists the PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel variants, and the cards and number
of NT devices they support.
Table 3-3: PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels
Distribution panel Cards supported Number of NT

variant devices supported
90-2635-01 Dual T1-2 2

Dual E1, Dual E1-2
90-4698-01 Octal E1 8
90-6464-01 ATM Services 4 or 8 (2 × 4)

(T1, 100 Ω or E1, 120 Ω)
114
3. Design
PRI BNC Distribution PRI BNC Distribution Panels provide a means to connect NT devices to Octal E1
Panels and ATM Services cards (E1, 75 Ω).
Figure 3-8 shows the PRI BNC Distribution Panel. All connectors are located on
the rear of the distribution panel.
There are two PRI BNC Distribution Panel variants. One variant is used with the
Octal E1 card; the other is used with the ATM Services card.
The rear of the panel has the following components:
• two DB78 I/O connectors

• eight pairs of BNC connectors
• panel configuration switch
• ground choice switch
• shield ground switches
Each pair of BNC connectors connects to one E1 link, providing one transmit and
one receive connector. The DB78 connectors connect BNC connectors to UCSs.
Figure 3-8: PRI BNC Distribution Panel
PRI BNC
Distribution Panel
Front
Chassis Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Chassis A1 A2 A3 A4 A5/B1 A6/B2 A7/B3 A8/B4

Ground 1 x Octal - Port 1 (A1-A8) 2 x Quad - Port 1 (A1-A4), Port 2 (B1-B4) Ground
Port 1 Port 2 Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx Tx
Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd
Signal
Ground Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx
Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd Gnd
Port 1 Port 2 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5/ A6/ A7/ A8/

(A1-A8/A1-A4) (N.C./B1-B4) B1 B2 B3 B4
Chassis Panel Ground Shield
ground configuration choice ground
stud switch switch switches
Rear
15055
Table 3-4 lists the PRI BNC Distribution Panel variants, and the cards and number
of NT devices they support.
Table 3-4: PRI BNC Distribution Panels
Distribution panel variant Cards supported Number of NT devices

supported
90-4698-02 Octal E1 8
90-6465-01 ATM Services (E1, 75 Ω) 4 or 8 (2 × 4)
115
A closer view
S/T BRI Distribution Panel The S/T BRI Distribution Panel provides connection for up to eight TE or NT
devices (or a combination of both) to one BRI S/T card. The S/T BRI Distribution
Panel has one 25-pair I/O connector and eight circuits (each with two RJ45
connectors) at the rear of the panel. Figure 3-9 shows the S/T BRI Distribution
Panel.
Figure 3-9: S/T BRI Distribution Panel
S/T BRI
Distribution Panel
Front
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Chassis I/O Connector TE NT TE NT TE NT TE NT TE NT TE NT TE NT TE NT
Ground
Rear
15056
Each of the eight circuits on the distribution panel is broken out to a pair of
RJ45 connectors to accommodate the two operational modes (TE and NT modes),
which are configurable for each of the eight circuits on the BRI S/T card. The
25-pair I/O connector connects all eight circuits to one UCS in a shelf.
Data termination DTUs provide desktop connectivity for data devices such as personal computers,
units terminals, and modems. DTUs, together with DNIC, 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, or
28LC line cards or 2B1Q channel units, provide an interface between these data
devices and the 3600+ MainStreet node. The line cards or channel units are
installed in a 3600+ MainStreet shelf, which can be located in a service-provider’s
equipment building, while the DTUs can be installed at the data device site.
Figure 3-10 shows data devices connected to DTU device ports.
Figure 3-10: Data termination unit installation
25-pair
connector
Line To data devices
connector
Building
wiring
3600+ MainStreet Punch-down Wall jack DTU

node block (6-pin, RJ-series
(DNIC or 2B1Q (cross-connect female connector)
interface) wiring)
11228
116
3. Design
The DTU multiplexes the device ports onto an aggregate link (or line) that
provides:
• a 2B+D (two 64 kb/s B channels and one 16 kb/s D channel) interface to the
DNIC, 2B1Q, 27LC2, or 27LC3 line card or the 2B1Q channel unit over a
standard twisted-pair
• a multirate HDSL interface to the 28LC line card over a single standard
twisted-pair or two standard twisted-pairs
The line cards or channel unit demultiplexes the aggregate link into individual
circuits corresponding to each data device.
There are three DTU types:
• 2600 MainStreet series DTUs

• 2700 MainStreet series DTUs
• 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTUs
For 2600 and 2700 MainStreet series DTUs, the maximum loop length supported
depends on the type of copper cable used and its associated resistance factors. For
example, the 2600 MainStreet series DTUs support a loop length of up to 3.3 km
(2.1 mi) using 24 AWG copper cable with a resistance of 84.14 Ω/km; the
2700 MainStreet series DTUs support a loop length of up to 7.2 km (4.5 mi) using
24 AWG copper cable with a resistance of 84.14 Ω/km.
For the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU, the maximum loop length supported
depends on variations in cable characteristics, impedance variations, impulse
noise, electrical noise and crosstalk, and the presence of bridge taps. For example,
the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU supports a loop length of up to 4.0 km (2.5 mi)
using 26 AWG cable with a data rate of 256 kb/s.
Parameters for the 2600 MainStreet series DTUs are configured through the
DNIC line card. Parameters for the 2700 MainStreet series DTUs are configured
through the 2B1Q line card, 27LC2 or 27LC3 line card, or 2B1Q channel unit.
Parameters for the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU are configured through the 28LC
line card.
When a data device circuit is configured at the 3600+ MainStreet node, the
configuration is automatically downloaded to the DTU. (For more information
about DNIC, 2B1Q, 27LC2 and 27LC3 line cards, and the 2B1Q channel unit, see
chapter 9.)
DTUs can be installed on a hard, flat, horizontal surface (such as a table top), on a
wall, or in a rack.
117
A closer view
2600 MainStreet series The 2600 MainStreet series DTUs are intended for on-premises applications that
DTUs connect data devices to a DNIC line card installed in a 3600+ MainStreet system.
The 2600 MainStreet series DTUs provide:
• mechanical, electrical, and functional interfacing to external equipment

• formatting of data traffic and of the control leads to the B-channel buses
(rate adaption)
• echo cancellation for the 2B+D signal
• D-channel CPSS message linking for control and status signals
• collecting and reporting basic data traffic and error statistics
Table 3-5 lists the 2600 MainStreet series DTUs available.
Table 3-5: 2600 MainStreet series DTUs
DTU Type Device ports
No. Interface type
2601 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous or asynchronous

V.24/RS-232
2602 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous X.21/V.11
2603 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous V.35
The 2601, 2602, and 2603 MainStreet DTUs are available in ANM versions. These
units are equipped with serial communications controllers used to monitor and
collect more network management traffic statistics than the standard DTUs.
DTU statistics are:
• the number of user transmit and receive data bytes/data frame

• the number of CRC errors and frame aborts
• the number of link resets
• the number of receive buffer overflows and underflows
ANM statistics are displayed from an Alcatel 5620 NM.
118
3. Design
2700 MainStreet series The 2700 MainStreet series DTUs are designed for off-premises applications that
DTUs connect data devices to a 2B1Q line card, a 27LC2 or 27LC3 line card, or a 2B1Q
channel unit installed in a 3600+ MainStreet system.
The 2700 MainStreet series DTUs provide:

• formatting of data traffic and of the control leads to the B channels
(rate adaption)
• echo cancellation for the 2B1Q signal
• D-channel CPSS message linking for control and status signals
• data traffic and error statistics collection and reporting
• line protectors on the 2B1Q transmission line for lightning and surge
protection
• maintenance of sealing current (also known as a wet circuit) on the 2B1Q
transmission line
In addition, the 2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs provide:
• H-bit signaling
• dual ports and port redundancy
• power fail detection
• software downloading
• integral DTU NMTI (maintenance of DTU system)
• integral BERT
The 2700 MainStreet series DTUs (connected to a 2B1Q, 27LC2, or 27LC3 line
card) support ANSI T1.601 Loop Tests 2 through 15, and the Null Loop Test.
Table 3-6 lists the 2700 MainStreet series DTUs available.
Table 3-6: 2700 MainStreet series DTUs
No. Interface type
2701 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous or asynchronous

V.24/RS-232
2702 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous X.21/V.11
2703 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous V.35
2704 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver 2 Synchronous or asynchronous with
V.110 rate adaption V.24/RS-232
119
A closer view
No. Interface type
2720 MainStreet DTU Fixed-link FRAD 4 Ethernet-attached IP
2721 MainStreet DTU Fixed-link FRAD Unlimited Ethernet-attached IP and/or IPX
2751 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver with data 2 Synchronous or asynchronous
port redundancy V.24/RS-232
2752 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver with data 2 Synchronous or asynchronous
port redundancy X.21/RS-449
2753 MainStreet DTU Full-duplex digital line driver with data 2 Synchronous or asynchronous V.35
port redundancy
2801 MainStreet HDSL The 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU is designed for off-premises applications that
DTU connect a data device to a 28LC line card installed in a 3600+ MainStreet shelf. The
2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU provides one user-configurable V.35, V.36/RS-449,
or X.21 serial interface for either 2- or 4-wire connection.
The 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU provides:

• multirate HDSL frame format (data traffic)
• echo cancellation for the multirate HDSL signal
• software-configurable speed-for-distance option for the multirate HDSL line
• V.13 signaling
• integral BERT
• software downloading
• integral DTU NMTI (configuration and maintenance of DTU system and data
ports)
• data port control leads handling
Site requirements The following site requirements must be observed when installing a
3600+ MainStreetsystem, to ensure adequate room to access equipment, fault-free
operation, and personal safety.
Location and working Although the 3600+ MainStreet system has been designed and tested to all relevant
space standards of conducted and radiated electromagnetic interference, it may be
affected by strong sources of electromagnetic radiation in the near field, such as
elevators, air conditioners, photocopiers and facsimile machines.
Make sure that the location can accommodate the planned type of installation
including shelves, interfaces, terminals, modems, CSUs, NTIs, and cabling.
Sufficient working space for installation and maintenance should be provided.

A minimum distance of 1.25 m (4 ft) at the front of the shelf is suggested.
120
3. Design
Temperature and humidity A 3600+ MainStreet system is intended for indoor use. During shipping and
storage it can withstand temperatures ranging from –40°C to +66°C
(–40°F to +150°F) and a relative humidity of 5% to 95%. Operating temperatures
can range from 0°C to +40°C (32°F to +100°F) with a relative humidity of 5% to
95%, noncondensing.
When ventilation or air conditioning is provided, sensors connected to an alarm

system should be provided to monitor for excessive temperatures. These sensors
can also be connected to user-configurable external alarm inputs on the
3600+ MainStreet shelf, so that sensor relay closures can be logged in the shelf alarm
queues and to an Alcatel 5620 NM.
Altitude A 3600+ MainStreet system must be installed at an altitude in the range of

60 m (197 ft) below sea level to 1800 m (5905 ft) above sea level.
Power The dc power source used to supply the 3600+ MainStreet system must comply
with the mandatory regulations applicable to the country in which the system is
installed.
Grounding The 3600+ MainStreet system requires separate signal and chassis ground points.
Provision must be made at the installation site for access to the appropriate
building ground points.
Electrostatic discharge When installing a 3600+ MainStreet unit, installers must wear an antistatic strap
precautions when handling cards and modules to prevent ESD. Provision must be made at the
installation site for the grounding of antistatic straps. The 3600+ MainStreet shelves
provide a ground strap connection point at the front of the shelf frame.
System integrity The 3600+ MainStreet system supports a comprehensive array of redundancy
options, from common control redundancy to the protection of individual circuit
paths. Options designed to protect against events that could lead to link, ring,
and/or node failures are:
• control redundancy
• power supply redundancy
• HSA card traffic protection
• circuit path protection at the node level (RAPID)
• circuit path protection at the network level (Alcatel 5620 NM AAR)
• ISDN leased-line protection (ISDN leased-line backup)
• aggregate interface and access redundancy
• aggregate power-loss bypass
In addition, trunk conditioning and fault signaling are supported to prevent

endpoint devices such as PBXs and cross-connect switches from using a failed link.
121
A closer view
Control redundancy The 3600+ MainStreet system has a control complex, consisting of a Control card
and an associated Timing card. Control redundancy is the duplication of the
control complex to provide service protection against single-component failures.
Control redundancy in a 3600+ MainStreet system requires both an active and
inactive Control card and Timing card.
With control redundancy, the active control complex is responsible for the
operation of the system. The inactive control complex is always powered up, so that
it is ready to assume control if necessary. Control-redundant operation can be
configured to operate in either hot-standby mode or partitioned mode.
In hot-standby mode, the configuration databases of the two Control cards are
identical. Any change to the database of the active Control card is automatically
reconciled with (copied to) the database of the inactive card. When an activity
switch occurs (the act of transferring control from one control complex to the
other), calls in progress are not dropped. The output timing of the system can
experience some disturbance, and there can be a short period of corrupted data or
a burst of noise on voice circuits. These events typically persist for no longer than
125 µs. Maintenance operations and configuration changes that are in progress
could be lost. After a hot-standby activity switch occurs, the newly inactive Control
card restarts itself and reconciles its database with the database of the newly active
Control card.
Partitioned mode permits the replacing or upgrading of system software and

hardware of the control complex cards with minimal interruption to service.
Partitioned mode redundancy is for maintenance purposes only and is not
recommended as an operational mode. In partitioned mode, the active Control
card does not report any changes in the configuration database to the inactive
Control card, and the inactive Control card does not monitor the status of the
system. Since the configuration databases of the two Control cards can differ,
database synchronization cannot be guaranteed in partitioned mode. If an activity
switch occurs, calls in progress are dropped, all interface cards are reset, and
maintenance operations and configuration changes in progress are lost. Changes
made to the configuration database after the system is placed in partitioned mode
are also lost.
Activity switches can be triggered manually by an Alcatel 5620 NM or through the

NMTI, or triggered automatically on a daily or weekly basis.
Power supply redundancy Shelves can be configured with three Power Supply cards, which operate in
load-sharing mode. Individual Power Supply cards can be replaced with no service
disruption. The 3600+ MainStreet system also supports dual dc power feeds.
122
3. Design
HSA card traffic protection Traffic protection provides an alternate line or path if the working line or circuit
fails or is highly errored.
The OC-3 and STM-1 cards support three modes of traffic protection:
• simplex
• 1+1
• ring
Mapper cards support two modes of traffic protection:
• simplex
• 1+1
The HSA DS3 card supports three modes of traffic protection:
• simplex (default)
• access
• interface
Simplex mode
Simplex mode does not provide traffic protection. To support simplex traffic
protection, the HSA card must be installed in subslot A of an HSA card slot. Subslot
B registers as empty.
1+1 mode
1+1 mode provides line protection for OC-3 and STM-1 cards and requires fiber
optic lines connected between each subslot in each node, subslot A to subslot A and
subslot B to subslot B. Mapper cards do not require any special physical
connections because their circuits connect to other card circuits via the backplane.
Ring mode
Ring mode provides path protection on OC-3 and STM-1 cards. This mode
requires fiber optic cables connected from subslot A on one node to subslot B on
the other node, and so on throughout the ring.
Access and interface modes

Access mode provides line protection in 1+1 mode for two HSA DS3 cards.
Interface mode provides card protection, and requires two HSA DS3 cards
connected to one common far-end DS3 transmission facility.
123
A closer view
RAPID protection RAPID is a node level response to an out-of-service aggregate link or a resource
switching failure. RAPID allows a second alternate cross-connection to be programmed into
the switching database of the node for use when the preferred path (DS0 or
super-rate channel) is unavailable. The Alcatel 5620 NM or the NMTI can be used
to configure RAPID.
When configured, use of the alternate path is automatic and continues until the
preferred path returns to service; intervention by a network manager is not
required at the time of failure. When alternate path bandwidth is routed over leased
lines, it can be used for low-priority connections during normal operation. When
RAPID is invoked, the low-priority connection is interrupted (bumped).
RAPID can also use ISDN as its alternate path. For more information, see “ISDN
bandwidth on demand” in chapter 2.
RAPID is intended for essential circuits that require immediate reconnection upon
link or resource failure. For circuits that require rerouting but not pre-assigned
alternate bandwidth, use of the Alcatel 5620 NM AAR is recommended.
Figure 3-11 shows RAPID protection for a typical network. An n × 56 kb/s

super-rate data connection between San Francisco and New York is RAPID
protected by an alternate path through Dallas.
Figure 3-11: RAPID path protection using an alternate leased line path
Red Alarm
Preferred path declared
Fault
T1
OOS OOS OOS
3600+ 3600+ 3600+

MainStreet T1 MainStreet T1 MainStreet
node node node
San Francisco Chicago New York
Alternate Alternate
path path
3600+
MainStreet
node
Dallas
11229
124
3. Design
At both the San Francisco and New York nodes, the data channel is
cross-connected to the aggregate link that travels through Chicago. To ensure
availability of service should a fault occur anywhere along this preferred route, the
San Francisco and New York nodes are programmed with a second network
cross-connection which, in this example, travels through Dallas (note that the
Dallas node must nail up this alternate path's cross-connection). If the
Chicago-New York link is completely severed, the New York and Chicago nodes
raise local alarms. Because the Chicago interface towards the San Francisco node
has been configured to invoke trunk conditioning when the link to which it is
cross-connected declares a Red Alarm, fault signaling codes are transmitted; in this
case, the code selected is the OOS code. When the San Francisco node detects the
incoming OOS codes, RAPID is invoked and the super-rate data channel now
travels end-to-end along the alternate path. RAPID would still work if the link
between the Chicago and New York node had only been severed in the New York
to Chicago direction. In this case, the Chicago node would raise a Red Alarm while
the New York node would detect OOS codes.
Note that while T1 links are shown, a mixture of E1, T1, V.35 PRI, and X.21 PRI
aggregates can also be used. In addition, had the end device been a PBX that did not
require RAPID, the San Francisco and New York nodes could be programmed to
transmit the seized signaling code towards their PBXs. This would prevent each
PBX from using the out-of-service aggregate link. Furthermore, if ISDN were used
for the alternate path, the San Francisco and New York nodes would establish a call
directly between them.
Two conditions must be satisfied to ensure a proper RAPID configuration. First,

the switching matrix must support a second cross-connection destination for the
channel being protected. Second, the destination must be capable of raising an
alarm upon which RAPID can be invoked.
RAPID is not limited to voice or data ports connected to an aggregate link. RAPID
can also be applied to tandem aggregate connections such as T1-to-T1, or
E1-to-X.21 PRI aggregates.
When a link failure occurs on a remote span, knowledge of the event can be
propagated through multiple tandem connections by special OOS signaling codes.
OOS codes are a user-selectable trunk conditioning option.
Single T1 and E1 cards and the Dual E1-2 card support a loopback detect feature
that prevents the use of a failed link when an external loopback is applied; this
feature is also supported on the TSM and DRM of Dual T1 and Dual T1-2 cards,
respectively. All aggregate cards support two-way trunk conditioning. T1, E1, and
X.21 and V.35 PRI aggregate cards also support one-way trunk conditioning.
125
A closer view
Alcatel 5620 Network AAR is a comprehensive network level rerouting algorithm that uses the network
Manager AAR database in the Alcatel 5620 NM to dynamically reroute paths during network
failures. AAR reroutes paths first by locating idle bandwidth within the network,
and second by bumping paths of lower priority.
If a fault occurs along any path, the Alcatel 5620 NM automatically reroutes paths
by scanning its network-wide database for idle bandwidth, including
noncontiguous 800 b/s HCM elements.
An example of AAR in a network is shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12: Alcatel 5620 NM Automatic Alternate Routing
3600+ 3600+
node node
Alternate
path
th
pa
ing
ist
Ex
Alternate
path
3600+ 3600+
node node
Alcatel 5620 PBX

Network Manager
15165
ISDN leased-line The ISDN backup application provides RAPID-like protection of leased lines using
protection nondedicated connections through the PSTN. In situations in which out-of-band
signaling is not needed and the backup connection does not need to be extremely
fast, ISDN B-channel backup is more cost-effective than standard RAPID.
The leased lines can be protected by either 2B+D lines terminating on BRI S/T
cards, 23B+D lines terminating on Dual T1-cards, or 30B+D lines terminating on
Dual E1 cards.
126
3. Design
In these backup applications, a protected channel normally transported by a leased

line uses a BRI interface as its alternative path. A one-to-one mapping of channels
from preferred to alternative paths is normally used. If a particular application
needs one ISDN interface to back up many channels, the network manager can
program ISDN backup using AAR. In these cases, the ISDN backup connection is
programmed as a preferred connection.
If a failure is detected at one endpoint node, the node immediately switches the
leased circuits to a BRI with the appropriate pre-programmed dialing information.
The answering node disconnects the specified channel from its preferred path and
connects it to the B channel specified by the network.
Octal T1 and Octal E1 card Octal T1 and Octal E1 card redundancy allows a connected Octal T1 or Octal E1
redundancy card to be protected by a mate card, which provides interface redundancy. A master
and a slave card are connected with a Y-cable to a distribution panel through
25-pair connectors located on the bulkhead behind each card. The physical lines
that connect two pairs of redundant Octal T1 or Octal E1 cards are made between
the distribution panels on both nodes.
An activity switch normally occurs when one card is able to give a higher level of
service than the mate card. The following conditions can contribute to a situation
that triggers an activity switch:
• protection switching commands

• card status
• port status and majority vote
• protection switching parameters
Other aggregate interface In addition to RAPID and AAR, the following aggregate interface cards can be
card redundancy duplicated within the same shelf to protect against card failure:
• Single 2.048 Mb/s E1 cards

• Single 1.544 Mb/s T1 cards using the T1 LIM
• X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI aggregate cards (both 56 kb/s and n × 64 kb/s
variants)
• V.35 PRI aggregate cards (both 56 kb/s and n × 64 kb/s variants)
Figure 3-13 shows two aggregate cards configured for interface redundancy. When
the cards disagree on the severity of an alarm and the active card declares a more
severe error for at least 2 seconds, an activity switch occurs (that is, the backup card
takes over). After an activity switch, the faulty card continues to monitor the
incoming data. If after 3 minutes the faulty card continues to raise alarms, it is
effectively taken out of service and aggregate redundancy for the link is unavailable
until a replacement card is provided. If the faulty card demonstrates normal
operation, fault processing terminates and the card resumes its backup role.
127
A closer view
Figure 3-13: Aggregate interface redundancy
DS3 LAC
Central
Aggregate office
Regular LAC
I/F (a)
E/O I/F
Aggregate
I/F (b) Protection LAC
3600+
PBX MainStreet node
Central
office Customer Transmission Public
premises facilities network
1125
2.048 Mb/s E1 card redundancy

Events that cause an activity switch between two 2.048 Mb/s E1 cards configured
for interface redundancy include:
• Severity 1 (highest)
• loss of framing alignment on the E1 link
• loss of incoming signal
• the received data stream is all binary ones, indicating that the far-end
E1 device has lost framing alignment
• Severity 2
• loss of multiframe alignment on the E1 link
• an all ones alarm appears on the signaling channel, indicating an alarm at
the far end of the link
• Severity 3
• severely errored data is received for 10 consecutive seconds, indicating that
the far end may have been taken out of service
• the tolerable framing error rate has been exceeded
• Severity 4
• the far end raises an alarm (other than an all-ones alarm)
128
3. Design
1.544 Mb/s T1 card redundancy

Events that cause an activity switch between two 1.544 Mb/s T1 cards configured
for interface redundancy include:
• loss of T1 framing synchronization (Red Alarm)
• loss of incoming signal
• Severity 2
• severely errored data is received for 10 consecutive seconds, indicating that
the far end may have been taken out of service
• the tolerable framing error rate has been exceeded
• Severity 3
• the far end cannot synchronize to the framing of the local T1
(Yellow Alarm)
X.21 PRI and V.35 PRI aggregate card redundancy

Events that cause an activity switch between two X.21 or V.35 PRI aggregate cards
(56 kb/s and n × 64 kb/s variants) configured for interface redundancy include:
• loss of framing alignment
• Severity 2
• the far-end link has raised an alarm
Aggregate power-loss In the event of power loss, the 1.544 Mb/s T1 (with a T1 LIM) and 2.048 Mb/s E1
bypass cards provide a link bypass relay that routes traffic around the faulty node to
prevent the total loss of traffic in drop and insert or tandem node configurations.
Aggregate card power-loss bypass and interface redundancy are mutually exclusive.
Fault signaling and trunk Fault signaling is used to transmit predefined signaling and data information from
conditioning voice ports, OCU-DP channel units, 64 kb/s Codirectional card ports, and
aggregate and high-speed aggregate links. Transmission of these codes occurs when
the interface is not cross-connected to anything, or when the UCS card to which it
is cross-connected is unavailable (for example, the UCS card is missing).
Fault signaling is also applied by trunk conditioning when a port or aggregate

timeslot is cross-connected to an aggregate or high-speed aggregate card whose link
is experiencing alarms and/or high error rates. When trunk conditioning is
invoked, the node breaks the cross-connection between the interface and the faulty
aggregate link in both directions and inserts fault signaling and data codes. In
addition, ATM Services, T1, E1, Optical Extension, MPA, TTC2M, and X.21 and
V.35 aggregate cards support an optional one-way trunk conditioning mode. In
this case, a link is viewed as two unidirectional links and trunk conditioning is
applied only to the link indicating a problem.
129
A closer view
The events that invoke trunk conditioning on a port or tandem aggregate channel
depend on the type of aggregate to which the channel is cross-connected. For
example, the following fault conditions can be enabled to trigger trunk
conditioning:
• T1 Red Alarms, Yellow Alarms, Failed State conditions, Framing Error State
conditions, and CSU loopbacks
• E1, V.35 PRI, and X.21 PRI aggregate Frame Alignment alarms, Multiframe
Alignment alarms, Distant alarms, Failed State conditions, and framing errors
(E1 only)
Signaling information is transmitted by CAS (TS16) for E1 links and the

supervisory channel for X.21 and V.35 PRI links. For Dual T1 cards equipped with
a TSM, signaling is transmitted in timeslot 24. Signaling codes are propagated
through tandem nodes, including cross-connections between different aggregate
types (for example, T1-to-V.35 PRI, T1-to-E1, E1-to-X.21 PRI).
Signaling codes are selectable on a port or timeslot basis. For analog voice ports, the
signaling options include:
• idle, which is normally used at endpoint nodes where the port device is a PBX
connected over an incoming trunk
• seized, which is normally used at endpoint nodes where the port device is a
PBX connected over a two-way or outgoing trunk
Aggregate and 64 kb/s codirectional links also support idle and seized signaling
codes along with the following:
• OOS-A, OOS-B or OOS-C

These are normally used at tandem nodes to inform remote-end node ports
that an aggregate link on which they have been carried has failed. Ports that
receive this signal and have RAPID functionality configured automatically
switch to their protecting path (see Figure 3-11).
• Custom
Custom allows the user to specify two codes: the first is transmitted for
approximately 2.5 seconds, then the second code is transmitted until the fault
condition clears.
• Hold
Hold continues to transmit the signaling code present when the fault occurred.
In the data stream, voice ports transmit no voice frequency information; aggregate
channels and 64 kb/s codirectional links transmit either all ones or a user-defined
value. For DDS, the ASC and MOS codes are transmitted upstream and
downstream respectively.
130
3. Design
Control packet The CPSS protocol is a packet-switched system based on the confirmed datagram
switching system service known as Fast Select, which is described in the ITU-T Red Book (1984),
under X.25 specifications. CPSS has built-in link integrity checking, and supports
message retransmission on initial failure and automatic rerouting on second
failure.
The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager uses CPSS to

communicate:
• NCI messages (for example, status and control information) to and from the
Alcatel 5620 NM and node management terminal
• ANS information to and from other network nodes
• NCI messages between the control complex and those node elements with
on-card HDLC controllers (ATM Services, Dual T1, Dual T1-2, Dual E1,
Dual E1-2, FRS, X.25 FRE, FRE, and DCP cards, and DTUs)
CPSS channels can be designated in several ways to accommodate a wide range of

network configurations. For communications with a locally connected
Alcatel 5620 NM or the node management terminal, the 3600+ MainStreet system
designates an RS-232 link for CPSS that can terminate on Control card serial ports
or DCP card serial ports.
For communications with a remote Alcatel 5620 NM, and for the exchange of ANS
information with other nodes, CPSS channels can be designated on a variety of
links.
Valid links include any of the following:
• timeslot 0 on E1 links (National Use Bits)

• the FDL on T1 links using ESF framing
• the supervisory channel on X.21 PRI and V.35 PRI aggregate cards (56 kb/s
and n × 64 kb/s variants)
• all or part of a 64 kb/s channel (DS0) on any aggregate or data link
• Control card and DCP card serial ports over modems over the PSTN
NCI messages can also be communicated using CPSS over the UDP/IP. That is,
NCI messages can be transported inband by IEEE 802.3/Ethernet LANs.
For communications involving node elements with on-card HDLC controllers, the
3600+ MainStreet architecture automatically configures appropriate CPSS
channels that are transparent to the operation of the node. Other node elements are
controlled directly by the Control card. Should a node ever become isolated from
the network, a backup CPSS route can be provided using modems and the PSTN.
131
A closer view
The initial release of CPSS provided a distance vector routing algorithm (router
version 1) and basic CPSS messaging and link costing options. CPSS v2, introduced
with Release 5.0, better accommodates large, complex networks by providing:
• an improved routing algorithm

This provides greater reliability, support for bigger networks, and a faster
healing time (the time required to update the routing tables in all CPSS routing
nodes after the failure of a CPSS link).
• enhanced network layer services
This allows for better error detection, larger-sized packets (for higher
throughput), and a new datagram service (for better performance).
• CPSS subnetworking (domains)
CPSS v2 nodes can be organized into groups called domains, allowing a large
CPSS network to be divided into smaller subnetworks. All subnetworks can be
controlled by the same network manager, but each node need only know the
topology of its own subnetwork, reducing routing complexity and improving
performance and reliability.
CPSS bandwidth between CPSS channels between nodes or between a node and its locally connected
nodes Alcatel 5620 NM or node management terminal, can be 4 kb/s or n × 8 kb/s, up to
64 kb/s. The bandwidth dedicated to CPSS varies according to node size and
network configuration.
Generally, 4 kb/s is sufficient between feeder nodes and hubs, while 16 kb/s is
sufficient between backbone nodes in medium-sized networks. Within the
3600+ MainStreet unit, the Control card and DCP card provide routing, sourcing,
and termination of CPSS channels. These cards provide HDLC controllers to
support the following CPSS channels:
• CPSS channels supported by the Control card

• 24 dedicated HDLC controllers, each supporting one CPSS channel
operating at 4, 8, 16, 24 . . . 64 kb/s
• CPSS channels supported by the DCP card
operating at 8, 16, 24 . . . 64 kb/s
operating at 8, 16, 24 . . . 64 kb/s, and 8 dedicated HDLC controllers, each
supporting one CPSS channel operating at 4 kb/s
Control card and DCP card CPSS channels at 4 kb/s use a special 4 kb/s transparent
subrate data format. These channels are converted to an HCM format when they
are multiplexed by an HCM or transparent SRM (located on a DPM2, a DSP2 card
or a DSP3 card), or switched by an SRS DS0 port. Alternatively, a 4 kb/s CPSS
channel can be cross-connected to the FDL channel on a T1 link. Larger networks
can employ several DCP cards. Consult your Alcatel representative for the
configuration information appropriate to your network application.
132
3. Design
SONET and SDH Data communications channels are used to provide level 1 intermediate system
data OSI routing in accordance with GR-255-CORE SONET and ITU-T G.784 SDH
communications standards. The 3600+ MainStreet system uses data communications channels to
route OSI messages from other SONET or SDH networks to appropriate
channels destination nodes.
Node and network This section describes the range of synchronization options supported by the
synchronization 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager. Both the eligible timing
sources and the algorithms used to select them are discussed.
Node timing sources The task of synchronizing a 3600+ MainStreet unit to a network is performed by
the Timing card. The timing source that drives the Timing card is selected from the
programmable timing sources available to the system (or the Stratum-3 system
clock can be allowed to free-run). Timing sources can be configured as either
external or derived.
If configured as external, the timing source is an external device connected to a

bulkhead BNC or DB25 connector. Only one external timing source can be
configured for each node, but redundant timing sources can be provisioned. If
configured as derived, the timing source is any of the following HSA, aggregate, and
data interfaces:
• HSA interfaces
• OC-3 cards
• STM-1 cards
• aggregate interfaces
• ATM Services cards
• Single E1, Dual E1, Dual E1-2, Octal E1 cards
• Single T1, Dual T1, and Dual T1-2 cards
• Optical Extension cards
• MPA cards
• X.21 PRI cards
• X.21 ESI PRI cards
• V.35 PRI cards
• data interfaces
• 64 kb/s Codirectional cards
• BRI S/T cards
• DCCs
The 3600+ MainStreet unit can be configured to select the current source of
synchronization based on a hierarchy of preferred synchronization sources.
Preferred synchronization sources can be predefined using a class system method
(class mode) or by using a quality level method (status message mode).
133
A closer view
In class mode, the node is assigned a class number of 1 to 14. The source class is a
measure of how desirable a source is: the lower the class number, the more
desirable the source.
In status message mode, a synchronization status message received by the

3600+ MainStreet node from the source defines the quality level of the source.
The current source of synchronization is selected based on the source offering
the best quality level.
In both class and status message mode, if two or more sources have the same class
number or quality level (respectively), the source with the highest priority is
selected. Priority is dictated by a source number assigned to the source (lower
source numbers have a higher priority). Up to four synchronization sources can be
prioritized.
Synchronization methods The programmable timing source that drives the Timing card can be chosen using
one of two methods: standalone synchronization or Automatic Network
Synchronization.
Standalone synchronization
Normally, standalone synchronization is used when a node is used in a
single-ended or point-to-point application. When operating in standalone mode,
the node uses only those timing sources that have been configured at that node.
Preferred standalone synchronization sources are defined using either the class or
synchronization status messaging method.
Synchronization status messages are used to determine the current

synchronization source when status message mode is enabled. The timing source
offering the best quality, as indicated by its status message, is selected to be the
current source.
Status messages are defined for SONET and SDH interfaces and for external timing
input and output DS1 signals in ESF format. Table 3-7 lists the status messages and
their SONET, SDH, and DS1 descriptions.
A source is initially defined as having a quality level of STU until a valid

synchronization status message is received. This means sources that do not support
or are not enabled for status message reception always have a quality level of STU.
Sources having a current quality level below a configured quality threshold are
treated as unavailable and are not used for synchronization. For example, a source
with a quality level of DUS cannot become the current synchronization source for
the node.
134
3. Design
Table 3-7: Synchronization status messages
Status Quality level SONET description SDH description DS1 description

message
PRS 1 Primary reference source Primary reference source Primary reference source
is traceable traceable (as defined in ITU-T traceable
G.811)
STU 2 Synchronized – Synchronized – traceability Synchronized –

traceability unknown unknown traceability unknown
ST2 3 Traceable Stratum 2 Traceable to SDH Traceable Stratum 2

holdover synchronization unit (as holdover
defined in ITU-T G.812T)
ST3 4 Traceable Stratum 3 Traceable to SDH element Traceable Stratum 3

holdover clock (as defined in ITU-T holdover
G.812L)
SIC 5 Traceable SONET clock Traceable to synchronous Traceable SONET clock

self-timed equipment timing source (as self-timed
defined in ITU-T G.81s)
ST4 6 – – Traceable Stratum 4

free run
DUS 7 Do not use for Do not use for synchronization Do not use for
synchronization synchronization
The default value for the quality level threshold is ST3, and the range of valid
messages is PRS to ST3. The Timing card internal Stratum 3 clock has a quality level
of ST3 and is always available regardless of the quality level threshold. The quality
level threshold cannot be set to SIC, ST4, or DUS because the Timing card internal
Stratum 3 clock would be selected as the current source before any source having
these quality levels.
If both ANS and status message modes are used for 3600+ MainStreet node
synchronization, there is no direct method to compare class and quality levels;
therefore, a translation table is used to select the best source of timing. The
translation table is configurable through NMTI. Table 3-8 lists the default values
for the translation table.
Table 3-8: Translation table default values
Quality level Status message Class
1 PRS 5
2 STU 8
3 ST2 11
4 ST3 14
5 SIC –
6 ST4 –
7 DUS –
135
A closer view
As an example, assume the best standalone synchronization source has a quality

level of PRS and the best ANS source has a class rating of 3. Using the default values
listed in Table 3-8, PRS maps to class 5, so the selected source of synchronization
would be the ANS source that has a class 3 rating.
For definitions of the status messages listed in Table 3-8, see Table 3-7.
Automatic network synchronization

ANS is a mechanism that ensures all nodes in a network are using the same timing
source, whether the source is local or remote. Key features of ANS are its ability to
prioritize up to 16 timing sources, tolerate plesiochronous network configurations,
and eliminate timing loops in large networks.
ANS v2 better accommodates large complex networks. ANS v2 features are:
• independence from the CPSS network

ANS v2 uses CPSS to transport synchronization information between ANS
nodes. However, changes in the CPSS network are transparent to the ANS
network. When the CPSS network heals itself after the failure of a CPSS link,
there is no change in synchronization sources.
• flexible ANS link options
Previously, all ANS links had to be configured with exactly one CPSS channel.
With CPSS v2 and ANS v2, the user is free to configure any valid link as an ANS
link regardless of the link’s CPSS configuration. A valid ANS link may carry no
CPSS channels, one CPSS channel, or more than one CPSS channel.
• enhanced network layer services
ANS v2 can take advantage of all the improved network layer CPSS packet
transmission services provided by CPSS v2, including better error detection,
larger-sized packets (for higher throughput), and a new datagram service (for
better performance).
• ANS subnetworking (zones)
ANS v2 nodes can be organized into independently synchronized groups
called zones, allowing a large ANS network to be divided into smaller
subnetworks to improve performance and reliability and to better support
plesiochronous networks.
In a network of Alcatel products running ANS v2, any number of timing sources
can be identified, but only one timing source provides network timing at any
instant within a sector. This timing source is referred to as the sector’s current
timing source.
The key to implementing ANS v2 is to specify which timing source is preferred as

the current source. Next, determine which source should take over in case the first
source fails, which source should take over in case both the first and second sources
fail, and so on. Several failure scenarios should be considered.
136
3. Design
Once the network source preferences are identified, a class number (1 to 14) is
assigned to each: the higher the preference, the lower the class number. Preference
may be determined by a source’s accuracy or its reliability, or by some other factor
or combination of factors, depending upon the network and the timing sources
available.
Timing sources can be assigned the same class number provided they can be traced
back to the same source along identical paths (that is, paths that provide no or
equivalent degradation of the timing signal).
When the timing sources have been configured and ANS v2 has been enabled, each
multi-aggregate Alcatel product running ANS v2 in the network automatically
generates a map of all network timing sources. Each time a configuration change
occurs, the map is updated (for example, when a new 3600+ MainStreet
multiplexer is brought online or when a timing source is reconfigured).
From this map, nodes automatically select the synchronization source with the
lowest class number as their timing source. If the best timing source is accessible
from a number of nodes, the node selects the source that is the fewest number of
hops away (a hop is a link between two pieces of network equipment). ANS v2
information is communicated between nodes using CPSS.
Plesiochronous networks It may be desirable or necessary to define network sectors that have independent
timing hierarchies. For example, an international network may have a
North American sector synchronized to the Bell System Reference Frequency, a
European sector synchronized to the British Standard Clock, and an Asia/Pacific
sector synchronized to the local PTT clock. Networks designed with this
configuration are called plesiochronous networks.
Because two or more synchronization sources are in use at the same time, frame
slips can occur on aggregate links joining different sectors. With this in mind,
3600+ MainStreet nodes have been designed to behave in a controlled and
predictable manner when used in plesiochronous networks. For example, all
aggregate cards contain slip buffers, and when a slip occurs, the disruption is
limited to the loss or duplication of a single frame at only one node. Frame
synchronization is also maintained during a controlled slip.
Table 3-9 provides information on ITU-T plesiochronous network performance

categories. Table 3-10 provides statistical information on the expected rate of frame
slips based on various node/network synchronization timing sources. It shows the
acceptable slip performance for an international network.
The performance categories have been recommended for both voice and data
connections. These values cover all sources of slips, such as temporary loss of
timing control at an intermediate node and slips due to plesiochronous operation.
137
A closer view
Comparing Tables 3-9 and 3-10, it is evident that only the Stratum-1 and British
Clock Tolerance would meet the ITU-T performance objectives for an end-to-end
connection involving one plesiochronously operated link (that is, a link between
two Stratum-1 clocks provides an MSR of one slip every 72.3 days, while a link
between Stratum-1 and British Standard clocks provides an MSR of one slip every
34.4 hours). If more links were used in the connection involving further
subnetworks, slip performance would be reduced.
Table 3-9: ITU-T performance category for international networks
Performance Mean slip rate (1) Percentage of time

category stated MSR is achieved
a < 5 slips in 24 hours > 98.9%
b > 5 slips in 24 hours and < 30 slips in < 1.0%

1 hour
c > 30 slips in 1 hour < 0.1%
Note
1. Averaged over one or more years.
Table 3-10: Probability of slips in plesiochronous networks
Clock Stratum-1 Stratum-2 Stratum-3 Stratum-4 British ITU-T SCC3

tolerance standard G.703 free
run
Stratum-1 (1) 72.3 d 2.2 h 27.2 s 3.9 s 34.4 h 2.5 s 5.0 s
Stratum-2 (2) 2.2 h 65.1 min 27.1 s 3.9 s 2.0 h 2.5 s 5.0 s
Stratum-3 (3) 27.2 s 27.1 s 13.6 s 3.4 s 27.2 s 2.3 s 4.2 s
Stratum-4 (4) 3.9 s 3.9 s 3.4 s 2.0 s 3.9 s 1.5 s 2.2 s
British 34.4 h 2.0 h 27.2 s 3.9 s 17.4 h 2.5 s 5.0 s

Standard (5)
ITU-T 2.5 s 2.5 s 2.3 s 1.5 s 2.5 s 1.2 s 1.7 s

G.703 (6)
SCC3 Free 5.0 s 5.0 s 4.2 s 2.2 s 5.0 s 1.7 s 2.5 s

Run (7)
Legend
d = days
h = hours
min = minutes
s = seconds
Notes
1. Stratum-1 clock tolerance ±1.0 x 10-11
5. British Standard clock tolerance ±1.0 x 10-9
6. ITU-T G.703 clock tolerance ±5.0 x 10-5
7. Control card free run clock tolerance ±2.5 x 10-5
138
4
Connections
This chapter describes the network and external equipment connections of the
3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager
Network The 3600+ MainStreet system connectors provide the interfaces between voice and
connections data communications equipment, and to the aggregate (public or private) network.
Table 4-1 lists the location and type of voice interface connectors.
Table 4-1: Voice interface connectors
Interface type Card and/or channel unit (1) Connector location (2)
4WTO 4WTO line card Bulkhead
4WDX channel unit Bulkhead
E&M E&M card and E&M channel unit Bulkhead
LGE LGE card and LGE channel unit Bulkhead
LGS LGS card and LGS channel unit Bulkhead
MRD MRD channel unit Bulkhead
2WMRD channel unit Bulkhead
Notes
1. All channel units are installed in a Common Carrier card; the connector location and type listed
are those of the Common Carrier card.
2. All connectors are the 25-pair type.
139
A closer view
Table 4-2 lists the location and type of data interface connectors.
Table 4-2: Data interface connectors
Interface type Card and/or Connector location (2)

channel unit (1)
2B+D 27LC2 line card Backplane or bulkhead
27LC3 line card Backplane or bulkhead
2B1Q line card Backplane or bulkhead
DNIC line card Backplane or bulkhead
2B1Q channel unit Backplane or bulkhead
BRI S/T card Backplane or bulkhead
4-wire DSU/CSU OCU-DP channel unit Backplane or bulkhead
4-wire no signaling 4WTO channel unit Backplane or bulkhead
DSX-0 DS0-DP Backplane or bulkhead
Full duplex synchronous (G.703) 64 kb/s Codirectional card Backplane or bulkhead
Multi-rate HDSL 28LC line card Backplane or bulkhead
RS-232/V.24 RS-232 DCC Faceplate

Backplane or bulkhead
RS-449/V.36 RS-422 DCC Faceplate

RS-449 /X.21 RS-422 DCC Faceplate

X.21 DCC Faceplate (3)

RS-530-A RS-422 DCC Faceplate

V.35 RS-422 DCC Faceplate

V.35 DCC Faceplate (3)

Notes
1. All channel units are installed in a Common Carrier card; the connector location and type listed
are those of the Common Carrier card.
2. All connectors are the 25-pair type.
3. Available on the 6-circuit version only.
140
4. Connections
Table 4-3 lists the location and type of HSA interface connectors.
Table 4-3: HSA interface connectors
Interface type Card Connector Connector type

location
DS3 coaxial HSA DS3 card Faceplate BNC (on MAU)
OC-3 optical OC-3 card, Long reach Faceplate FC/PC pair
OC-3 card, Intermediate reach Faceplate Duplex SC
STM-1 optical STM-1 card, Long haul Faceplate FC/PC pair
STM-1 card, Short haul Faceplate Duplex SC
STM-1 electrical STM-1 card, Electrical Faceplate BNC
Table 4-4 lists the location and type of aggregate interface connectors.
Table 4-4: Aggregate interface connectors

location
E1 Dual Optical Extension Faceplate Single mode FC optical

Bulkhead DB25
Single Optical Extension Faceplate Single mode FC optical

Bulkhead DB25
Dual E1-2 Faceplate BNC

Bulkhead DB25
Dual E1 Faceplate BNC

Bulkhead DB25
Single E1 Faceplate BNC

Bulkhead DB25
Octal E1 Bulkhead DB25
ATM Services Bulkhead DB25
RS-530A MPA Faceplate DB25

Bulkhead DB25
RS-449 MPA Faceplate DB25

Bulkhead DB25
T1 Dual T1-2 Faceplate RJ48C

Bulkhead DB25
Dual T1 Faceplate RJ48C

Bulkhead DB25
Single T1 Faceplate RJ48C

Bulkhead DB25
Octal T1 Bulkhead DB25
ATM Services Bulkhead DB25
141
A closer view

location
TTC2M TTC2M Faceplate DB15

Bulkhead DB25
V.35 MPA Faceplate DB25

Bulkhead DB25
V.35 PRI Faceplate DB25

Bulkhead DB25
X.21/V.11 MPA Faceplate DB25

Bulkhead DB25
X.21 PRI Faceplate DB25

Bulkhead DB25
X.21 ESI PRI Faceplate DB25

Bulkhead DB25
External Table 4-5 lists the shelf connectors that provide access to power supplies or external
equipment equipment.
connections Table 4-5: Power supply and external equipment connectors
Power supply or external Location Connector type

equipment
Power supply 1 to 3 Power Supply cards in reserved Terminal block

power slots (for 1 or 2 dc feeds)
External alarm source Bulkhead DB25
Node management Bulkhead, Control card faceplate RJ45
Ringing generator Bulkhead DB25
Timing inputs and outputs Bulkhead 75 Ω BNC

120 Ω DB25
142
5
System cards
System cards perform high-level functions, such as:
• DS0-based switching for all circuits

• broadband switching at the VT or TU level
• maintaining a nonvolatile database of all system connections and
configurations
• generation, termination, and routing of CPSS management protocol messages
• routing of OSI messages through the SONET/SDH section DCC
• NMTI or a node management station interfacing
• maintenance and diagnostic functions
• system timing and synchronization
System card faceplates are shown in Figure 5-1.
143
A closer view
Figure 5-1: System cards
Test
Card
Control Fac. Equip

A
B
C
Display
Tx Clock
S1
Serial Port 1
Rx Clock
DCE
Tx Rx
DS0
Activity Status Active
Status Status
Timing
Control Test Timing

card card card
11332
Control card The Control card provides all common control and node management facilities for
the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager.
The Control card:
• interfaces with the node or network manager

• controls the configuration database and system clocks
• coordinates the network synchronization signals
• runs the system software
• controls all narrowband and broadband interfaces and connections
A Control card must be installed in the shelf for the 3600+ MainStreet unit to
operate. The Control card needs a Timing card to bring interface cards into service,
and Timing card activity is coupled to the activity of the Control card.
Modules installed on the Control card allow the 3600+ MainStreet unit to access
the full range of narrowband and broadband slots and to maintain an extra bank of
Flash memory.
With no module installed, the Control card provides access to the upper eight UCS
slots (A1 to A8) in the shelf.
144
5. System cards
The Narrowband Switching module provides extended DS0 switching capabilities

to the 3600+ MainStreet shelf, and enables the system to communicate with the
lower eight UCS slots (B1 to B8) in the shelf. The module is used to supply
nonblocking 64 kb/s switching for all the UCS and HSA slots.
The Broadband Switching module allows the Control card to interface with the
upper eight UCS slots (A1 to A8), VT-1.5 or TU-12 mapper cards installed in slot
H3, and OC-3 or STM-1 cards installed in slots H1, H2, and H3. The module
provides 155 Mb/s broadband switching at the VT or TU level for each HSA slot in
the shelf.
With both the Narrowband and Broadband modules installed, the Control card
provides access to all 16 UCS slots and the VT-1.5 or TU-12 mapper cards or the
OC-3 or STM-1 cards installed in slots H1, H2, and H3.
The Bank-B Memory module provides the Control card with an extra bank of
Flash memory and SRAM, enabling Class I software upgrading. If a software
generic upgrade fails, you can downgrade to the previous generic immediately since
the previous software generic and configuration database are not lost.
Configuration of narrowband and broadband connections is performed through

the Control card using either the NMTI, Craft Interface, or Alcatel 5620 NM.
In a nonredundant configuration, you can install the Control card in either of two
dedicated card slots, CTL-A or CTL-B. These slots are linked to the TIM-A and
TIM-B (Timing card) slots, respectively. Therefore, you must install the Control
card in the slot that is linked to the slot containing the Timing card. In a redundant
configuration, you install Control cards in both CTL-A and CTL-B slots.
Timing card The Timing card generates timing for all cards in a 3600+ MainStreet shelf. The
Timing card allows a 3600+ MainStreet system to synchronize its timing to any
interface in a shelf, and has access to input and output connectors that allow the
card to derive timing from, or generate timing for, external devices.
The Timing card is an integral part of the control complex. The Control card needs
a Timing card to bring interface cards into service. Timing card activity is coupled
to the activity of the Control card. Each Timing card performs diagnostics on its
own hardware and reports the results to the Control card.
In a nonredundant configuration, you can install the Timing card in either of two
dedicated card slots, TIM-A or TIM-B. These slots are linked to the CTL-A and
CTL-B slots, respectively. Therefore, you must install the Timing card in the slot
that is linked to the slot containing the Control card. In a redundant configuration,
you install Timing cards in both TIM-A and TIM-B slots.
145
A closer view
Test card The Test card provides test access to voice and data circuits through:
• digital access (at the DS0 level) between digital test equipment and any
aggregate card, the 64 kb/s Codirectional card or the OCU-DP channel unit
• metallic access to the tip and ring pairs of the voice channel units and the
signaling leads of the E&M channel unit
The Test card can be installed only in the MTA slot.
Test module The Test module, which is installed on the Test card, provides analog and digital
tone tests. The module generates an analog or digital sinusoidal test tone which has
a configurable frequency and output level.
The Test module monitors the quality of digital data links, and can be used to
conduct frequency and amplitude tests on cabling connections, external
equipment, channel units, and local digital components.
Common Carrier The Common Carrier card acts like an extension of a shelf backplane, enabling the
card installation of up to four single-circuit channel units. The Common Carrier card is
transparent to the operation of the system and the channel units, and can be
installed in any of the eight shelf UCSs. The signals are passed over two control
serial buses and one data serial bus.
Figure 5-2 shows the four channel unit positions on a Common Carrier card.
Figure 5-2: Common Carrier card
Common
Carrier card
(has four channel
unit positions)
15037
146
5. System cards
Control card Tables 5-1 to 5-6 list the Control card configurable features.
configurable Table 5-1: Timing and synchronization configurable features
features
Feature Options
ANS
ANS operation Enabled

Disabled
ANS zones 1 to 255
Link failure recovery time 1 to 255
Link failure threshold 0 to 10
SSU failure recovery time 1 to 255
SSU failure threshold 1 to 5
Standalone timing source
Derived and external timing sources External

Derived
External timing input 8 kHz

2 MHz
1.544 MHz
Composite clock
External timing output 8 kHz

2 MHz
1.544 MHz
No clock
Node class number 1 to 14
Source failure recovery method Auto

30 s
1 min
10 min
30 min
Manual
Source failure threshold 0 to 30

Unlimited
Timing source class number 1 to 14
Timing source External

Derived
Undefined
Timing source enable/disable Enabled

Disabled
Timing source selection Selected

Deselected
147
A closer view
Table 5-2: Node configurable features
Feature Options
Date <dd-MMM-yyyy>
Node name Up to 12 alphanumeric characters (no

spaces, no underscores)
Time <hh:mmA or <hh:mmP or <hh:mmH>
Table 5-3: Access level and password configurable features
Feature Options
Access level 0 Level 0

No level 0
Access level 5 Level 5 + password
Access levels 1 to 4 Level 1 + password

Level 2 + password
Level 3 + password
Level 4 + password
Access level definition Read and write

Read only
No access
Passwords 8 to 12 characters, no spaces
Table 5-4: CPSS configurable features
Feature Options
4 kb/s CPSS 4 kb/s

8 kb/s
16 kb/s
Cost of dedicated CPSS Normal

Bias against
Bias towards
Cost of shared CPSS Normal

Bias against
Bias towards
CPSS node number 1 to 999
148
5. System cards
Feature Options
Domain number 1 to 32000
Interface speed 4 kb/s

8 kb/s
16 kb/s
48 kb/s
56 kb/s
64 kb/s
NOC number Up to 30 characters
Router version Version 1

Version 2
Satellite delay Satellite

Normal
Table 5-5: Control redundancy configurable features
Feature Options
Activity switch (forced) Release control
Activity switch (programmed) Name of the day

Daily
Time (hh:mmA or <hh:mmP or <hh:mmH)
Automatic activity switch disable Enable

Disable
Control complex redundancy Simplex

Redundant
Standby mode Hot

Warm
149
A closer view
Table 5-6: Serial port configurable features
Feature Options
Baud rate 300 b/s

600 b/s
1200 b/s
2400 b/s
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
38400 b/s
Auto baud
CPSS cost Normal

Bias against
Bias toward
Device type VT100

Printer
CPSS
CPSS modem
Call logger
Flow control Software

Hardware
None
Test card and Tables 5-7 and 5-8 list the Test card and Test module configurable features,
Test module respectively.
configurable Table 5-7: Test card configurable features
features
Feature Options
Card operation
Card slot Test card
Digital DS0 circuit
25-pair connector Enabled (faceplate connectors disabled)

Disabled (faceplate connectors enabled)
Error correction Enabled

Disabled
Fault signaling code A hexadecimal number: 00 to FF
Interface speed 2.4 kb/s

4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
56 kb/s
64 kb/s
150
5. System cards
Feature Options
Metallic test access connections
25-pair connector Enabled (faceplate connectors disabled)

Disabled (faceplate connectors enabled)
Metallic test access Direct monitor

High-impedance monitor
Split access
4-wire loopback
Table 5-8: Test module configurable features
Feature Options
Card operation
Card modules Test module

No module
Tone tester
Companding law Mu-law

A-law
Line impedance 600 Ω

900 Ω
Transmission mode 2-wire

4-wire
BERT
Data position F0-B6 to F7-B0
Rate adaption method HCM

Transparent
DDS
Signaling Enabled
Disabled
Transport position B0 to B7
Transport bandwidth 1 to 8
Tone tester maintenance
Analog tone test amplitude –40 to +10 dBm in 1 dB increments
Analog tone test direction Equipment

Facility
Digital tone test amplitude –40 to 0 dBm in 1 dBm increments
Loopback Loopback C
Tone frequency 200 to 3400 Hz in 1 Hz increments
Tone tester test Enabled

Disabled
151
A closer view
Feature Options
Tone type Single tone

White noise
Quiet tone
BERT maintenance
Audible error bell Enable

Disable
BERT pattern n, where n is an integer corresponding to a

BERT pattern
BERT statistics Clear statistics
BER test Enable

Disable
DDS control code n, where n is an integer corresponding to a

DDS control code
DDS control code parameters Show status of last eight MJUs

Show last eight Tx DDS codes
Show last eight Rx DDS codes
Inject BER None

1.00E-1
1.00E-2
1.00E-3
1.00E-4
1.00E-5
1.00E-6
1.00E-7
Inject ERR Inject an error
Loopback Loopback C
Round trip delay measurement Run a round trip delay measurement
152
6
High-speed aggregate cards
The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager supports the following

HSA cards:
• HSA DS3 cards

• OC-3 cards
• STM-1 cards
• TU-12 mapper cards (16-port and 32-port)
• VT-1.5 mapper cards (16-port and 32-port)
The HSA DS3 card provides a high-speed narrowband aggregate interface. The
other HSA cards operate in pairs to map narrowband data onto broadband
circuits. The VT-1.5 mapper and OC-3 cards are used in SONET applications, and
the TU-12 mapper and STM-1 cards are used in SDH applications.
HSA card faceplates are shown in Figure 6-1.
153
A closer view
Figure 6-1: HSA cards
DS3 Card OC-3 IR OC-3 LR
Local
Alarm
Local Local
Remote Alarm Alarm
Alarm
Remote Remote
Alarm Alarm
Active Active Active
Status Status Status
HSA DS3 OC-3 card OC-3 card

Intermediate reach Long reach
STM-1 LH STM-1 SH STM-1 Elec. TU 12 VT1.5
Local Local
Local Local Local Alarm Alarm
Alarm Alarm Alarm
Remote Remote
Remote Remote Remote Alarm Alarm
Alarm Alarm Alarm
Active Active
Active Active Active
Status Status
STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 TU-12 mapper card VT-1.5 mapper card

Long haul Short haul Electrical (16-port or 32-port) (16-port or 32-port)
15286
154
6. High-speed aggregate cards
HSA DS3 card The HSA DS3 card transports data between a 3600+ MainStreet unit and other
DS3-compatible equipment via a single, 44.736 Mb/s DS3 line interface. The HSA
DS3 card terminates the DS3 rate signal, multiplexes and demultiplexes the
constituent DS1 signals asynchronously, and cross-connects constituent DS0s to
different outgoing signals.
The HSA DS3 card supports a total of 28 T1 line interfaces. If the HSA DS3 card is
installed in either HSA slot 1 or HSA slot 2, a Narrowband Switching module is
required on the Control card.
The HSA DS3 card receives data from a MAU on the 3600+ MainStreet shelf
backplane. BNC connectors on the MAU enable connection to other
DS3-compatible equipment via 75 Ω coaxial cable. The maximum cable length is
137 m (450 ft).
OC-3 card The OC-3 card transports data between a 3600+ MainStreet unit and a SONET
network. The OC-3 card receives VT structured data over a backplane connection
with the VT-1.5 mapper card. The OC-3 card then combines the data onto
broadband STS-1 SONET links.
The OC-3 card is compliant with ANSI and Bellcore standards. It provides
termination of SONET section, line, and STS path overhead layers, and monitors
the VT path overhead layer without signal termination.
STM-1 card The STM-1 card transports data between a 3600+ MainStreet unit and an SDH
network. The STM-1 card receives TU structured data from a backplane
connection with the TU-12 mapper card. The STM-1 card then combines the data
onto broadband AU-3 or AU-4 SDH links.
The STM-1 card is compliant with ITU-T standards. The card provides
termination of the regenerator section, multiplexer section, and high order path
overhead layers. The STM-1 card monitors the LO path overhead layer without
termination.
TU-12 mapper card The TU-12 mapper card is available in 16-port or 32-port variants, and supports:
• 16 or 32 narrowband E1 ports
• 16 or 32 TU-12 broadband circuits
Each narrowband E1 port has the same channelized DS0 bandwidth and
connectivity as an E1 link (2.048 Mb/s).
Each narrowband E1 port has a fixed connection to an associated TU-12

broadband circuit on the TU-12 card. Primary rate links or DS0 circuits connected
to a narrowband E1 port are mapped onto the associated broadband circuit.
155
A closer view
VT-1.5 mapper The VT-1.5 mapper card is available in 16-port or 32-port variants, and supports:
card
• 16 or 32 narrowband T1 ports
• 16 or 32 VT-1.5 broadband circuits
Each narrowband T1 port has the same channelized DS0 bandwidth and
connectivity as a standard T1 link (1.544 Mb/s).
Each narrowband T1 port has a fixed connection to an associated broadband

circuit on the VT-1.5 card. Primary rate links or DS0 circuits connected to a
narrowband T1 port are mapped onto the associated broadband circuit.
Configurable Table 6-1 lists the OC-3, STM-1, TU-12, and VT-1.5 card configurable parameters.
parameters Table 6-2 lists the HSA DS3 card configurable parameters. Table 6-3 lists TCA
thresholds and default settings.
Table 6-1: OC-3, STM-1, TU-12, and VT-1.5 card configurable parameters
Parameter Option Card
Slot
1+1 operating mode (1) Unidirectional OC-3

Bidirectional STM-1
1+1 switching type (1) Nonrevertive OC-3

Revertive STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5
1+1 working card (1) Subslot A or B OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5
1+1 WTR timer (1) 0 to 60 min, in 1-min increments OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5
Card name 0 to 8 characters OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5
Card type OC-3 OC-3

STM-1 STM-1
TU-12 TU-12
VT-1.5 VT-1.5
Traffic protection mode 1+1 OC-3

Simplex STM-1
Ring TU-12
VT-1.5
156
Broadband port
AIS insertion on EBER response Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
AIS local alarm Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s, in 0.1-s increments OC-3

STM-1
APS remote alarm Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
DCC (2) Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
Near- and far-end TCA thresholds See Table 6-3. OC-3

STM-1
OC-3 outgoing section trace message 0 to 255 OC-3
RFI remote alarm Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
SDH format AU-3 STM-1

AU-4
Section trace Trace OC-3

Section ID STM-1
SES threshold 1 to 65535 OC-3

STM-1
Signal degrade threshold 1 E-5 OC-3

1 E-6 STM-1
1 E-7
1 E-8
1 E-9
Disabled
STM-1 section trace expected As present STM-1

received message
16 or 64 alphanumeric
characters
STM-1 section trace message length 16 byte STM-1

64 byte
STM-1 section trace Tx message 16 or 64 alphanumeric STM-1

characters
Synchronization System OC-3

Self STM-1
Through
157
A closer view
Broadband circuit
AIS insertion on EBER Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
AIS local alarm Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5
Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s OC-3

STM-1
AU-3 function TUG-2 STM-1

C3
AU-3 or AU-4 signal label (3) Nonspecific STM-1

TU group structured
Broadband circuit SES threshold 0 to 65535 OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5
Circuit name 0 to 8 characters OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5
Circuit provisioning Enabled TU-12

Disabled VT-1.5
Near- and far-end TCA thresholds See Table 6-3. OC-3

STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5
OC-3 path trace Tx message (3) 0 to 62 alphanumeric characters OC-3
Path protection hold-off timer (4) 0 to 10 s, in 0.1-s increments OC-3

STM-1
Path protection WTR timer (4) 0 to 60 min, in 0.1-s increments OC-3

STM-1
Path trace message change alarm (3) Enabled OC-3

Disabled
RFI remote alarm Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
TU-12
VT-1.5
158
Broadband circuit (continued)
Signal degrade threshold 1 E-5 OC-3

1 E-6 STM-1
1 E-7 TU-12
1 E-8 VT-1.5
1 E-9
Disabled
STM-1 path trace expected receive As present STM-1

message (3) 16 or 64 alphanumeric
characters
STM-1 path trace message length (3) 16 or 64 alphanumeric STM-1

characters
STM-1 path trace Tx message (3) 16 or 64 alphanumeric STM-1

characters
STS-1 function VT group STM-1

Bulk payload
STS-1 signal label (3) Nonspecific STM-1

VT structured
STS-1 VT group configuration (5) VT-1.5 OC-3

VT-2
VT-3
VT-6
TIM local alarm Enabled OC-3

Disabled STM-1
TU-12 signal label Equipped nonspecific TU-12

Asynchronously mapped E1
TUG-2 configuration (6) TU-11 STM-1

TU-12
TU-2
TUG-3 function TUG-2 STM-1

TU3
VT-1.5 signal label Equipped nonspecific VT-1.5

Asynchronously mapped DS-1
Working circuit (4) Subslot A circuit OC-3

Subslot B circuit STM-1
Narrowband DS1 or E1 ports
Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s TU-12

VT-1.5
CRC reframing Enabled TU-12

Disabled
CRC stats collection CRC errors TU-12

Framing bit errors
159
A closer view
Narrowband DS1 or E1 ports (continued)
DS1 framing D4 VT-1.5

ESF
E1 framing CAS TU-12

CCS
31 channels
Fault classes Red/frame off or on TU-12

Yellow/distant off or on VT-1.5
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Loopback detection None TU-12

Through CPSS VT-1.5
NU bits 0000 to 1111 TU-12
Trunk conditioning One-way TU-12

Two-way VT-1.5
Zero code suppression Transparent VT-1.5

Jam bit 7
Narrowband DS0 circuits
Clear channels NOSIG VT-1.5

RBS OFF
Custom trunk conditioning, ABCD bits 2- or 4-digit code, E&M TU-12

(idle=0000; seized=1111)
VT-1.5
Custom trunk conditioning, data 8-digit code, primary rate TU-12

(00000000 to 11111111)
VT-1.5
E1 signaling types Transparent TU-12

Clear channel
E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE RE
LGE EC
Fault signaling Seized TU-12

Idle VT-1.5
OOS-A
OOS-B
OOS-C
None
Inversion Inverted (voice) TU-12

Not inverted (data) VT-1.5
160
Narrowband DS0 circuits (continued)
Robbed bit signaling Enabled VT-1.5

Disabled
Super-rate formats Contiguous TU-12

Noncontiguous VT-1.5
Equidistant
T1 signaling types Transparent TU-12

Clear channel VT-1.5
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Terminate (7)
Notes
1. The card must be configured for 1+1 traffic protection.
2. The 3600+ MainStreet unit NET address must be configured before the DCC can be enabled.
3. This option is only available for STS-1, AU-3, and TUG-3 links.
4. This option is only available for STS-1, AU-3, TUG-3, VT, and TU circuits in ring mode.
5. This option is only available for STS-1 links.
6. This option is only available for AU-3 and TUG-3 links.
7. This option is only available for VT-1.5 mapper cards.
Table 6-2: HSA DS3 card configurable parameters
Parameter Options
Slot
Card name 0 to 8 characters
Card type Tertiary
Protection switching options (1) Non-revertive

Revertive
Traffic protection mode Simplex

Access
Interface
Working card (1) Subslot A or B
WTR timer length (1) 0 to 60 min, in 1-min increments
DS3 port
Alarm declare and clear time 0.1 to 60 s, in 0.1-s increments
161
A closer view
Parameter Options
DS3 port (continued)
Application M13
C-bit parity
automatic
DS# performance thresholds Line

Path
Line length Short

Long
Local alarm handling Enable AIS alarm

Disable AIS alarm
Protection switching on BER Disable

Error rate
Remote alarm handling Enable RAI alarm

Disable RAI alarm
X-bit monitoring Enable

Disable
DS2 port
Local alarm Enable AIS alarm

Disable AIS alarm
Port name 0 to 8 characters
Remote alarm Enable RAI alarm

Disable RAI alarm
X-bit monitoring Enable

Disable
DS1 port
DS1 framing D4
ESF
DS1 performance monitoring SES threshold

TCA thresholds
Fault classes Red off or on

Yellow off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Loopback detection None

Through CPSS
Trunk conditioning One-way

Two-way
Zero code suppression Transparent

Jam bit 7
162
Parameter Options
DS0 port
Clear channels NOSIG

RBS OFF
Custom trunk conditioning, ABCD bits 2- or 4-digit code, E&M (idle=0000;

seized=1111)
Custom trunk conditioning, data 8-digit code, primary rate (00000000 to

11111111)
Fault signaling Seized

Idle
OOS-A
OOS-B (ESF only)
OOS-C
None
Inversion Inverted (voice)

Not inverted (data)
Robbed bit signaling Enabled

Disabled
Super-rate formats Contiguous

Noncontiguous
T1 signaling types Transparent

Clear channel
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Terminate
Note
1. The card must be configured for access or interface traffic protection.
163
A closer view
Table 6-3: TCA thresholds and default settings
Card Port or circuit Thresholds 15-minute 24-hour

default (1) default (2)
OC-3 OC-3 and STM-1 port CV 25 200

STM-1 ES 20 200
SES 3 7
UAS 10 10
OFS (2) 1 10
SEFS (3) 1 10
OC-3 STS-1, AU-3, or AU-4 link CV 15 125

STM-1 VT or TU circuit ES 12 100
VT-1.5 SES 3 7
TU-12 UAS 10 10
Notes
1. ES, SES, SEFS, UAS, and OFS can be configured with 15-minute thresholds from 0 to 900,
and 24-hour thresholds from 0 to 65535. CV can be configured with 15-minute thresholds from
0 to 16383, and 24-hour thresholds from 0 to 1048575.
2. Applies only to the STM-1 card.
3. Applies only to the OC-3 card.
164
7
Aggregate cards
Aggregate cards provide an interface for aggregate links that can be leased from
service providers in n × 64 kb/s increments. The following aggregate cards are
offered to support these interfaces:
• ATM Services card

• E1 cards (Single E1, Dual E1, Dual E1-2, and Octal T1)
• Multiport Aggregate card
• T1 cards (Single T1, Dual T1, Dual T1-2, Octal T1)
• TTC2M
• V.35 PRI
• X.21 PRI
• X.21 ESI PRI
• Optical Extension cards (single and dual)
Figure 7-1 shows the faceplate of each aggregate card.
165
A closer view
Figure 7-1: Aggregate cards
Dual Dual E1 Multiport

2.048 E1 Card 2 Aggregate
Octal E1 ATM SC X.21 X.21/ Card
Card Mbps Card ESI PRI
E1 PRI Card
Card Card
Line 1
Port 1
TX TX Line 1
Port 2 Out Out TX Port 1
Port 3 Out
Port 2
RX
Port 1 Port 4 RX In Line Line Port 3
In RX
Port 2 In
Losync Port 4
Port 3 Losync Error
BP Error
Port 4 TX
Port 5 Line 2 Line 2
Port 6 TX TX
BP Out
RX Out LoSync Losync
Port 7
Port 8 RX RX
In In
Activity Losync
Losync Losync Error
Status Activity Error
Error
Status Status Status Status
Octal E1 ATM Services E1 card Dual Dual E1-2 X.21 ESI X.21 PRI MPA
card card E1 card card PRI card card card
Dual TTC-2M
Dual 1.544 Card
Optical Optical Octal T1 1.544 Dual T1 V.35
Extension Extension Mb/s Card Mb/s Card 2 PRI
Card Card T1 T1 Card
Card Card
Line 1
Line In Out
Mon F.Sync
Red Alarm
Line 1
LN M.Sync
Monitor Port 1 Ylw Alarm
EQ LIS
Port 2
Line 1 Losync Red Yel SAI
LoSync LoSync RX TX Port 3
Error Losync Error
Error Port 4
Error
Port 5 Line 2
In Out
Losync
Bypass Port 6 Mon
Line 2
Line 2
Red Alarm
Port 7 Red Alarm LN
Port 8 Line
Ylw Alarm Ylw Alarm EQ
Line
Red Yel
LoSync LoSync Losync Activity Losync
Losync Error
Error Error Error Status Error
Status Status Status Status Status

Status Status
90-3541-02
Single Dual T1 card Octal Dual Dual T1-2 V.35 PRI TTC2M
Optical Optical T1 card T1 card card card card
Extension Extension
card card
15304
166
7. Aggregate cards
ATM Services card The ATM Services card is a 4-port card that adapts n × 64 kb/s circuit-switched and
m × n × 8 kb/s packet-switched data for transmission over aggregate links. The
ATM Services card provides three main functions:
• inverse multiplexing over ATM

• circuit emulation service using AAL1 adaptation (including signaling
conversion between E1 and T1)
• HDLC service using AAL5 adaptation (UBR and nrt-VBR)
For more information about these functions and how the ATM Services card uses
and distributes bandwidth, see chapter 2.
The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager supports 4 and 16 Mb/s

E1 AAL1 and AAL1/5 variants, and 4 and 16 Mb/s T1 AAL1 and AAL1/5 variants.
Each variant:
• supports software downloading (two Flash banks)

• allows link quality monitoring
• supports up to 1024 AAL5 connections per slot
• supports up to 250 AAL5 connections per FSC
• supports network and service (both translated and transparent) interworking
for AAL5
• supports signaling multiframe lengths of 16 and 24 frames, when AAL1-
adapting E1 and T1 circuits, respectively
• complies with relevant sections of ITU-T Q.933 Annex A and ANSI T1.617
Annex D
The E1 ATM Services card variants:
• provide four 2.048 Mb/s digital trunk interfaces

• provide one logical ATM interface composed of up to four physical E1
interfaces, providing a UNI to an ATM network
• support R2D for E&M
• provide a software-configurable E1 termination impedance (75 Ω
asymmetrical and 120 Ω symmetrical), which provides a high-impedance
monitoring function
The T1 ATM Services card variants:
• provide four DS1 digital trunk interfaces, with D4 or ESF formats

• provide one logical ATM interface composed of up to four physical T1
interfaces, providing a UNI to an ATM network
• provide software-configurable line length (DSX-1 or DS1 options)
167
A closer view
E1 cards This section describes Single E1, Dual E1, and Dual E1-2 cards. These cards can be
installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs.
Single E1 card The Single E1 card conforms to ITU-T G.703, G.704, and G.732 specifications.
The card:
• provides one channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s DS1 digital trunk interface
with CAS, CCS, or 31-channel formats
• supports R2D for E&M
• accesses both network services and CPE such as digital PBXs
The Single E1 card supports these modules:
• E1 LIM (75 Ω asymmetrical and 120 Ω symmetrical), which provides a

short-distance E1 interface and a high-impedance monitoring function that
supports one-to-one interface redundancy
• NTI module, which provides a short-distance E1 interface
• CCM, which provides A-law and Mu-law companding conversion
The Single E1 card supports the following connections:
• bidirectional
• straight-through transparent
• bypass
Dual E1 card The Dual E1 card conforms to ITU-T G.703 and G.732 specifications at
2.048 Mb/s. The card:
• provides two channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s E1 digital trunk interfaces

with CAS, CCS, 31-channel, or 30B+D ISDN formats
• connects 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) at the DS0 level
• accesses both network services and CPE, such as digital PBXs
• supports unidirectional (one-way and broadcast) and bidirectional
connections
The Dual E1 card supports these modules:
• E1 LIM (75 Ω asymmetrical and 120 Ω symmetrical), which provides a

short-distance E1 interface and a high-impedance monitoring function that
supports one-to-one interface redundancy
• E1 HDSL LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level, and
increases the distance allowed between midspan repeaters in a CSA
168
7. Aggregate cards
The Dual E1 card supports these optional application modules:
• VCM3, which has a full M60 ADPCM transcoder with bundled, delta signaling
channel
• IFM, which provides the Layer 1 frame alignment enhancements necessary to
conform to the I-CTR-4 ISDN PRI CRC multiframe alignment standard
The Dual E1 card supports the following connections:
• simple and broadcast unidirectional

• bidirectional
• straight-through transparent
• bypass
• compressed voice channels, when equipped with a VCM3
Dual E1-2 card The Dual E1-2 card conforms to ITU-T G.703 and G.732 specifications at
• provides two channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s E1 digital trunk interfaces

• supports loopback detection
• supports software downloading
• provides errored second and performance threshold alarms
• allows link availability monitoring
• supports a cross-connection to either a Control card or DCP that terminates
National Use Bits configured to carry CPSS
connections
• supports the E1 LIM (75 Ω asymmetrical and 120 Ω symmetrical), which
provides a short-distance E1 interface and a high-impedance monitoring
function that supports one-to-one interface redundancy
• supports the optional FAM, which provides F-AIS detection on the E1 link
169
A closer view
Octal E1 card The Octal E1 card conforms to ITU-T G.703, G.704, and G.706 specifications at
• provides eight channelized, 32-channel, 2.048 Mb/s E1 digital trunk interfaces

• provides 1+1 card redundancy
• supports loopback detection
• supports software downloading
• provides errored second and performance threshold alarms
• allows link availability monitoring
• supports a cross-connection to either a Control card or DCP that terminates
• supports bidirectional connections
Multiport The MPA card provides four primary rate circuits that can be configured through
Aggregate card software to be DCE or DTE, and to support either RS-530-A, RS-449, X.21, or V.35
interfaces. The card has two alarm contacts that indicate an out-of-sync condition
on the X.21 interface, making it X.21 ESI-compatible.
The MPA card can connect to a total of 60 DS0s for data transport. Each interface
supports n × 48, n × 56, or n × 64 kb/s channels (where n = 1 to 30).
A supervisory channel, TS0, is available on each circuit, and is used to carry CPSS.
Channelization (framing and signaling) is maintained by a proprietary scheme
which also handles alarm messaging and inter-node communications.
The MPA card can be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs.
T1 cards This section describes Single T1, Dual T1, Dual T1-2, and Octal T1 cards. These
cards can be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs.
Single T1 card The Single T1 card conforms to the relevant sections of AT&T Channel Bank
specifications Pub 43801 and Pub 62411 at 1.544 Mb/s. The card:
• provides one channelized, 24-channel DS1 digital trunk interface with D4 or

ESF formats
• accesses both fractional and full T1 network services, and CPE such as digital
PBXs and remote channel units
• provides metallic test access through faceplate bantam jacks
170
7. Aggregate cards
The Single T1 card supports these modules:
• T1 LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DSX-1 level

• DSX-1, CSU, or CSU-2, which provide a primary rate interface at the DS1 level
• T1 IHTU LIM, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level, and
• CCM, which provides A-law and Mu-law companding conversion
When equipped with a T1 LIM or CSU module, the card provides a

high-impedance monitoring function that supports one-to-one interface
redundancy.
Dual T1 card The Dual T1 card conforms to the relevant sections of AT&T Channel Bank
• provides two channelized, 24-channel DS1 digital trunk interfaces with D4 or

ESF formats, 24-hour Error Free Seconds alarm, and user-configurable SES
definition
• cross-connects the 64 kb/s voice or data channels (or both) on each link at the
DS0 level
The Dual T1 card supports these modules:

• CSU-2, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level
The Dual T1 card supports these optional modules:
channel
• TSM, which dedicates timeslot 24 to pass signaling for the other 23 circuits on
the T1 link, providing 64 kb/s clear channels
171
A closer view
Dual T1-2 card The Dual T1-2 card conforms to the relevant sections of AT&T Channel Bank
• provides two channelized, 24-channel DS1 digital trunk interfaces with D4 or

ESF formats, 24-hour Error Free Seconds alarm, and user-configurable SES
definition
DS0 level
• provides metallic test access through faceplate bantam jacks
• supports ANSI TI.403 and AT&T 54016 performance monitoring and
loopbacks
• is used for customer-premises leased-line and 23B+D ISDN applications
The Dual T1-2 cards support these modules:

• CSU-2, which provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level
The Dual T1-2 card supports these optional modules:
• DRM, which dedicates timeslot 24 to pass signaling for the other 23 circuits on
the T1 link, providing 64 kb/s clear channels; supports loopback detection on
timeslot 24; provides RAPID protection for 24 DS0 super-rate circuits
• FT1 module, which generates and detects fractional T1 loopback activation
and detection codes according to Annex B ANSI T1.403
172
7. Aggregate cards
Octal T1 card The Octal T1 card conforms to the relevant sections of ANSI T1.403, GR-499,
AT&T Pub 62411, and ITU-T G.704. The Octal T1 card can be used in similar
situations as the T1, Dual T1, and Dual T1-2 cards. The Octal T1 card:
• provides eight channelized 1.544 Mb/s DSX-1 T1 interfaces

• supports card redundancy with switch times of less than 50 ms
• accesses full T1 network services and CPE such as digital PBXs and remote
channel units
DS0 level
• supports ANSI TI.403 and AT&T 54016 performance monitoring and
loopbacks
• is used for customer-premises leased-line and 23B+D ISDN applications
• provides a higher port density per UCS position than the DualT1-2 card
• provides circuit loopback C for unconnected units
The Octal T1 card does not support the following functionality provided on the
Dual T1-2 card:
• circuit loopback A
• companding conversion
• fractional T1 access
• fault signaling for 24 DS-0 RAPID connections
• timeslot 24 signaling and TS 24 loopback detection
• LIMs
• voice compression
Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter

The Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter provides wire-wrap access to each port on the
Octal T1 card. This adapter is a PCB comprising a 50-position Telco connector,
wire-wrap posts for transmit and receive, and tip-and-ring signals for eight T1/E1
ports.
TTC2M card The TTC2M card conforms to TTC Vol. 4 JJ-20.11 specifications. The card:
• provides one channelized 2.048 Mb/s interface

• converts CMI data for processing by PBX equipment
• provides thirty 64 kb/s channels for voice signaling
• carries all framing and channel-associated signaling in the supervisory channel,
TS0
173
A closer view
The TTC2M card supports the following cross-connections:
• T1 or E1 card channels (including DS0s on a T3 or E3 interface)

• MPA, V.35 PRI, or X.21 PRI channels
• E&M card channels
• 64 kb/s Codirectional card circuits
• HCV, LD-CELP (G.728), or CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A) voice
compressor inputs
• BRI S/T card channels
• LGS PLAR channels
• channels on another TTC2M card
Super-rate speeds are not supported on the TTC2M card.
The TTC2M card can be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs.
V.35 PRI card The V.35 PRI card presents a V.35 interface at the customer premises that provides
n × 64 kb/s (where n = 1 to 30) or 56 kb/s. Channelization (framing and signaling)
is maintained by a proprietary scheme that also handles alarm messaging and
internode communications.
There are two V.35 PRI card variants:
• V.35 PRI card (part number 90-0669-01), which provides 1 to 30 circuits and
an aggregate bandwidth of 64 to 1920 kb/s
• V.35 PRI card (part number 90-0669-03), which provides a single 56 kb/s
circuit and provides RAPID support between MainStreet nodes
X.21 PRI and The X.21 PRI and X.21 ESI PRI cards present an X.21/V.11 interface at the
X.21 ESI PRI cards customer premises that provides n × 64 kb/s (where n = 1 to 30) or 56 kb/s.
Channelization (framing and signaling) is maintained by a proprietary scheme that
also handles alarm messaging and internode communications.
The X.21 ESI PRI card is an X.21 PRI card with an interface lead directly connected
to the card’s supervisory channel HCM synchronization status. This can be used to
provide synchronization loss information to the external devices.
The X.21 PRI card and the X.21 ESI PRI card each provide 1 to 30 circuits and
accommodate an aggregate bandwidth of 64 to 1920 kb/s.
174
7. Aggregate cards
Optical Extension Single and Dual Optical Extension cards:

cards
• provide two channelized 2.048 Mb/s E1 interfaces, which conform to ITU-T
G.703 and G.732 specifications, and are used for connecting 64 kb/s data or
voice circuits
• provide one or two factory-installed IOTUs, which convert electrical signals to
optical signals for transmission over long distances (up to 18 km [11 mi])
• support a cross-connection to either a Control card or DCP that terminates
The Optical Extension cards support the E1 HDSL LIM, an interface module that
provides a primary rate interface at the DS1 level, and increases the distance
allowed between midspan repeaters in a CSA. The cards must have two installed,
working LIMs to operate properly.
The Optical Extension cards support these optional application modules:
channel
• IFM, which provides the Layer 1 frame alignment enhancements necessary to
conform to the I-CTR-4 ISDN PRI CRC multiframe alignment standard
There are four Optical Extension card variants:
• Single Optical Extension card, Class B (part number 90-0565-09)

• Single Optical Extension card, Class A (part number 90-0565-11)
• Dual Optical Extension card, Class B (part number 90-0565-10)
• Dual Optical Extension card, Class A (part number 90-0565-12)
Configurable Table 7-1 lists the ATM Services card configurable parameters, and indicates which
parameters card variant supports the parameter. Table 7-2 lists the Octal E1 card configurable
parameters. Table 7-3 lists the Octal T1 card configurable parameters. Table 7-4
lists the configurable parameters of all the other aggregate cards, and indicates
which card supports the parameter and (if necessary) which module is required.
Table 7-1: ATM Services card configurable parameters
Parameter Level Options AAL1 AAL1/5

card card
variant variant
ACT FSC 0 to 60000 ms ✓

IMA group (logical port) 1 to 2000 kbytes ✓
Physical port 1 to 2000 kbytes ✓
Activation timeout IMA group (logical port) 1 to 10000 ms ✓ ✓
Alarm clear time Physical port 1 to 60 s ✓ ✓
175
A closer view

card card
variant variant
Alarm declare time Physical port 1 to 60 s ✓ ✓

ASC circuit assignment FSC Assign ✓
Unassign
Bc PVC (frame relay parameter) 0 to 4294 kb ✓

Be PVC (frame relay parameter) 0 to 4294 kb ✓
CAC level IMA group (logical port) Static ✓ ✓
Dynamic
Card adaption type Slot AAL1 ✓ ✓

AAL1/5
Card backplane Slot 16 Mb/s ✓ ✓

4 Mb/s
Card type Slot ATM SC ✓ ✓

Card variant Slot E1 ✓ ✓
T1
Cell delay variation tolerance Circuit (ATM parameter) 0.1 to 32.0 ms (for signaling ✓ ✓
multiframe length = 16)
0.1 to 24.0 ms (for signaling
multiframe length = 24)
Cell fill level Circuit (ATM parameter) 2 to 47 bytes ✓ ✓

Cell payload scrambling Physical port Enabled (T1 default) ✓ ✓
Disabled (E1 default)
CIR PVC (frame relay parameter) 0 to 1984 kb/s ✓

CIR rate enforcement PVC (frame relay parameter) Enabled ✓
Disabled
CLP mapping PVC (frame relay and ATM CLP=DE ✓

interworking parameter)
CLP=0
CLP=1
Congestion clear time Slot 1 to 255 s ✓

Congestion raise time Slot 1 to 255 s ✓
CRC4 reframing (E1 only) Physical port Enabled ✓ ✓
Disabled
Custom trunk conditioning, Circuit (TDM parameter) 4-digit code, E&M ✓ ✓

ABCD bits (For T1: idle = 0000; seized = 1111)
(For E1: idle = 1101; seized = 0101)
Custom trunk conditioning, data Circuit (TDM parameter) 8-digit code, primary rate (00000000 ✓ ✓
to 11111111)
Deactivation timeout IMA group (logical port) 1 to 10000 ms ✓ ✓
176
7. Aggregate cards

card card
variant variant
DE mapping PVC (frame relay and ATM DE=CLP ✓

DE=FR-SCCS
DE=0
DE=1
E1 signaling types Circuit (TDM parameter) Transparent (SIG) ✓ ✓

Clear channel (NoSIG)
E&M
Continuous E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGE RE
LGE EC
EFCI mapping PVC (frame relay and ATM EFCI=FECN ✓

EFCI=0
Fault class Physical port Red/frame off or on ✓ ✓

Yellow/distant off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Fault signaling Circuit (TDM parameter) Seized ✓ ✓

Idle
OOS-A
OOS-B
None
Flags between frames FSC 1 to 10 ✓

Framing (T1 only) Physical port ESF ✓ ✓
D4
FSC application FSC Transparent HDLC ✓

Frame relay
Heartbeat polling interval FSC 5 to 30 s ✓

HEC correction Physical port Enabled ✓ ✓
Disabled
Interworking mode PVC (frame relay and ATM Network ✓

Service (transparent)
Service (translated)
Inversion Circuit (TDM parameter) None ✓ ✓

All bits
Alternate bits
Line build-out (T1 only) Physical port DS1: 0.0 dB, –7.5 dB, –15.0 dB or ✓ ✓
–22.5 dB
DSX-1: 0.6 dB, 1.2 dB, 1.8 dB, 2.4 dB
or 3.0 dB
177
A closer view

card card
variant variant
Line length (T1 only) Physical port DS1 ✓ ✓

DSX-1
Link quality monitoring (E1 only) Physical port HDB3 ✓ ✓

CRC4
Maximum differential delay IMA group (logical port) 0 to 50 ms ✓ ✓

Maximum frame size FSC 16 to 4472 octets ✓
Minimum number of active links IMA group (logical port) 1 to 4 ✓ ✓
in an IMA group
MCT FSC 0 to 60000 ms ✓

IMA group (logical port) 0 to 100% ✓
Physical port 0 to 100% ✓
Slot 0 to 100% ✓
MIR PVC (ATM parameter) 0 to 2147483 kb/s ✓
Network DLCI PVC (frame relay parameter) 16 to 1023 ✓
NU bits (E1 only) Physical port Default bit patterns (Tx = 11111) ✓ ✓
Custom
Number of CAC links IMA group (logical port) 1 to 4 ✓ ✓

PIR PVC (ATM parameter) 0 to 2147483 kb/s ✓
Port selection Circuit (ATM parameter) Physical port (P1 to P4) ✓ ✓
Logical port (IMA group) (L1)
None
Protocol type FSC LMI: User, Network or Network ✓

Extended
Annex A: User, Network or
Bidirectional
Annex D: User, Network or
Bidirectional
No protocol
Auto discovery (1)
PVC management PVC (frame relay and ATM Enabled ✓

Disabled
R2 signaling type Circuit (TDM parameter) R2 digital signaling ✓ ✓

Scaling factor IMA group (logical port) 1 to 10000% ✓
178
7. Aggregate cards

card card
variant variant
SCT FSC 0 to 60000 ms ✓

IMA group (logical port) 0 to 100% ✓
Slot 0 to 100% ✓
Service category PVC (ATM parameter) Nonreal-time variable bit rate ✓
Unspecified bit rate
Signaling multiframe length Slot 16 frame signaling (default for E1) ✓ ✓

24 frame signaling (default for T1)
Signaling transport Circuit group Enabled ✓ ✓

Disabled
SIR PVC (ATM parameter) 96 to 2147483 kb/s (T1) ✓

120 to 2147483 kb/s (E1)
Status enquiry message timeout FSC 5 to 35 s ✓

Status message rate FSC 1 to 255 ✓
Structured 64 kb/s mode Circuit (ATM parameter) Unstructured 64 kb/s ✓ ✓
Structured 64 kb/s
Super-rate formats Circuit (TDM parameter) Contiguous ✓ ✓

Noncontiguous
Equidistant
T1 signaling types Circuit (TDM parameter) Transparent (SIG) ✓ ✓

Clear channel (NoSiG)
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Termination impedance (E1 Slot 75 Ω ✓ ✓

only)
120 Ω
Transmit clock IMA group (logical port) Common transmit clock ✓ ✓

Independent transmit clock
Transmit timing Physical port Loop ✓ ✓

System
Transport bandwidth FSC n × 8 kb/s, n = 1 to 8 ✓

Transport position FSC Bn, n = 0 to 7 ✓
Trunk conditioning Physical port One-way or two-way ✓ ✓
179
A closer view

card card
variant variant
Virtual channel Circuit (ATM parameter) vpi/vci (vpi = 0 to 31, vci = 32 to ✓ ✓

65535)
Maximum burst size PVC (ATM parameter) 0 to 65535 cells ✓

VP shaping PVC (ATM parameter) Enabled ✓
Disabled
Zero code suppression (T1 only) Physical port Transparent ✓ ✓

B8ZS
Note
1. This option is not configurable when the auto-discovery protocol is used.
Table 7-2: Octal E1 card configurable parameters
Parameter Level Options
Alarm time Link

Declare 0.1 to 60 s
Clear 0.1 to 60 s
BER alarm option Link Enabled

Disabled
Card redundancy Slot Redundant

Simplex
Card type Slot Octal E1
CPSS pipe Link Enabled

Disabled
CRC4 reframing Link Enabled

Disabled
Custom fault signaling, Circuit 4-digit code, E&M

ABCD bits
Custom fault signaling, Circuit 8-digit code, primary rate

data (00000000 to 11111111)
E1 framing Link CAS

CCS
31 channels
180
7. Aggregate cards
E1 signaling types Circuit Transparent

Clear channel
E&M
Continuous E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE RE
LGE EC
E-bit Link Enabled

Disabled
Fault classes Link Frame off or on

Distant off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Loopback off or on
Fault signaling Circuit Seized

Idle
OOS-A
OOS-B
OOS-C
None
Inversion Circuit Inverted (voice)

Not inverted (data)
ISDN Link Non-ISDN

ISDN
Link monitoring DM Link Enable

threshold Disable
0 - 900
Link monitoring ES Link Enable

threshold
Disable
0 - 900
Link monitoring SES Link Enable

threshold Disable
0 - 900
Link monitoring UAS Link Enable

threshold
Disable
0 - 900
Local BER alarm Link SA4 bit on or off

indication over TS0 SA4
bit
181
A closer view
Loopback detection Link None

VIA CPSS
On fault
NU bit Link Enabled

Disabled
Port majority vote Slot All

Include
Exclude
R2 signaling type Circuit R2 digital signaling
RAI transmission Link On BER enable

On BER disable
Severely errored Link 5 x 10-6

seconds
10-5
10-4
10-3
Statistics type Link CRC4

HDB3
Super-rate formats Circuit Contiguous

Noncontiguous
Equidistant
Switching type Slot Revertive

Nonrevertive
T1 signaling types Circuit Transparent

Clear channel
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Trunk conditioning Link One-way

Two-way
Working card Slot Master

Slave
WTR timer Slot 0 to 60 min
182
7. Aggregate cards
Table 7-3: Octal T1 card configurable parameters
Alarm time Link

Declare 0.1 to 60 s
Clear 0.1 to 60 s
Card type Slot Octal T1
Card redundancy Slot Redundant

Simplex
Clear channels Circuit NOSIG

RBS OFF
DS1 framing Link D4 framing format

ESF
Custom fault signaling, Circuit 4-digit code, E&M (idle =0000;

ABCD bits seized=1111)
Custom fault signaling, Circuit 8-digit code, primary rate

data (00000000 to 11111111)
Fault classes Link Red/frame off or on

Yellow/distant off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Loopback off or on
Fault signaling Circuit Seized

Idle
OOS-A
OOS-B
OOS-C
None
Inversion Circuit Inverted (voice)

Not inverted (data)
ISDN Link Non-ISDN

ISDN
Line length Link 0 to 40 m (0 to 133 ft)

40 to 81 m (133 to 266 ft)
81 to 121m (266 to 399 ft)
121 to 162 m (399 to 533 ft)
162 to 199 m (533 to 655 ft)
Messaging mode Link 54016 on

54016 off
T1.403 on
T1.403 off
Performance monitoring Link Enable

ES threshold
Disable
1 to 900 (in 15-minute intervals)
1 to 65535 (in 24-hour period)
183
A closer view

SES threshold
Disable

UAS threshold
Disable
Loopback detection Link None

Via CPSS
On fault
Port majority vote Slot All

Include
Exclude
Robbed bit signaling Circuit Enabled

Disabled
Severely errored Link 10-3

seconds limit
10-4
10-5
5 x 10-6
10-6
10-7
Super-rate formats Circuit Contiguous

Noncontiguous
Equidistant
Switching type Slot Revertive

Nonrevertive
T1 signaling types Circuit Transparent

Clear channel
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Terminate
Trunk conditioning Link One-way

Two-way
Working card Slot Master

Slave
WTR timer Slot 0 to 60 min
184
7. Aggregate cards
Yellow alarm clearing Link On red clearing

On synchronization
Zero code suppression Link Transparent

Binary 8-zero suppression
Jam bit 7
Table 7-4: Other aggregate cards configurable parameters
Parameter Level Options Card (1)
Alarm time Slot or Declare: 0.1 to 60 s E1

circuit Clear: 0.1 to 60 s MPA
T1
TTC2M
OEC
V.35
X.21
Application Slot Non-ISDN Dual E1-2

ISDN Dual E1
Dual T1-2
OEC
Application module Slot No module Dual E1-2

FAM (2) Dual E1
Voice compression Dual T1
ISDN frame (3) Dual T1-2
OEC
Bandwidth Slot 1 to 30 (64 to 1920 kb/s) V.35

X.21
Bit error rate Link Enabled Dual E1-2

Disabled Dual E1
OEC
Bit error rate alarm Link Enabled Dual E1

Disabled Dual E1-2
SA4 bit on OEC
SA4 bit off
Buffering for jitter Slot 0.5 bits per 1 kb/s of bandwidth V.35
and wander
1.0 bits per 1 kb/s of bandwidth X.21
185
A closer view
Card type Card Dual E1-2 E1

Dual E1 OEC
E1
Dual T1 T1
Dual T1-2
Single T1
MPA MPA
TTC2M TTC2M
CCM Card Enabled Single E1

Disabled Single T1
Channel type Circuit Voice MPA

Data
Circuit inversion Circuit None TTC2M

ADI
Magnitude inversion
Clock inversion Slot Invert X.21

Normal
Clocking source Slot Service provider V.35

MainStreet node X.21
Code suppression Link or Transparent T1

types Slot Binary 8-zero suppression
Jam bit 7
Companding Circuit Conversion Single E1

conversion No conversion Single T1
Circuit None TTC2M

A-law
Mu-law
Compressed voice Link 32 kb/s ADPCM Dual E1-2

subframe type 32 kb/s ADPCM for G3 fax Dual E1
Dual T1
Dual T1-2
OEC
Control leads Circuit Forced on MPA

(RS-530-A, RS-449,
Forced off
X.21, V.35)
Control lead Circuit On MPA

conditioning OOS Off
None
Control lead initiated Circuit Enable MPA

local loopback Disable
CPSS Circuit Disable MPA

8 kb/s
16 kb/s
186
7. Aggregate cards
CRC4 reframing Link Enabled Dual E1-2

Disabled Dual E1
OEC
CSU loopback Slot Enabled Dual T1

detect (4) Disabled Single T1
None Dual T1-2

Through CPSS
Through TS24
On fault
Custom trunk Circuit 4-digit code (0000 to 1111) E1

conditioning, ABCD T1
bits
MPA
V.35
X.21
OEC
Custom trunk Circuit 8-digit code (00000000 to 11111111) E1

conditioning, data MPA
T1
TTC2M
V.35
X.21
OEC
DGM limit Circuit 1 to 60 MPA
Doppler buffer Circuit Enable MPA

Disable
E-bits option Link Enabled Dual E1-2

Disabled Dual E1
OEC
187
A closer view
E1 signaling types Circuit Transparent E1

Clear channel V.35
E&M X.21
Continuous E&M OEC
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3 (5)
LGE RE
LGE EC
R2 digital signaling
Transparent MPA
Clear channel
E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS GS
LGS LS
LGS PLAR
LGE RE
LGE EC
LGE GS
LGE LS
Errored seconds Circuit 1 to 255 Dual T1

Dual T1-2
F-AIS detection (6) Link or On Dual E1-2

Slot Off
Fault classes Slot Frame off or on V.35

Distant off or on X.21
Failed off or on
Link or Frame off or on E1

Slot Distant off or on OEC
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Red off or on Dual T1

Yellow off or on Dual T1-2
Failed off or on
Error off or on
CSU loopback off or on (7)
Circuit Frame off or on MPA

Distant off or on
Failed off or on
Loopback off or on
188
7. Aggregate cards
Fault classes, Slot Frame off or on TTC2M

continued
SAI off or on
Failed off or on
Error off or on
Fault signaling Circuit Seized E1

Idle MPA
OOS-A T1
OOS-B V.35
OOS-C X.21
Custom OEC
No trunk conditioning
In-use TTC2M
Idle
NIS
None
Framing Link or D4 framing format T1

Slot
Extended superframe format
CAS E1
CCS OEC
31 channels
X.21 NTU
Circuit HCM1 MPA

HCM2
HCM3
HCM4
HCM5
Framing type Link or 1 X.21

Slot
2
Gender (clocking Circuit DCE MPA

source)
DTE
HCM frame width Slot B1, B3, B5, B7 V.35

X.21
Interface type Circuit RS-530-A MPA

RS-449
X.21
X.21 ESI
V.35
Inversion Circuit Inverted E1

Not inverted MPA
T1
V.35
X.21
OEC
189
A closer view
Line build-out with a Link or 15 dB T1

CSU module Slot
7.5 dB
0 dB
Line length Link or 0 to 46 m (0 to 150 ft) T1 (11)

Slot
46 to 137 m (150 to 450 ft)
137 to 200 m (450 to 655 ft)
Link availability Circuit Enabled Dual E1-2

monitoring
Disabled Dual T1
Dual T1-2
Loopback detection Slot None E1

Through CPSS T1
Through TS24 OEC
On-fault
Circuit None MPA

CPSS
In-band
Nu bit Slot Enabled Dual E1

Disabled Dual E1-2
Number of circuits Circuit 1 to 30 (48 to 1920 kb/s) MPA
Number of signaling Slot 0 to 29 V.35

channels
X.21
Protection switching Circuit Protected by TTC2M

Protecting
R2 signaling type Circuit R2 digital E&M MPA
RAI Slot On loss of frame alignment Dual E1-2

On BER enable
On BER disable
Robbed bit signaling Circuit Enabled T1

Disabled
SAM No module Single E1

Normal (installed, not used) Single T1
Circuit order
Timeslot order
Severely errored Circuit 10-7 Dual E1-2

seconds (8) Dual E1
10-6
5 x 10-6 Dual T1
10-5 Dual T1-2

OEC
10-4
10-3
190
7. Aggregate cards
Severely errored Circuit 10-3 MPA

seconds limit
10-4
10-5
10-6
5 × 10-5
Shield grounding Link or Chassis E1

Slot
Rx shield grounding
Rx shield floating
Tx shield grounding
Tx shield floating
For master operation, set card to OEC

Tx shield floating
For slave operation, set card to Tx shield
grounding
For maintenance, set card to Rx shield
grounding
Slip buffer Circuit 10 to 39 frames MPA

Slip by 10 to 39 frames
SRM HCM data in Circuit Unused bit positions to the right of MPA
TS0 framing bits in TS0
Statistics type Slot CRC4 E1

HDB3
Super-rate formats Circuit Contiguous E1

Noncontiguous MPA
Equidistant T1
V.35
X.21
OEC
Supervisory channel Circuit 0 to 29 MPA

number of circuits
with signaling
Supervisory channel Circuit Any unused bit position MPA

framing bit
T1 signaling types Circuit Transparent E1

Clear channel T1
E&M V.35
LGS LS X.21
LGS GS OEC
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
R2 digital signaling (9)
Terminate (10)
191
A closer view
T1 signaling types, Circuit Transparent MPA

continued Clear channel
E&M
LGS LS
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGE LS
LGE GS
Timeslot 24 Card Timeslot 24 signaling Dual T1-2

signaling
No timeslot 24 signaling Dual T1
Transport Circuit 48 kb/s MPA

bandwidth
56 kb/s
64 kb/s
Trunk conditioning Slot Two-way E1

One-way MPA
T1
TTC2M
V.35
X.21
OEC
Voice compression Card Delta Dual E1-2

Delta G3 Fax Dual E1
Transitional Dual T1
Transitional G3 Fax Dual T1-2
OEC
Notes
1. E1 means Single E1, Dual E1, and Dual E1-2 cards; OEC means Single and Dual Optical
Extension cards; T1 means Single T1, Dual T1, and Dual T1-2 cards; X.21 means X.21 PRI
and X.21 ESI PRI cards.
2. Applies to Dual E1-2 card only.
3. Applies to Dual E1 card only.
4. Requires a CSU or CSU-2 module for the Single T1 card. Requires a CSU-2 module for the
Dual T1 card.
5. Does not apply to E1 cards.
6. Requires a FAM for the Dual E1-2 card.
7. Applies to Single T1 and Dual T1 cards only.
8. Options 10-7 and 10-6 do not apply to the Dual E1 card.
9. Does not apply to T1 cards.
10. Applies to E1 and T1 cards only.
11. Requires a DSX-1 module or T1 LIM
192
8
Voice interface cards and
channel units
Voice interface cards and channel units provide an interface between voice circuits
and a digital network. Voice interface cards are intended for on-premises,
short-loop applications that require high-port densities. Voice interface channel
units are intended for off-premises, CO applications that require long-loop and
individual-circuit modularity.
Voice interface cards and channel units are offered that support 4WDX, 4WTO,
E&M, LGE, LGS, and MRD interfaces.
The cards can be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs. The channel units can be
installed on the Common Carrier card when the power is on or off. For more
information on the Common Carrier card, refer to chapter 5.
Figure 8-1 shows the faceplate of each voice interface card and channel unit.
193
A closer view
Figure 8-1: Voice interface cards and channel units
E&M LGE LGS

4WTO Card Card Card
Circuit
Line 1 Line 1 Line 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Line 7
Busy 7
Line 8
Status
8
Line 9
4WDX 9
Line 10
10
Line 11
90-2769-01
11
Line 12
12
Status
4WDX channel unit

occupies two positions
on Common Carrier card 4WT0 card E&M card LGE card LGS card
LGE MRD
Busy Busy Busy Ringing Ringing
Status Status Status Status Status
International International 2WMRD

E&M LGS
90-1230-0X-00
90-1228-0X-00
90-1755-02
90-1229-01 90-1755-01
E&M channel unit LGE channel unit LGS channel unit MRD channel unit 2WMRD channel unit
7613
194
8. Voice interface cards and channel units
4WDX channel unit The 4WDX channel unit complies with signaling state requirements contained in
PUB 43801 and applicable sections in Bellcore TR-NWT-000057 Issue 2.
The channel unit:
• provides a 4-wire transmission line with bidirectional on- and off-hook

signaling
• provides an interface to devices that convert DX signaling to E&M signaling
• allows configuration of line impedance resistance (150, 600, or 1200 Ω)
The 4WDX channel unit is a dual-height channel unit, which occupies two
positions on the Common Carrier card. It can be installed in any two of the first
three channel unit positions on the Common Carrier card.
4WTO line card The 4WTO line card complies with applicable sections in PUB 43801 and in
Bellcore TR-NWT-000057. The card:
• provides 12 circuits with bidirectional, 600 Ω line impedance

• is designed for use in on-premises, 4-wire applications with no signaling
requirement
E&M interfaces E&M is a signaling arrangement characterized by the use of separate paths for
control and voice signals.
E&M card The E&M card:
• provides six short-loop E&M circuit interfaces

• offers a choice of Mu-law or A-law companding, 2- or 4-wire, Type I, II, III, or
V signaling, complex or resistive line impedances, and a wide range of TLPs
E&M channel unit The E&M channel unit can be configured to function as an E&M trunk or a PLR
trunk. For both trunk types, signaling is performed on separate leads from the
audio transmission paths. The channel unit:
• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop E&M circuit interface

• supports a configurable 2- or 4-wire transmission line interface
• supports E&M Type I, II, III, IV, V, and V with filter signaling, or PLR
functionality with Type I or II signaling (SG and SB apply only to E&M
signaling types II, III, and IV, and PLR signaling type II)
• can be configured to support Mu-law companding
• offers a wide range of TLPs
195
A closer view
LGE interfaces LGE interfaces are designed to interface to CO subscriber trunks or PBX lines. LGE
interfaces detect ringing current from the public exchange on an incoming call and
also provide outgoing calling conditions (loop/ground) to the public exchange.
LGE card The LGE card:
• provides six short-loop, exchange-end, FXO-compatible circuit interfaces

• supports a variety of T1 and E1 signaling types
• provides battery and tip supervision, ringing detection, and ring ground
capability
• offers a choice of Mu-law or A-law companding, complex line or resistive
impedances, and a wide range of TLPs
LGE channel unit The LGE channel unit:
• provides one long-loop, exchange-end FXO-compatible circuit interface

• offers Mu-law companding, 2-wire, 900 or 600 Ω complex impedances
• supports a variety of T1 and E1 signaling types
LGS interfaces LGS interfaces are designed to interface with PBX trunks or standard phones. Each
LGS subscriber interface separates the incoming analog signal into two
streams—one stream for the voice message (information) and another for the
signaling (control). When an LGS interface card is installed in a 3600+ MainStreet
shelf, a ringing generator also must be installed.
LGS card The LGS card:
• provides 12 subscriber-end, FXS-compatible circuit interfaces

• offers a choice of Mu-law or A-law companding, complex line impedances,
and a wide range of TLPs
• supports LS to LGS conversion, and a variety of T1 and E1 signaling types
LGS channel unit The LGS channel unit:
• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, subscriber-end, FXS-compatible

circuit interface
• supports LS and GS to E&M conversion, and a variety of T1 and E1 signaling
types
196
MRD interfaces The MRD channel units support permanent hard-wired connections between two
telephones over a T1 network. A conversion device, such as a PBX or a key system,
is the interface between a telephone and an MRD channel unit.
MRD channel unit The MRD channel unit is used in on-premises applications. The channel unit:
• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, subscriber-end, MRD circuit interface

• neither sources nor sinks dc power
• supports T1 signaling
2WMRD channel unit The 2WMRD channel unit is used in on-premises or off-premises applications.
The channel unit:
• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, subscriber-end, MRD circuit interface

• supports continuous adapt balance impedance
• neither sources nor sinks dc power
• supports T1 signaling
Configurable Table 8-1 lists all the voice interface card and channel unit configurable
parameters parameters, and indicates which card or channel unit (or both) supports each
parameter.
Table 8-1: Voice interface card and channel unit configurable parameters
Parameters Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
Audio transmission Slot 2-wire E&M

mode 4-wire
Card type Slot On-premises 2-wire MRD channel unit

Off-premises 2-wire
Companding Card Mu-law E&M

algorithm LGE
A-law (2)
LGS
E&M signaling Circuit Type I E&M channel unit

(E&M trunks)
Type II
Type III
Type IV
Type V
Type V with filter
197
A closer view

channel unit (1)
E1 signaling Circuit CBW LGS card
EC LGE
LGS
LCDC LGE
LGS
PLAR LGS
RE LGE
LGS
RE with central battery working LGS channel unit
Fault signaling Circuit Seized 4WDX channel unit

Idle E&M
LGE
LGS
Line balance Circuit < 200 Ω LGE card

> 200 Ω
Nominal E&M card

< 220 Ω
> 383 Ω
Nominal LGS card

< 800 Ω // (100 Ω + 50 nF)
Adapt and freeze LGE channel unit

Continuous adapt MRD channel unit
Fixed, short loop
Fixed, long loop
Adapt and freeze E&M channel unit

Fixed, short loop (90-1230-01, 02, 03)
Fixed, long loop
Nominal (90-1230-04, 07)

Alternate
Continuous adapt
Adapt and freeze
Nominal (90-1230-05, 06)
198

channel unit (1)
Line balance, Circuit Adapt and freeze LGS channel unit

continued (90-1228-02, 03)
Fixed, short loop
Fixed, long loop
Nominal (90-1228-04, 07)

Alternate
Continuous adapt
Adapt and freeze
Nominal (90-1228-05, 06)
Line impedance Slot See individual descriptions of E&M

voice cards and channel units LGE
in chapter 14.
LGS
Loop balance Circuit Midpoint capacitor 4WDX channel unit

enable/disable
Build-out capacitance
Build-out resistance
On-hook Tx mute (3) Circuit Enabled 4WDX channel unit

Disabled E&M channel unit
LGE channel unit
LGS channel unit
PLR signaling Circuit Type I E&M channel unit

(PLR trunks)
Type II
Signaling for A-law Slot Type IV E&M card

cards Type V
Signaling for Mu-law Slot Type I E&M card

cards Type II
Type III
Signaling mode Circuit E&M E&M channel unit

Pulse link repeater
Transmission only
Normal polarity 4WDX channel unit

Reverse polarity
Fixed bias
Switched bias
199
A closer view

channel unit (1)
T1 signaling Circuit DPO LGS channel unit
DPT LGE card

LGS card
GS LGE
LGS
GS to E&M conversion LGS channel unit
LS LGE
LGS
LS to E&M conversion LGS channel unit
LS to LGS conversion LGS card
PLAR LGS
PLAR with D3 framing LGS channel unit
Reverse battery signaling LGE channel unit
Transmission level Circuit See individual descriptions of 4WDX channel unit

points voice cards and channel units 4WTO card
in chapter 14.
E&M
LGE
LGS
MRD channel unit
Transmit path Circuit Enable/disable 4WDX channel unit

equalization
Loaded/nonloaded
Slope
Height
Bandwidth
Notes
1. E&M refers to both E&M cards and channel units; LGE to both LGE cards and channel units;
LGS to both LGS cards and channel units; and MRD to both MRD and 2WMRD channel units.
2. A-law companding is not supported on the LGE channel unit.
3. Restrictions:
- To prevent audio path singing, Tx mute must be enabled on the called circuit.
- While Tx mute is enabled, on-hook line up and test procedures cannot be performed (that is,
on-hook transmission is disabled).
200
9
Data interface cards and
channel units
Data interface cards and channel units provide an interface between local and
remote data devices and a digital network. Alcatel offers data interface cards and
channel units that support the following interfaces:
• 2B+D
• 4-wire DSU/CSU
• 4-wire no signaling
• DSX-0
• full-duplex synchronous (G.703)
• multirate HDSL
• RS-449/V.36
• RS-449/X.21
• RS-530-A
• V.24/RS-232
• V.35
The cards can be installed in any of the 16 shelf UCSs. The channel units can be
installed in any position on the Common Carrier card when the power is on or off.
For more information on the Common Carrier card, refer to chapter 5.
Data interface card and channel unit faceplates are shown in Figure 9-1.
201
A closer view
Figure 9-1: Data interface cards and channel units
2B1Q 27LC2 27LC3 28LC 64 Kb/s Basic DNIC

Card Card Card Card Codirectional Rate S/T Line
Card Interface Card
Card
Line 1 Line 1 Line 1 Line 1 Line 1

Line 1
Line 2
Line 3 Line 3 Line 3 Active Line 3
Line 3
Line 3 Line 1
Line 4 Line 2
Line 5 1
Line 6
Line 5 Line 7
2
Line 7 Line 6
Test Line 8
Line 8 Acc. Line 7
3 Line 9
Line 9 Line 8
Line 10
Line 10 4
Line 11
Line 11
Loop Line 12
Line 12 Status
Back
Status
Status
2B1Q 27LC2 27LC3 28LC 64 kb/s BRI S/T DNIC

line card line card line card line card Codirectional card line card
card
V.24/ RS-422 V.35 X.21/

RS232 Card Card RS449
4W TO Card Card
Active
Status Status
2B1Q Ready Ready Ready

1 1 1
Ready 1
2 2 2
2
90-1232-01-00-A
3 3 3
4 3 4 4
5 4 5
90-1452-01 6 6
2B1Q 4WTO
channel unit channel unit
OCU-DP
Synch
Status Status
DS0-DP
Status
90-1233-01
90-1231-01
OCU-DP DS0-DP
channel unit channel unit
RS-232 RS-422 V.35 X.21

DCC DCC DCC DCC
7610
202
9. Data interface cards and channel units
DNIC line card The DNIC line card connects the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth
Manager to a data device through a 2600 MainStreet series DTU using up to 5.8 km
(3.6 mi) of standard twisted-pair wire. Each circuit on a DNIC line card supports
one DTU, which provides either two or eight data interfaces. The card:
• provides 3, 6, or 12 ISDN compatible circuits

• supports 2B+D format
• supports an optional DPM1 or DPM2, which performs subrate multiplexing,
multidrop data bridging, and DDS/X.50 rate adaption
2B1Q line card The 2B1Q line card connects the 3600+ MainStreet unit to a data device through a
2700 MainStreet series DTU using up to 13.9 km (8.7 mi) of standard twisted-pair
wire. Each circuit on a 2B1Q line card supports one DTU, which provides two data
interfaces. The card:
• provides six 2-wire 2B+D interface terminations for extended range,

off-premises applications
• supports power-failure detection and line open/short detection
• provides 2B1Q (ISDN U-interface) line coding, sealing current, and lightning
protection
• supports optional DPM1 and DPM2 modules, which perform super-rate and
subrate multiplexing, transparent or HCM and DDS or X.50 rate adaption,
and multidrop data bridging
• supports ANSI T1.601-1992 compliant eoc functionality at the DSL level
• supports data port redundancy on 2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs
2B1Q channel unit The 2B1Q channel unit provides an ISDN U-interface, which meets standards set
out in ANSI T1.601. The channel unit:
• provides a bidirectional BRI over STP for a distance of up to 5.5 km (3.4 mi)
• provides 2700 MainStreet series DTU termination
• supports ISDN loop extension applications
203
A closer view
27LC2 line card The 27LC2 line card connects the 3600+ MainStreet unit to a data device through
a 2700 MainStreet series DTU using up to 13.9 km (8.7 mi) of standard twisted-pair
wire. Each circuit on a 27LC2 line card supports one DTU, which provides two data
interfaces. The 27LC2 line card:
• provides six 2-wire 2B+D interface terminations for extended range,

off-premises applications
• supports power-failure detection and line open/short detection
• provides 2B1Q (ISDN U-interface) line coding, sealing current, and lightning
protection
• supports super-rate speeds
• supports optional DPM1 and DPM2 modules, which perform subrate
multiplexing, transparent or HCM and DDS or X.50 rate adaption, and
multidrop data bridging
• supports ANSI T1.601-1992 compliant eoc functionality at the DSL level
27LC3 line card The 27LC3 line card provides 12 ports of 2B1Q connectivity for a 2700 MainStreet
series DTU. In addition to providing all the functionality of the 27LC2 line card, the
27LC3 line card supports:
• subrate multiplexing for all 12 ports when the DPM3 module is added to the
card
• off-card multiplexing
• dedicated CPSS to DTUs that support CPSS
The DPM3 supports HCM and is orderable separately for customers requiring
subrate multiplexing.
28LC line card The 28LC line card connects the 3600+ MainStreet unit to a data device through a
2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU using standard twisted-pair wire. Multirate HDSL
connections allow the card to support various bandwidths for different line lengths.
Each circuit on a 28LC line card supports one DTU, which provides one data
interface.
The 28LC line card supports both the 2-wire (1 Mb/s) 2801 MainStreet HDSL
DTU and the 4-wire (2 Mb/s) 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU. The 4-wire version of
the 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU can be configured to run in either 2-wire or
4-wire mode.
The 28LC line card has six multirate HDSL interfaces, which can support up to six
2-wire or three 4-wire multirate HDSL interfaces, or a combination of both. The
28LC line card is supported only in a double-bandwidth system.
In the 2-wire configuration, each multirate HDSL interface supports n × 64 kb/s

data rates up to 1024 kb/s, where n ≤ 16 DS0s.
204
In the 4-wire configuration, three line speeds are supported (line speed in 4-wire
mode refers to the total speed of both lines):
• 512 kb/s (allowing n × 64 kb/s, where n ≤ 8 DS0s)

There are two connection modes: 2-line mode and 6-line mode.
• When the 2-line mode is selected, the 28LC line card supports two lines at any
given time, with each line supporting up to 31 DS0s.
• When the 6-line mode is selected, the 28LC line card supports connections on
all six lines up to a total of 61 DS0s. The first four lines cannot exceed a
combined total of 32 DS0s, with no more than 31 DS0s allocated to each line.
The remaining 29 DS0s are available for allocation to the other two lines.
4WTO channel unit The 4WTO channel unit can be used in any 4-wire application where there is no
signaling required. The audio line circuitry is configured to match a 600 Ω line
impedance in both transmit and receive directions. The channel unit:
• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop, 4-wire TO interface

• offers Mu-law companding and 7 mA sealing current (at maximum loop
length)
DS0-DP channel The DS0-DP channel unit complies with Bellcore recommendations
unit TA-TSY-000077 and TR-TSY-000458. The DS0-DP channel unit allows
communication between DS1 and DDS equipment. The channel unit:
• provides an on-premises 135 Ω DSX-0 interface

• supports interface speeds of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 56, and 64 kb/s
BRI S/T card The BRI S/T card provides an ISDN S/T interface, which meets standards set out in
ITU-T I.430. The card:
• provides four or eight 4-wire BRIs

• supports 2B+D bandwidth – two 64 kb/s B channels and one 16 kb/s
D channel
• provides both nailed-up and semi-permanent 64 kb/s channels for ISDN
bandwidth on demand applications
205
A closer view
64 kb/s The 64 kb/s Codirectional card conforms to ITU-T specification G.703. The card:
Codirectional card
• provides four G.703 compatible, 64 kb/s codirectional circuit interfaces with
AIS detection
connections
OCU-DP channel The OCU-DP channel unit provides a single user interface between an incoming
unit DS0-A stream to a 4-wire synchronous digital data customer loop. The OCU-DP
channel unit allows interconnection of customer-premises DSU/CSUs to the
switched network.
The OCU-DP channel unit is compatible with any DSU/CSU that meets
PUB 62310, ANSI T1.403, and is compliant with Bellcore recommendations
TA-TSY-00077 and TA-TSY-00083. The channel unit is also compatible with any
switched 56 kb/s service provider-approved DSU/CSU.
The channel unit:
• provides one CO-compliant, long-loop OCU-DP interface

• supports standard DDS and Switched 56 Special Access
RS-232 DCC The RS-232 DCC meets or exceeds EIA RS-232C and ITU-T V.24 electrical
specifications. The card:
• provides six EIA RS-232C and ITU-T V.24 interfaces

• supports data rates up to 64 kb/s
RS-422 DCC The RS-422 DCC provides four full-duplex interfaces. Each interface can be
independently configured as RS-530-A, RS-449 (V.36), X.21, or V.35.
The RS-530-A and RS-449 interfaces meet or exceed RS-422-A (for category I
signals) and RS-423-A (for category II signals) electrical specifications and V.24
functional specifications. The X.21 interface meets or exceeds V.11 electrical
specifications and X.24 functional specifications. The V.35 interface meets or
exceeds V.11/V.10 electrical specifications and V.24 functional specifications.
The RS-422 DCC:
• can be connected to a UDP

• provides 3968 kb/s total bandwidth for each card with individual circuit data
rates up to 1984 kb/s
The RS-422 DCC can be provisioned with a Slip Buffer module, which provides
each RS-422 DCC interface with a bidirectional buffer. Each buffer can be
independently configured as 0, 2, 4, 8, or 16 bytes deep. The Slip Buffer module
would typically be used for satellite tail circuits and plesiochronous applications.
206
V.35 DCC The V.35 DCC meets or exceeds ITU-T V.35 electrical specifications. The card:
• provides three or six ITU-T V.35 interfaces

X.21 DCC The X.21 DCC meets or exceeds ITU-T X.21 electrical specifications and meets a
subset of EIA RS-449. The card:
• provides four or six ITU-T X.21/V.11 interfaces

Configurable Table 9-1 lists the configurable parameters for data interface cards and channel
parameters units. A full range of options is listed for each parameter, although not all options
apply to every card or channel unit on which the parameter can be configured.
Tables 9-2 to 9-4 list the control signal classifications, interface speeds, and rate
adaption.
Table 9-1: Data interface card and channel unit configurable parameters
Parameter Level Options Card and/or

channel unit (1)
8 kHz timing Circuit Continuous 64 kb/s Codirectional

signal
Interrupted (when circuit is
connected)
AIS signal Circuit Enabled (when circuit is not 64 kb/s Codirectional

connected)
Disabled
AQA Circuit Master V.35

Slave
Disabled
B-channel Circuit No inversion BRI S/T

inversion type (non- Mu-law
ISDN)
A-law
Bus type Slot (non- Point-to-point BRI S/T

ISDN) Point-to-multipoint
Short bus
Extended bus
Card operation Slot Super-rate operation V.35

SRM operation X.21
Channel unit Slot DTU 2B1Q channel unit

application
Loop extension
207
A closer view

channel unit (1)
Character Circuit 5 bits 2B1Q

length 6 bits 27LC2
(asynchronous
only) 7 bits 27LC3
8 bits DNIC
DCC
Circuit Circuit 0 to 31 DS0s (limited by line speed 28LC

bandwidth and backplane bandwidth)
Clocking Circuit Independent 2B1Q

source Locked 27LC2
dependence
(synchronous 27LC3
only) DNIC
DCC
Clocking Circuit Internal 2B1Q

source type
External 27LC2
(synchronous
only) Slave 27LC3
Special (DCE external; slip buffer DNIC
not present) (2) DCC
Composite Circuit Composite 2B1Q

inputs (branch) Not composite 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
Continuity Circuit Enabled 2B1Q

checking (SRM)
Disabled 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
Control signals Circuit High, low, end-to-end 2B1Q

(see Table 9-2) 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Custom trunk Circuit 4-digit code (0000 to 1111) 64 kb/s Codirectional

conditioning,
ABCD bits
Custom trunk Circuit 8-digit code (00000000 to 64 kb/s Codirectional

conditioning, 11111111)
data
D-channel Circuit 3DS0 enabled BRI S/T

transport mode
3DS0 disabled
B1 to B7
Circuit Low nibble 2B1Q channel unit

(5DS0)
High nibble
208

channel unit (1)
Data position Circuit F0-B7 to F9-B0 2B1Q

(HCM) (SRM)
27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
DDS multidrop Circuit 0 to 4 2B1Q

slave branch ID (branch)
27LC2
DNIC
Device gender Circuit DCE 2B1Q

DTE 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Device mode Circuit Asynchronous 2B1Q

Synchronous 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Duplex method Circuit Full duplex 2B1Q

Half duplex 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
E1 signaling Circuit Transparent 64 kb/s Codirectional

Clear channel
E&M
LGS RE
LGS EC
LGS PLAR
LGE RE
LGE EC
Error correction Circuit Enabled OCU-DP

Disabled DS0-DP
209
A closer view

channel unit (1)
Fault signaling Circuit None 64 kb/s Codirectional
Idle 64 kb/s Codirectional

OCU-DP
OOS-A 64 kb/s Codirectional
OOS-B 64 kb/s Codirectional
Seized 64 kb/s Codirectional

OCU-DP
MOS DS0-DP
CMI
FRC active Slot Enabled BRI S/T

(ISDN)
Disabled
HCM frame Circuit 1 to 8 (8 kb/s to 64 kb/s) 2B1Q

bandwidth (SRM)
27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
HCM frame Circuit B7 to B0 2B1Q

bandwidth (SRM)
27LC2
position
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Hub ID Slot 2-digit octal number (00 to 77) 2B1Q

(branch) 27LC2
DNIC
Input Circuit System 2B1Q

specification (branch) User 27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
Interface Slot TE BRI S/T

mode (3) NT
LULT 2B1Q channel unit

LUNT
210

channel unit (1)
Interface Circuit See Table 9-3 for individual data 2B1Q

speeds (kb/s) card and channel unit rate adaption 27LC2
interface speeds.
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
2.4 OCU-DP
4.8
9.6
19.2
56
64
Interface type Slot RS-499/V.36 RS-422

RS-530-A
X.21
V.35
ISDN BRI S/T

Non-ISDN
Inversion Circuit Enabled RS-422

Disabled
Layer 1 type Slot I.430/ANSI BRI S/T

(ISDN) ETSI
Line alarm Line Enabled 28LC

Disabled
Line impedance Line 600 Ω 4WTO
Line speed Line 4 DS0s (256 kb/s) 28LC

8 DS0s (512 kb/s)
16 DS0s (1024 kb/s)
31 DS0s (2048 kb/s)
Module type Slot None 2B1Q

DPM 27LC2
DPM2 27LC3
DPM3 DNIC
Multidrop data Circuit Master 2B1Q

bridges
Slave 27LC2
Disabled DNIC
DCC
Number of Slot 4 BRI S/T

interfaces
8
211
A closer view

channel unit (1)
Number of Circuit B1 BRI S/T

tandem B2
super-rate
circuits B1 and B2
(preferred or B1 and D
level 2)
B2 and D
B1, B2, and D
OOS control Circuit Forced off RS-422

lead output Forced on
state
Maintains current state
OOS data lead Circuit Custom RS-422

output signal
Mark
Space
Parity Circuit Even 2B1Q

(asynchronous Mark 27LC2
only)
No parity 27LC3
Odd DNIC
Space DCC
Performance Circuit Enabled 2B1Q channel unit

monitoring (3DS0)
Disabled
Rate adaption See Table 9-4 for individual data 2B1Q

card and channel unit rate adaption 27LC2
methods.
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Receive clock Circuit Inverted RS-422

(synchronous Normal
only)
RTS/CTS delay Circuit 0 to 1250 ms 2B1Q

27LC2
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Sealing current Circuit Enabled 4WTO

Disabled
Secondary Circuit Enabled OCU-DP

channel
Disabled
operation
212

channel unit (1)
Signaling Circuit Switched off 2B1Q (circuit or

branch)
Switched on
27LC2 (circuit or
branch)
27LC3 (circuit or
branch)
DNIC (circuit or
branch)
DCC
Slip buffer Circuit 0 bytes (buffer disabled) RS-422

depth
2 bytes
4 bytes
8 bytes
16 bytes
Stop bits Circuit 1 bit 2B1Q

(asynchronous 2 bits 27LC2
only)
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Subframe Circuit 1 to 20 2B1Q (circuit or

position (for branch)
DDS or X.50 27LC2 (circuit or
rate adaption) branch)
DNIC (circuit or
branch)
DCC
Switched Circuit Enabled OCU-DP

56 kb/s Disabled
operation
T1 signaling Circuit Clear channel 64 kb/s Codirectional

E&M
LGE GS
LGE LS
LGS GS
LGS LS
LGS PLAR
Transparent
T3 timer Slot 1 to 30 s BRI S/T

(ISDN)
Termination Slot Enabled BRI S/T

resistor (ISDN)
Disabled
TLPs Circuit RX: –16.0 to +8.0 dB 4WTO

TX: –17.0 to +13.0 dB
213
A closer view

channel unit (1)
Transport Circuit 1 to 8 (8 to 64 kb/s) 2B1Q

bandwidth (SRM, 27LC2
branch)
27LC3
DNIC
DCC
Transport mode Slot 3DS0 2B1Q channel unit

5DS0
Transport Circuit B7 to B0 2B1Q (circuit or

position branch)
27LC2 (circuit or
branch)
27LC3 (circuit or
branch)
DNIC (circuit or
branch)
DCC
Trunk Slot One-way 64 kb/s Codirectional

conditioning Two-way
Zero byte Circuit Enabled 2B1Q channel unit

substitution (3DS0)
Disabled
Notes
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units; DCC means RS-232, RS-422,
X.21, and V.35 DCCs.
2. This option applies to RS-422 DCCs only.
3. This feature applies only to non-ISDN applications (for example, loop extensions).
Table 9-2: Data interface card and channel unit control signals
Control DCE DTE Card or channel unit (1)

signal classification classification
ALB Input Output 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,

V.35
C Input Output RS-422, X.21
CTS Output Input 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,

V.35
DCD Output Input 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,

V.35
DSR Output Input 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,

V.35
DTR Input Output 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,

V.35
I Output Input RS-422, X.21
LL Input Output RS-422
214
Control DCE DTE Card or channel unit (1)

signal classification classification
RDL Input Output 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,

V.35
RI Output Input 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,

V.35
RL Input Output RS-422
RTS Input Output 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3, DNIC, RS-232,

V.35
TM Output Input RS-422
Note
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units.
215
A closer view
Table 9-3: Data interface card and channel unit interface speeds
Rate adaption Interface speed (b/s) Card or channel unit (1)

method
HCM (sync) 800 1200 1600 2400 4000 RS-232

4800 7200 8000 9600 1200
14400 16000 16800 19200 24000
28800 32000 38400
800 1200 1600 2400 4000 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,

DNIC, RS-422, V.35,
4800 7200 8000 9600 1200
X.21
14400 16000 16800 19200 24000
28800 32000 38400 40000 48000
56000 57600
HCM (async) 150 300 600 1200 2400 2B1Q, 27LC2, 27LC3,
DNIC, RS-232, RS-422,
4800 7200 9600 14400 19200
X.21, V.35
38400
DDS (sync) 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 RS-232
1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 2B1Q, 27LC2, DNIC,

RS-422, V.35, X.21
56000
DDS (async) 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 RS-232
1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 2B1Q, 27LC2, DNIC,

RS-422, V.35, X.21
48000
X.50 (sync) 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 RS-232
1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 2B1Q, 27LC2, DNIC,

48000 RS-422, V.35, X.21
Super-rates (2) n x m, where RS-422, V.35, X.21

(kb/s) n= 2 4 6 8
10 12 14 16
18 20 22 24
26 28 30
m= 8 16 24 32
40 48 56 64
n × 64 kb/s up to 256, 512, 1024, or 2048, 28LC

depending on line speed
Notes
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units.
2. Odd super-rate speeds are available for the V.35, X.21, and RS-422 DCCs with gate array
revision 2.
216
Table 9-4: Data interface card and channel unit rate adaption requirements
Level Rate adaption Card or channel Configuration requirements

method unit (1)
Slot HCM/Transparent 2B1Q, 27LC2, Requires DPM2 or DPM3

27LC3, DNIC
DDS
DDS Access
X.50
X.50 Telco
Circuit DDS 2B1Q, 27LC2, None

DNIC, DCC
Enhanced RS-422 None

transparent
Circuit HCM 2B1Q, 27LC2, None

27LC3, DNIC, DCC
Transparent 2B1Q, 27LC2, None

27LC3, 28LC,
DNIC, DCC
X.50 2B1Q, 27LC2, None

DNIC, DCC
Branch DDS DS0-A 2B1Q, 27LC2, Composite inputs only

DNIC, DCC
DDS DS0-B 2B1Q, 27LC2, Composite inputs only

DNIC, DCC
HCM 2B1Q, 27LC2, None

27LC3, DNIC, DCC
Transparent 2B1Q, 27LC2, None

27LC3, DNIC, DCC
SRM DDS DS0-A 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM2 and configured (slot
DNIC level) for DDS or DDS Access
DDS DS0-B 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM2 and configured (slot

DNIC level) for DDS or DDS Access
DDS-HCM 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM

DNIC
With DPM2 and configured (slot
level) for HCM or transparent
DCC None
HCM 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM2 or DPM3 and

27LC3, DNIC configured (slot level) for HCM
MJU 2B1Q, 27LC2, With DPM2 and configured (slot

DNIC level) for DDS or DDS Access and
(SRM level) for DS0-A
Transparent 2B1Q, 27LC2, Requires DPM

27LC3, DNIC
With DPM2 or DPM3 and
configured (slot level) for HCM or
transparent
DCC None
Note
1. 2B1Q means both 2B1Q line cards and 2B1Q channel units; DCC means RS-232, RS-422,
X.21, and V.35 DCCs.
217
10
Application and packet switching
cards
Application and packet switching cards are used in conjunction with the aggregate
cards, and with voice and data interface cards and channel units, to provide
additional specialized functionality. You can install these cards in any of the 16 shelf
UCSs.
Figure 10-1 shows the faceplate of each application and packet switching card.
219
A closer view
Figure 10-1: Application and packet switching cards
Call Data DSP DSP4 DSP 5

Processing Com Card Card Card
Card Proc'r
Card
Serial Port 1 Circuit 1

DSP 1
DSP 2
Circuit 3
DSP 3
Circuit 4
DSP 4
Circuit 5
DSP 5
Serial Port 2 DSP 6
DSP 7
Mode DSP 8
DSP 9
DSP 10
Data Processor
Activity
Status
CPC DCP DSP, DSP2, DSP4 DSP5, DSP5H

card DSP3 card card card
IMC Frame FRS Packet

Relay Card Engine
Engine
Serial Port Serial Port

Serial Port 1
FASTbus A FASTbus A
Data Serial Port 2 Data
Fault Fault
FASTbus B FASTbus B
Data Data
Fault Fault
Processor Data Data Data

IMC FRE FRS PE

card card card card
7681
220
10. Application and packet switching cards
Call Processing The CPC supports the ISDN backup application. The ISDN backup application
card provides RAPID protection for leased lines, using ISDN alternate paths. The CPC
provides backup for 2 (basic rate), 23 (T1 primary rate), or 30 (E1 primary rate)
64 kb/s B channels. The card:
• provides Layer 2 and 3 call processing functions for National ISDN,

EUROISDN and INS 64/1500 ISDN
• supports 2B+D, 23B+D, and 30B+D when used in conjunction with the
BRI S/T, Dual T1-2, and Dual E1 cards, respectively
• provides HDLC termination for up to 31 D channels
• supports software upgrading
Data The DCP card is a general-purpose platform that provides high-capacity HDLC
Communications switching capability. The DCP card is typically used in large networks, in nodes
with high CPSS traffic, in networks with large numbers of 3612 MainStreet
Processor card Narrow-band Multiplexers (using 4 kb/s CPSS), and for CPSS over satellite links.
The card:
• augments inherent CPSS routing facilities of common control with additional,

high-speed CPSS routing for up to 31 channels
• supports CPSS channels with long transmission delays, for example, CPSS
links over satellite links
When used for high-speed CPSS routing, the DCP card maintains a separate
switching table and removes most of the CPSS messaging burden from the Control
card. When configured for 4 kb/s CPSS, eight circuits are set aside (circuits 23
through 31) for 4 kb/s use; the remaining 23 circuits are available for n × 8 kb/s
CPSS, where n ≤ 8.
221
A closer view
Digital Signal The DSP cards and the IMC process DSP-based applications for interface cards.
Processing cards The DSP-based applications are maintained in a library and are downloaded to the
DSP circuits on DSP cards and on the IMC to process inputs from interface cards.
and modules, and The Control card holds the library from which the DSP cards and the IMC
Inverse download the applications.
Multiplexing cards
DSP modules provide additional DSP links for the cards on which they are
installed. The FAX/HCV module provides combined G3 fax and HCV voice
compression.
There are two DSP module variants, six DSP card variants, and one IMC variant,
each providing different levels of processing power. The cards and modules
support the following applications:
• subrate switching (DSP4 card)

• subrate multiplexing
• transparent rate adaption, HCM rate adaption and multidrop data
bridging (DSP, DSP2, and DSP3 cards)
• X.50 rate adaption and DDS rate adaption – DDS, DDS Access and
DDS Core (DSP2 and DSP3 cards)
• PCM bridging (DSP, DSP2, and DSP3 cards)
• voice conference bridging (DSP3 card)
• HCV voice compression (DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
• CS-A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A) and LD-CELP (G.728) voice compression
(DSP5 card)
• G3 fax signal demodulation/modulation (DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
• super-tandem operation (DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
• voice over frame relay with CS-A-CELP voice compression
• inverse multiplexing (IMC)
• echo cancellation (DSP, DSP2, DSP3, DSP4, DSP5, and DSP5H cards)
• V.32 modem relay (DSP5 card)
FRE card The FRE card provides the ability to switch the output of the frame relay interfaces
offered by end-user devices over any primary rate or data link. The FRE card
switches frames arriving on an incoming logical data link to an outgoing logical
data link (over the backplane bus), according to user-configured DLCs.
There are two variants of the FRE card: standard and X.25.
222
Standard FRE card The standard FRE card:
• provides industry standard-compliant frame routing, dynamic bandwidth

allocation, congestion control and frame error checking for up to 62 DS0s, and
super-rate n × 56 or n × 64 kb/s frame streams
• supports 8500 fps aggregate switching performance (64-byte frames over two
1536 kb/s frame streams), combined bandwidth of 3968 kb/s, 992 PVCs for
each frame stream with up to 1984 PVCs total for each card
• supports HDLC-based protocol encapsulation according to these standards:
• RFC 1490 and ANSI T1.617a Annex F
• ANSI T1.617a Annex G
• transparent HDLC encapsulation using the Annex G frame format,
including support for CPSS over frame relay
• offers QoS and fragmentation/defragmentation features to support delay-
sensitive traffic, such as VoFR
X.25 FRE card The X.25 FRE card provides complete, standards-compliant X.25 switching
capabilities, and supports most of the features available on the standard FRE card
for frame relay switching. For more information about X.25 switching, see
chapter 2.
FRS card The FRS card provides the ability to switch the output of the frame relay interfaces
offered by end-user devices over any primary rate or data link. The FRS card
switches frames arriving on an incoming logical data link to an outgoing logical
data link (over the backplane bus), according to user-configured DLCs.
The FRS card:
• provides industry standards-compliant frame routing, dynamic bandwidth

allocation, congestion control and frame error checking for up to 31 DS0s, and
super-rate n × 56 or n × 64 kb/s frame streams
• supports 2000 fps aggregate switching performance (64-byte frames over one
1920 kb/s frame stream), combined bandwidth of 1920 kb/s, 992 PVCs for
each frame stream with up to 1024 PVCs total for each card
• supports an optional SRIM, which processes data at subrate speeds (in HCM,
DDS, or X.50 format) that are not limited to multiples of 8 kb/s
• supports HDLC-based protocol encapsulation according to these standards:
• RFC 1490 and ANSI T1.617a Annex F
• ANSI T1.617a Annex G
• transparent HDLC encapsulation using the Annex G frame format,
including support for CPSS over frame relay
223
A closer view
PE card The PE card provides complete, standards-compliant X.25 switching capabilities,

and supports most of the features available on the standard FRE card for frame
relay switching. The PE card is similar in functionality to the X.25 FRE, but has
more memory, higher packet throughput, greater fanout, and is better suited for
networks that require full per-call accounting. For more information about X.25
switching, see chapter 2.
Configurable Tables 10-1 (CPC), 10-2 (DCP card), 10-3 (DSP cards and IMC) and 10-4 (FRS,
parameters FRE, and PE cards) list all the application and packet switching card configurable
parameters. Table 10-5 lists the SRIM configurable features.
For information about X.25 configurable parameters supported on the X.25 FRE
and PE cards, see the MainStreet X.25 Service General Information Book.
Table 10-1: CPC card configurable parameters
B-channel inversion type Circuit No inversion

Mu-law
A-law
B-channel search Circuit Channel search high

Channel search low
Backplane communication Slot Shared

Dedicated
Bearer capability Circuit (index) Speech

Clear 64 kb/s
Rate adaption
3.1 kHz
Bearer service Circuit H0 enable

H0 disable
Nx64 enable
Nx64 disable
BRI initialization Circuit Fixed TEI

Auto TEI
SPID 1
SPID 2
Bus configuration
Bus configuration type Circuit Point-to-point

Point-to-multipoint
Call status information reporting Circuit Report off

Report on
Dial delay Circuit (index) First (0 to 60 s)

Subsequent (5 to 60 s)
Dial/nondial Circuit (index) Enable

Disable
224
Interface speed (serial ports 1 and 2) Slot 9600 b/s

1200 b/s
Interface standard Circuit NTT

EUROISDN
NI-1
NI-2
Interface type Circuit None

BRI
E1 PRI
T1 PRI
Local number Circuit

Directory number None
Local
National
International
Unknown
Subaddress None
1 to 7 characters
Number of B channels Circuit

BRI 1 or 2
T1 PRI 1 to 23
E1 PRI 1 to 30
Number of B channels Circuit (index) 1 to 30

Auto
PCM encoding Circuit A-law

Mu-law
Auto
Remote number Circuit (index)

Directory number 1 to 25 digits
Subaddress None
1 to 7 characters
Retries Circuit (index) 0 to 12

Infinite
Verify/nonverify (incoming call) Circuit (index) Enable

Disable
225
A closer view
Table 10-2: DCP card configurable features
Feature Level Options
4 kb/s CPSS Card Enabled

Disabled
CPSS cost Circuit Bias against

Bias towards
Normal
Satellite delay Circuit Accept the delay time

Accept no delay time
Serial port CPSS cost Card Bias against

Bias towards
Normal
Serial port interface speed Card 300 b/s

600 b/s
1200 b/s
2400 b/s
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
Serial port protocol Card CPSS

VT100
Transport bandwidth Circuit 8 to 64 kb/s
Table 10-3: DSP card and IMC configurable parameters
Parameter Level Options Card
6 dB attenuation pad Circuit Enabled DSP3

Disabled DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
AC15 tone detection Circuit Enabled DSP3

Disabled DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
ADI Circuit (branch) Enabled DSP1

Disabled DSP2
DSP3
Antistreaming Circuit (branch) Enabled DSP1

Disabled DSP2
DSP3
Antistreaming timeout Circuit (SRM) 1 to 255 s DSP1

DSP2
DSP3
226
Automatic gain control Circuit Enabled DSP5

Disabled DSP5H
Bearer rate Circuit 56 kb/s IMC

64 kb/s
Bit rate (1) Circuit 8 kb/s DSP5

9.6 kb/s
12.8 kb/s
16 kb/s
Break timer Circuit (VoFR) 80 ms to 30 s DSP5
Broadcaster Circuit (bridge) Enabled DSP3

Disabled
Broadcast mode Circuit (bridge) Enabled DSP3

Disabled
Card circuits Slot 2 cct DSP1

6 cct DSP2
DSP3
Card operation Slot Delta signaling DSP1

HCVD DSP2
DDS core DSP3
G3 fax relay DSP4

Subrate switching
G3 fax or super-tandem,
or combined G3 fax and
super-tandem
Application number DSP5

LD-CELP
A-CELP
AVoFR
Application number DSP5H

Fax/HCV
Companding law Circuit (input for A-law DSP1 (PCM

VCBs, SRM for bridging)
Mu-law
PCM bridges,
DSP2 (PCM
HCV Automatic
bridging)
compression)
DSP3 (VCBs, PCM
bridging, HCV
compression)
DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
Composite inputs for Circuit (SRM) Composite DSP1

SRM branch channels
Not composite DSP2
DSP3
DSP4
227
A closer view
Compression Circuit 16 kb/s DSP3

8 kb/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Data position for HCM Circuit F0-B6 to F9-B0 DSP3

DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
DLCI assignment Circuit (VoFR) 16 to 1007 DSP5
DS0 port interface Circuit (SRS) 2.4 kb/s DSP4

speeds for DDS 4.8 kb/s
DS0-A rate-adapted
subrate sets 9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
48 kb/s
56 kb/s

speeds for DDS 4.8 kb/s
DS0-B rate-adapted
subrate sets 9.6 kb/s

speeds for X.50 4.8 kb/s
rate-adapted subrate
sets 9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
48 kb/s
DS0 port HCM Circuit (SRS) 1 to 8 (8 to 64 kb/s) DSP4

bandwidth
DS0 port HCM F-bit Circuit (SRS) B7 to B0 DSP4

position
DSP resources Slot 1 × 10 DSP5

2 × 10 (2)
2 × 10 DSP5H
DTMF tone detection Circuit (VoFR) Enabled DSP5

Disabled
DTMF tone Circuit (VoFR) Enabled DSP5

regeneration
Disabled
E1 signaling type Circuit Transparent DSP3

Clear channel DSP4
E&M DSP5
Continuous E&M DSP5H
LGS remote extension
LGS earth calling
LGS PLAR
LGE remote extension
LGE earth calling
Echo cancellation for Circuit Enabled DSP3

HCV circuit Disabled DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
DSP5
DSP5H
228
Echo cancellation Circuit 3 dB DSP3

return loss threshold
6 dB DSP4
0 dB to 12 dB DSP5
DSP5H
Echo clipping for HCV Circuit Enabled DSP3

circuit
Disabled DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
DSP5
DSP5H
Echo clipping Circuit –10 to –50 dBM0 DSP5

threshold DSP5H
Fax transmission Circuit Enabled DSP4 (Fax/HCV)

Disabled DSP5
Forced super-tandem Circuit Enabled DSP4

Disabled
Hub identification Slot 2-digit BCD octal number DSP1

(00 to 77) DSP2
DSP3
Input gain Circuit (input) –16 to +9 dB DSP3
LD-CELP post-filter Circuit Enabled DSP5H

Disabled
Listen-only mode Circuit (input) Enabled DSP3

Disabled
Mode Circuit Mode 1 IMC

Mode 3
Multidrop data bridge Circuit (SRM) Master DSP1

branch channel or Slave DSP2
circuit devices
DSP3
Nonstandard facilities Circuit All messages transmitted DSP4 (Fax/HCV)

frame handling and received
NSF messages blocked
Output gain Circuit (input) –16 dB to +9 dB DSP3
Rate adaption Circuit Transparent DSP3

methods (HCV)
HCM DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
Rate adaption Circuit (SRS) Transparent DSP4

methods (SRS circuit HCM
or DS0 port)
DDS X.50
4 kb/s CPSS
Rx and Tx gain range Circuit –12 to +12 dB DSP5H
SCID assignment Circuit (VoFR) 4 to 255 DSP5
229
A closer view
Set identifier X.50 Circuit (SRS) 1 to 20 (at 2.4 kb/s) DSP4

SRS
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15,
17, 19 (at 4.8 kb/s)
1, 5, 9, 13, 17
(at 9.6 kb/s)
5, 13 or 1, 9 (at 19.2 kb/s)
1 (at 48 kb/s)
Sidetone gain Circuit (input) Enabled DSP3

Disabled
Signaling jitter buffer Circuit (VoFR) Auto DSP5

Off
Signaling type Circuit E1 DSP3

T1 DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
Silence detection Circuit (VoFR) Enabled DSP5

Disabled
Silence detection Circuit (VoFR) –80 to –30 dBm0 DSP5

threshold
Subframe type Slot M44 DSP1

SIG16S DSP2
SIG16L DSP3
SIG32
Super-tandem Circuit Enabled DSP4

operation (3) Disabled DSP5
DSP5H
Super-tandem Circuit 0.1 to 3.1 s DSP4

synchronization time (0.1-s increments)
0.1 to 5.0 s DSP5

(0.1-s increments)
DSP5H
Synchronization Circuit Declare: 0 to 30 s IMC

alarm Clear: 1 to 30 s
Synchronization Loss Circuit Enabled DSP3

alarm
Disabled DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
Synchronization Lost Circuit Enabled DSP3

alarm Disabled DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
230
Synchronization Lost Circuit Declare: 0.5 to 60 s DSP3

alarm times
Clear: 0.5 to 60 s DSP4
DSP5
DSP5H
T1 signaling type Circuit Transparent DSP3

Clear channel DSP4
E&M DSP5
LGS LS DSP5H
LGS GS
LGS PLAR
LGS PLAR D3
LGE LS
LGE GS
Transmission level Circuit –3 to –15 dBm0 DSP4 (Fax/HCV)
Transmission rate Circuit 4800 b/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)

9600 b/s
Transport bandwidth Circuit 1 to 8 (8 to 64 kb/s) DSP3

for HCM (HCM_TRANS)
Circuit (HCM 16 to 64 kb/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)

8 kb/s)
Circuit (HCM 24 to 64 kb/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)

16 kb/s)
Circuit 8 kb/s 16 kb/s DSP4 (Fax/HCV)

(Transparent)
Transport position Circuit B7 to B0 DSP3
Circuit (HCM or B7 to B0 DSP4 (Fax/HCV)

Transparent
8 kb/s)
Circuit B7 to B1, B6 DSP4 (Fax/HCV)

(Transparent 16
kb/s)
User-side interface Circuit 384 kb/s IMC

speed
User/system reserved Circuit (SRM) System DSP1

inputs
User DSP2
DSP3
DSP4
Notes
1. The DSP5 card supports an 8 kb/s bit rate when A-CELP (G.729 and G.729A) voice
compression is configured. It supports an 8 or 16 kb/s bit rate with HCV voice compression and
9.6, 12.8, and 16 kb/s bit rates with LD-CELP voice compression. AVoFR uses A-CELP voice
compression for an 8 kb/s bit rate.
2. This option applies to CS-A-CELP (G.729A) voice compression. CS-A-CELP (G.729A) is of a
lower complexity than CS-A-CELP (G.729) voice compression. If AVoFR is configured and this
option is selected, 10 DSP circuits are allocated for AVoFR operation.
3. This option is supported on DSP5 cards configured for A-CELP voice compression and
AVoFR.
231
A closer view
Table 10-4: FRS, FRE and PE card configurable parameters
Parameters Level Options Card
ACT Encapsulation circuit 1 to 64 kbytes for FRS cards FRS

1 to 6000 ms for FRE cards FRE
1 to 1500 kbytes for PE cards PE
FASTbus interface 10 to 1000 kbytes FRE

PE
Frame stream 1 to 64 kbytes for FRS cards FRS

1 to 1500 kbytes for X.25 FRE and PE FRE
cards PE
1 to 6000 ms for FRE cards
Backplane communications Card Dedicated FRS

Shared FRE
PE
Bc DLC 0 to 1920 kb/s for FRS cards FRS

0 to 1984 kb/s for FRE and PE cards FRE
PE
Be DLC 0 to 1920 kb/s for FRS cards FRS

PE
Cable name FASTbus interface 1 to 15 alphanumeric characters, no FRE

spaces PE
Card application Card SRIM FRS

No module
CIR DLC 0 to 1920 kb/s for FRS cards FRS

PE
Circuit application Circuit Stream FRS

Rate adaption (1) FRE
Encapsulation PE
Class-of-service rate enforcement DLC Enable FRS

Disable FRE
PE
Congestion clear time Encapsulation circuit 1 to 1440 min FRE

PE
FASTbus interface 1 to 1440 min FRE

PE
Frame stream 1 to 1440 min FRE

PE
Switch (2) 1 to 1440 min FRE

PE
232
Congestion filtering Encapsulation circuit Enable FRE

Disable PE
FASTbus interface Enable FRE

Disable PE
Frame stream Enable FRE

Disable PE
Switch (2) Enable FRE

Disable PE
Congestion raise time Encapsulation circuit 0 to 240 s FRE

PE
FASTbus interface 0 to 240 s FRE

PE
Frame stream 0 to 240 s FRE

PE
Switch (2) 0 to 240 s FRE

PE
CPSS router version Card Router version 1 FRS

Host router
Encapsulated protocol maximum Encapsulation circuit 16 to 4472 octets FRS

frame size
FRE
PE
Encapsulation type Encapsulation circuit LAPB RFC 1490 FRS

LAPB Annex G FRE
Transparent HDLC PE
Trace agent
FASTbus CPSS Card CPSS1 FRE

CPSS2 PE
Fault handling mode Card Enhanced FRE

Standard PE
Flags between frames Frame stream 1 to 10 FRE

PE
Fragment payload size DLC 32, 34, 82, 128, or 130 bytes FRE
Fragmentation mode DLC Disabled FRE

Fragment
Reassemble
Fragment and reassemble
Interwork
Frame stream name Circuit 0 to 8 alphanumeric characters, no FRS

spaces
FRE
PE
233
A closer view
Heartbeat polling interval Frame stream 5 to 30 s FRS

FRE
PE
Interface speed Circuit 8 to 1920 kb/s for FRS cards FRS

PE
Major fault card dead threshold Card 1 to 30000 FRE

Unlimited PE
Major fault card reset threshold Card 1 to 30000 FRE

Unlimited PE
Maximum frame size Frame stream 16 to 4472 octets FRS

FRE
PE
MCT Encapsulation circuit 0 to 100% for FRS and PE cards FRS

PE
FASTbus interface 0 to 100% FRE

PE
Frame stream 0 to 100% for FRS, X.25 FRE, and PE FRS

cards FRE
1 to 6000 ms for FRE cards
PE
Switch (2) 0 to 100% FRS

FRE
PE
Protocol type Frame stream LMI User, Network, Network Extended FRS
ANSI T1.617 Annex D User, Network, FRE
Bidirectional
PE
ITU-T Q.933 Annex A User, Network,
Bidirectional (= Annex A Network)
No protocol
Auto discovery (network mode) (3)
DLC No port FRE

Annex A bidirectional (5)
Annex B bidirectional (5)
Protocol subchannel DLC 0 to 255 FRE
234
Report type Encapsulation circuit Alarm FRE

Network management events PE
FASTbus interface Alarm FRE

Frame stream Alarm FRE

None (FRE cards only)
Switch (2) Alarm FRE

SCT Encapsulation circuit 0 to 100% for FRS and PE cards FRS

PE
FASTbus interface 0 to 100% FRE

PE
Frame stream 0 to 100% for the FRS, X.25 FRE, and FRS
PE cards FRE
1 to 6000 ms for FRE cards PE
Switch (2) 0 to 100% FRS

FRE
PE
Serial port baud rate Card 300 b/s FRS

600 b/s FRE
1200 b/s PE
2400 b/s
4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
Serial port CPSS cost Card Normal FRS

Bias against FRE
Bias toward PE
Serial port type Card CPSS FRS

VT100 FRE
PE
Service category DLC Real time FRE

Best effort
Station identifier FASTbus interface 0 to 64 FRE

PE
235
A closer view
Status enquiry message timeout Frame stream 5 to 30 s (4) FRS

FRE
PE
Status message rate Frame stream 1 to 255 FRS

FRE
PE
Transport bandwidth Circuit 1 to 8 (8 kb/s to 64 kb/s) FRS

FRE
PE
Notes
1. This option applies only to FRS cards equipped with a SRIM.
2. The card CPU takes the same congestion clear time and congestion raise time values as those configured for the switch.
Congestion filtering is always enabled on the CPU, regardless of the configuration for the switch.
3. The auto-discovery option sets the auto-discovery protocol through the protocol type parameter, even though the auto-discovery
protocol is not a link management protocol.
4. This option is configurable as heartbeat, timeout, or status rate.
5. This option is not configurable if the auto-discovery protocol is used.
Table 10-5: SRIM configurable features
Feature Level Options Restrictions
A-bit handling Slot Nonstandard SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM

Standard
Aggregate circuit Circuit CPSS –

mode
Stream
Rate adaption
Data position Subrate F0-B7 to F9-B0 Rate adaption: HCM

stream
DDS method Circuit DS0-A and DS0-B: Rate adaption: DDS

2.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
56 kb/s (DS0-A only)
Framing bit position Circuit B7 to B0 Rate adaption: HCM
236
Interface speed Circuit 2400 b/s SRIM mode: DDS or HCM

4800 b/s Rate adaption: DDS
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
56000 b/s
Subrate 2400 b/s SRIM mode: DDS or HCM

stream 4800 b/s Rate adaption: DDS
9600 b/s DDS method: DS0-A
19200 b/s
56000 b/s
2400 b/s DDS method: DS0-B

4800 b/s
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
2400 b/s SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM

4800 b/s Rate adaption: X.50 Div. 2,
3 or 5
9600 b/s
19200 b/s
48000 b/s SRIM mode: X.50

Rate adaption: X.50 Bis
Loopback detection Slot On SRIM mode:

Off DDS or HCM
X.50 or HCM
Module type Slot No module –

SRIM
Rate adaption Circuit HCM –

DDS
X.50
Subrate DDS SRIM mode: DDS or HCM

stream
HCM –
X.50 SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM
Signaling Subrate On Rate adaption: HCM

stream
Off
SRIM mode Slot X.50 or HCM Module type: SRIM

DDS or HCM
237
A closer view
Subframe position Subrate 1 to 20 at 2400 b/s SRIM mode: DDS or HCM

stream Rate adaption: DDS
1 to 10 at 4800 b/s
1 to 5 at 9600 b/s DDS method: DS0-B
2 or 4 at 19200 b/s
1 at 56000 b/s (DS0-A
only)
at 2.4 kb/s: SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM

1 5 9 13 Rate adaption: X.50 Div. 2
17 21 25 29
33 37 41 45
49 53 57 61
65 69 73 77
at 4.8 kb/s: –
1 9 17 25
33 41 49 57
65 73
at 9.6 kb/s: –
17 33 49 65
at 19.2 kb/s: –
1 17 33 49
at 2.4 kb/s: SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM

1 to 20 Rate adaption: X.50 Div. 3
at 4.8 kb/s: –
1 3 5 7
9 11 13 15
17 19
at 9.6 kb/s: –
1 5 9 13
17
at 19.2 kb/s: –
1 5 9 13
at 48 kb/s: SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM

1 Rate adaption: X.50 bis
Transport bandwidth Circuit 1 to 8 (x 8 kb/s) Rate adaption: HCM
Subrate 1 to 8 (x 8 kb/s) –
stream
Transport position Subrate B7 to B0 Rate adaption: HCM

stream
X.50 method Circuit Div. 2 SRIM mode: X.50 or HCM

Div. 3
238
Management
11
Management overview
Alcatel management products enable service providers to push the limits of

efficient networking and service provisioning. The management portfolio includes
a full complement of products for managing a growing, carrier-scale, multiservice
network. Alcatel management products provide harmonized solutions that are
optimized to minimize network complexity and control the total cost of
ownership.
This chapter describes:
• types of management used for advanced communications networks

• service management
• network management
• node management
• open interfaces
241
Management
Types of The TMN reference model defined by the ITU-T provides service providers with
management layered management functions within a framework for the integrated management
of a communications network. Figure 11-1shows the management layers.
Figure 11-1: Management layers
Business
management
Service
A Open management
c interfaces
c
o
u
n
t Network
i Open management
n interfaces
g
Node
management
14765
The business management layer consists of management processes used to operate

the business of providing network-based services to customers.
The service management layer consists of management processes used to develop

and operate the services that the network supports.
The network management layer consists of management processes used to develop

and operate the infrastructure of the network.
The node management layer consists of management processes used to operate the
elements that make up the network infrastructure.
Open interfaces are a method OSSs use to manage the network and service layers.
Accounting is the means of providing information for billing of services.
Service Alcatel service management products offer:

management
• unparalleled subscriber service assurance by using network failure analysis
• reduced time-to-market for new services
• more rapid and cost-effective service activation
• web-based access, visibility, and control for service providers and subscribers
• advanced functions such as touchless provisioning and subscriber self-service
242
11. Management overview
Service management The suite of Alcatel and CrossKeys service management products leverages the
products Alcatel network management products and includes:
• Alcatel 5740 Service Subscription Manager

• Alcatel 5730 VPN Service Manager
• CrossKeys Resolve Si
Alcatel 5740 Service Subscription Manager

The Alcatel 5740 SSM is a software application designed for broadband DSL service
providers who use their access infrastructure to offer their own retail services or
offer broadband connectivity to ISPs and multimedia content providers. Such
services include high-speed Internet access, broadcast TV, and video-on-demand
services.
By mapping service-level objects such as retail providers, subscribers, service

subscriptions, and service definitions to network ports and virtual connections, the
Alcatel 5740 SSM reduces the complexity of service activation.
The Alcatel 5740 SSM interprets and displays network events in terms of their
impact on subscribers and services. The Alcatel 5740 SSM provides JAVA-based
GUIs for service providers who provide web-based access.
Alcatel 5730 VPN Service Manager

The Alcatel 5730 VSM is a software application designed for service providers who
offer private VPN-based services for outsourcing corporate Intranet connectivity.
These VPN services may be offered as:
• managed frame relay

• managed cell relay
• IP VPNs using Internet tunneling such as IPSec
• QoS-based VPNs using MPLS in the core network
VPNs are identified as subscriber sites and services. All configuration, fault, and
performance management of each VPN is presented through this subscriber and
service identification. Network services and events are shown as a visual map and
presented in terms of their impact on subscribers and services. The Alcatel 5730
VSM provides JAVA-based GUIs for service providers who provide web-based
access.
CrossKeys Resolve Si
CrossKeys Resolve Si is a software application that correlates network information
to provide an end-to-end service view by linking subscriber information and QoS
objectives. It manages service performance from a subscriber perspective and
provides the necessary information to ensure delivery of high-value services that
meet the subscriber requirements.
243
Management
Network The Alcatel network management portfolio includes a full complement of related
management management products for managing a growing, carrier-scale, multiservice
network.
Alcatel 5620 Network The Alcatel 5620 NM is an industry-leading network and element management
Manager platform that is distinguished by its open, scalable, highly available, multiaccess,
multitechnology management capabilities. Network management functions
include:
• fault management
• configuration management
• accounting
• performance management
• security functions
With the Alcatel 5620 NM, network operators have an easy-to-use GUI to perform
the following across a full range of ATM, frame relay, IP, X.25, and TDM elements:
• monitor network operation in real time

• set up and manage end-to-end connections
• perform diagnostics
• back up and restore node databases
• perform software upgrades
• isolate and manage problems
The Alcatel 5620 NM provides unsurpassed scalability and flexibility. It can

manage networks of any size, containing thousands of nodes.
Table 11-1 describes some of the features of the Alcatel 5620 NM.
Table 11-1: Features of the Alcatel 5620 NM
Feature Description
Sophisticated A relational database tracks the status of most of the MIB objects in the
network modeling underlying network elements.
Redundancy Service providers can deploy two Alcatel 5620 NM stations: one in
active mode and the other in standby mode.
Scalability The Alcatel 5620 NM offers unparalleled scalability to support networks

of up to 25 000 resources, 5000 nodes, over 250 000 SPVCs, over
1 000 000 SVCs, and up to 255 network operators.
Configuration Network nodes and resources can be configured down to the port and
management circuit level.
Partitioning Service providers can design network sharing structures so that they
can assign as much or as little of the network as required.
244
Feature Description
Connection Sophisticated access/backbone link and connection-management

provisioning and capabilities provide precise control over bandwidth usage and
activation connection routing for the following connection types:
• Layer 3
• Layer 2
• Layer 1
• PVCs, SPVCs, and SVCs
• IP services
Network map The network navigation map displays the network hierarchy and a
representation and structured view of the network. Icons represent individual elements and
navigation information about the connections between them.
Node The Alcatel 5620 NM automatically detects new nodes in the network
autodiscovery and immediately initiates a process to reconcile node details into its
management database.
Customized Service providers can represent the network in ways that are most
network views meaningful to the operator.
Fault management Network faults are immediately visible. Sophisticated tools for
diagnostics and maintenance functions aid in the recovery process.
Real-time status An advanced real-time GUI provides visibility of the status of all network
reporting components down to the port and circuit level.
Real-time Operators have real-time views of the performance of elements in the

performance network.
monitoring
Trouble ticketing Network status changes result in the automatic generation of trouble
tickets to aid in recording and tracking network faults.
Alarms Service providers can configure network elements to send alarms to the
Alcatel 5620 NM.
Fault notifications: Alarms or trouble tickets are exported in real time to other management
CMIP and SNMP systems in the form of CMIP notifications or SNMP trap messages.
Diagnostics and Physical port loopbacks and busy-outs, in-band ATM OAM loopback
maintenance and continuity testing, and the capability to perform on-node and
off-node maintenance connections, are powerful tools that enable
customers to carry out their own diagnostics and maintenance.
Path rerouting and The automatic connection recovery capability attempts to reroute all
recovery connections around any trunk failure because of a physical layer alarm.
If a network failure results in the loss of continuity of an end-to-end
connection, the Alcatel 5620 NM automatically attempts to move the
service to an alternate access point.
245
Management
Alcatel 5620 NM Statistics Collector

The Alcatel 5620 NM Statistics Collector is a scalable statistics collection system
that provides raw usage data across all network equipment and technologies
managed by the Alcatel 5620 NM. It can be used to collect statistics on items such
as PVCs, trunks and access links, IP interfaces, and X.25 resources. It collects
statistics at the physical, frame, and cell-switching layers of the network for traffic
volume, network congestion, and error conditions.
Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector

The Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector is a billing mediation system that collects and
processes SVC accounting records generated by X.25, frame relay, and ATM
switches. Processing includes aggregation, formatting, rating, and validation of the
collected accounting records.
Some Alcatel nodes can send SVC accounting data records to the Alcatel 5620 NM
Data Collector for processing, aggregation, formatting, rating, and validation.
The Alcatel 5620 NM Data Collector can send the data to the CrossKeys
NetworkWare KeyBill for flexible billing mediation options, to KeyInfo for
network reporting, and to KeyNotes for operator-to-operator communications.
Alcatel 5650 MultiNetwork Service Controller

The Alcatel 5650 MNSC is a software application that consolidates the
management of multiple Alcatel 5620 NM networks under a single end-to-end
management platform. Its ability to support separate networks makes the
5650 MNSC unique in the industry.
The separate networks may belong to one service provider or are recognized
through partnerships with other service providers. Consolidating the management
of multiple networks enables service providers to extend the geographical coverage
of their services to include partner networks, while continuing to enjoy
single-touch end-to-end provisioning and service assurance as if they had a single,
integrated network.
Alcatel 5660 Network Design System

The Alcatel 5660 NDS is a software tool for network design, optimization,
planning, and failure analysis. It enables network engineers to eliminate many of
the costly, specialized, and labor-intensive tasks involved in designing complex
networks and planning for future growth.
Network design is a complex process, requiring detailed knowledge of equipment

capabilities, bandwidth provisioning, and future connectivity requirements. The
Alcatel 5660 NDS incorporates years of engineering expertise and includes
automated features to save time inputting data and defining network details.
246
Related network Alcatel provides a number of network management products that complement
management products the Alcatel 5620 NM. These products share the LAN used by the Alcatel 5620 NM
and include the:
• Alcatel 5620 NM Network Simulator

• Alcatel 5521 PC-based Element Manager product family
• CrossKeys Resolve Ni
• CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo
• CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes
Alcatel 5620 NM Network Simulator

The Alcatel 5620 NM Network Simulator is a software application that looks and
functions exactly like the Alcatel 5620 NM but allows network operators to
simulate and test networks without attached equipment or bandwidth resources. It
is useful for training new operators without affecting live network operations and
for studying planned changes to an existing network.
Alcatel 5521 PC-based Element Manager product family

The Alcatel 5521 PC-based Element Manager product family includes the Alcatel
5521 EM, the Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Network Manager, and the Alcatel Craft
Interface Node Manager. Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows NT
are supported as the operating environments for these products. The Alcatel 5521
EM provides single-terminal control of small networks up to 100 nodes, allowing
remote configuration of network equipment and centralized alarm reporting. The
Alcatel 5521A Auxiliary Network Manager works with an Alcatel 5521 EM or
Alcatel 5620 NM to keep on-call network technicians informed of major network
events. It allows the technician to remotely access nodes through network links or
through modems on the PSTN.
The Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager provides an easy-to-use, text-based,

menu-based interface for configuring, monitoring, and troubleshooting nodes
through a node management session.
CrossKeys Resolve Ni
CrossKeys Resolve Ni is a software application that enables network operators to
explore and analyze networks from every angle to achieve rapid and
comprehensive understanding of network performance.
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo

CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyInfo is a network reporting application.
CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes

CrossKeys NetworkWare KeyNotes is a software application that provides
operator-to-operator communications.
247
Management
SNMP support SNMP is a management protocol used to set and monitor network configuration
and runtime parameters of entities in a TCP/IP LAN. The Alcatel 5620 NM
provides three levels of SNMP support for SNMP-managed devices:
• direct support as part of the Alcatel 5620 NM basic configuration

• Open SNMP, which is an integration with HP Openview NNM
• element managers such as CrossKeys CrossControl
CPSS The Alcatel 5620 NM uses CPSS, a proprietary communication protocol, to

manage the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager. CPSS messages
carry the following types of information:
• control commands
• statistics for performance monitoring
• alarms for diagnostic purposes
• configuration status data
CPSS messages travel through in-band or out-of-band CPSS links. In-band CPSS
links use the same medium that subscriber traffic uses, such as a T1 link between
two 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Managers. Out-of-band CPSS links
use a different medium than that used by subscriber traffic, such as an RS-232 link
between the Alcatel 5620 NM and a 3600+ MainStreet system.
Connection methods Network management equipment can connect to the 3600+ MainStreet system
through network or serial connections.
Network connections
When the 3600+ MainStreet system is connected to the Alcatel 5620 NM through
a network connection, CPSS messages travel in band over CPSS links that use any
of the following network links:
• timeslot 0 on E1 links (National Use Bits)

• the FDL on T1 links using ESF framing
• the supervisory channel on X.21 PRI and V.35 PRI aggregate cards (56 kb/s
and n × 64 kb/s variants)
• all or part of a 64 kb/s channel (DS0) on any aggregate or data link
Serial connections
When the 3600+ MainStreet system is connected to the Alcatel 5620 NM through
a serial connection, CPSS messages travel out of band over CPSS links that use the
RS-232 ports on the control and DCP cards.
248
Node management The Alcatel element management portfolio provides a comprehensive suite of tools
for managing nodes such as the 3600+ MainStreet unit.
Node management The node management products include the:

products
• Alcatel 5620 NM GUI
• built-in node management interface
• Alcatel 5520 SNMP Element Manager
• CrossKeys CrossControl
Node management through the Alcatel 5620 NM GUI

The Alcatel 5620 NM has an intuitive GUI that manages the 3600+ MainStreet unit
over CPSS links set up for network management. The GUI is used for:
• node configuration
• monitoring
• diagnostics
• database backup and restoration
• fault management
• software upgrades
Built-in node management interface

The 3600+ MainStreet unit has a built-in, menu-driven node management
interface, known as the NMTI, that can be accessed from a node management
terminal or the Alcatel 5620 NM.
The node management terminal can be an ASCII (VT100) terminal, or a PC-based

terminal running terminal emulation software or the Alcatel Craft Interface Node
Manager. The terminal can be connected to the 3600+ MainStreet unit locally or
remotely through modems.
The Alcatel 5620 NM enables operators to initiate an NMTI node management

session while running a GUI-based session. An NMTI node management session
provides a supplementary method of managing the node.
See chapter 12 for information about node management sessions and the node
management products used to conduct them.
Alcatel 5520 SNMP Element Manager

The 5520 EM provides remote configuration and monitoring of third-party SNMP
nodes through a GUI. It can operate as a standalone system running on HP
OpenView NNM or can be integrated with the 5520 EM. The 5520 EM extends the
element management footprint of the Alcatel 5620 NM to third-party SNMP
nodes.
249
Management
The 5520 EM can be used to develop device descriptor files. Device descriptor files
are value-added products that interface between the 5520 EM and SNMP nodes by
interpreting SNMP messages. The files are easily developed and modified.
CrossKeys CrossControl
The CrossKeys CrossControl products extend the Alcatel 5620 NM applications to
the management of third-party equipment. Third-party equipment can be
completely managed from the Alcatel 5620 NM, including equipment
configuration, fault management, and end-to-end 1/0 or 3/1 connection
management.
Open interfaces The Alcatel management portfolio includes open interfaces for service and network
management using either CMIP or CORBA. These interfaces are scalable,
TMN-standards-based OSS gateways that allow other OSSs to access and control
networks managed by the Alcatel 5620 NM, Alcatel 5740 SSM, or Alcatel 5730 VSN
through an object-oriented MIB.
Open interface products The Alcatel open interface products are the:
• Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface

• Alcatel 5611 CMIP Network OSS Interface
• Alcatel 5612 CORBA Network OSS Interface
Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface

The Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface is an open interface that enables
front-office CORBA-based OSSs to connect to the Alcatel 5740 SSM or the Alcatel
5730 VSN. This connection enables the exchange of information related to service
level objects such as subscribers, services, subscriptions, and service definitions.
Using this interface, CORBA-based OSSs can be rapidly bonded to networks
managed by an Alcatel 5620 NM, in order to automate service provisioning and
activation.
Alcatel 5611 CMIP Network OSS Interface

The Alcatel 5611 CMIP is a CMIS TMN-compliant OSI-agent interface. CMIP is
the protocol used by CMIS to perform actions such as create, delete, set, get, action,
and event notification. The Alcatel 5611 CMIP acts as a gateway for CMIP
management applications and the Alcatel 5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface to
communicate with the Alcatel 5620 NM.
Alcatel 5612 CORBA Network OSS Interface

The Alcatel 5612 CORBA facilitates the development of distributed object-based
systems. It acts as a gateway for CORBA management applications to communicate
with the Alcatel 5611 CMIP.
250
Alcatel Connected ISV Service providers require OSS solutions that will allow them to quickly and flexibly
Partner Program offer new competitive services to realize aggressive RO targets. In addition, service
excellence is required to continuously meet subscriber expectations, to minimize
subscriber churn, and grow service selection, To achieve these objectives, OSS
solutions must interact in an end-to-end fashion with best-of-breed network
solutions, including network elements and network management products. The
Alcatel Connected ISV Partner Program is a program designed to provide service
providers with a pre-certified interoperable solution between the Alcatel
management platform and the appropriate ISV application. When purchasing an
Alcatel certified application from the third party, the service provider can be
confident that Alcatel and its partner(s) have jointly participated in the certification
of the application.
251
12
Node management
The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager is entirely

software-configurable. All functions are software-driven and all configurable
parameters are stored in a nonvolatile configuration database. All functions and
parameters are accessed by reading from and writing to the configuration database
during a node management session.
This chapter describes node management sessions and the node management
products used to conduct them. Most node management functions can also be
performed from network managers (see chapter 11).
Node management A node management session is the time during which you use the standard,
sessions menu-driven user interface, known as the NMTI, to perform configuration and
maintenance operations on the 3600+ MainStreet system. Because this user
interface is common to all 3600 MainStreet series bandwidth manager systems,
training is greatly reduced.
A node management session can be accessed from a node management terminal

connected to a 3600+ MainStreet serial port (directly or through a modem).
253
Management
• PC running the Alcatel Craft Interface Node Manager

The Alcatel Craft Interface is a PC-based software program designed for node
installation and initial configuration or on-site troubleshooting. It provides
NMTI access to all MainStreet nodes, as well as cards and DTUs that support
an integral NMTI. The PC is connected (usually by a direct physical
connection) to a single node for the purpose of managing that node only. All
configuration and maintenance procedures can be performed through the
Alcatel Craft Interface, which is the preferred tool for local node management.
• ASCII (VT100) terminal
Any ASCII (VT100) terminal (or a PC running terminal emulation software)
can be used to initiate a node management session with a node, as well as cards
or DTUs that support an integral NMTI. Not all configuration and
maintenance procedures can be performed through a node management
session initiated from an ASCII terminal. Some procedures must be initiated
from the Craft Interface.
• Alcatel network managers
Alcatel network managers, such as the Alcatel 5620 NM or the Alcatel 5521
Element Manager products, can be used to initiate a node management session
with a node, as well as with cards or DTUs that support an integral NMTI.
All common control and node management facilities for the system are performed
through the Control card NMTI. In addition, the following cards and DTUs
support integral node management sessions:
• CPC
• FRS card
• FRE card
• X.25 FRE card
• PE card
• 2751, 2752, and 2753 MainStreet DTUs
All DS0-based circuit cross-connections are configured during a node

management session with the Control card. All frame relay DLC cross-connections
are configured during a node management session with the appropriate FRS, FRE,
X.25 FRE, or PE card.
254
12. Node management
Active and inactive cards Cards can be active or inactive, depending on their redundancy configuration. You
can initiate a node management session with either the active or inactive node. For
control-redundant shelves, the operating Control card is called active; the standby
Control card is called inactive.
Any configuration change made during a node management session with the active
card is applied to the system immediately. Any configuration change made during
a node management session with the inactive card is not applied to the system until
an activity switch occurs. This allows in-service system upgrades with little or no
interruption of service: a new revision of system software can be installed on the
inactive card while the system is operating, and when the installation is complete
an activity switch can be configured to bring the new software online.
System serial ports A node management station can be connected to one of two RS-232 ALAPB system
serial ports. System serial ports are accessible on the bulkhead of 3600+ MainStreet
shelves and on the faceplates of some cards.
Configuration and Complete configuration of the 3600+ MainStreet system, including all slot and
cross-connections circuit parameters, can be performed before UCS cards and modules have been
installed. The configuration database of any node, or any card and DTU that
supports an integral NMTI, can be downloaded in a newly commissioned system
to reduce the time required to configure basic attributes.
Configuration access can be restricted by the use of user-configurable password-

protected access levels. Five access levels are provided to tailor user group
requirements with read-only, read/write, and no access privileges to critical areas of
system configuration.
You can copy operating parameters (except the circuit name and connection) from
one circuit to another.
Database All node connection and configuration information (collectively called the
management configuration database) for nodes is stored in NVM on the Control card. Any card
that supports an integral NMTI stores its own configuration database. The
configuration databases of DTUs (including those that support an integral NMTI)
are stored in NVM on the Control card.
Checking the NVM The NVM can be checked to determine whether the configuration database has
been corrupted. An NVM problem may be fixed by restoring the database.
255
Management
Backup and restore The database of a node or card, or DTU that has NVM can be backed up to an
external device. If the node database becomes corrupted, it can be restored from the
backup file through a node management session.
The backup file from one node can also be used to restore the database to another
node of the same type. This facilitates configuring a series of nodes with identical
databases. The node number and node name are not affected by a database restore.
Verify The verify procedure compares two configuration databases to determine if they
are identical. This procedure can be used to determine if the node has been
configured with the correct database.
Reconcile The configuration database for cards that have NVM is divided between the card
NVM and the NVM of the Control card. If inconsistencies develop between the
two configuration databases, the NVM of the card can be configured to match the
database of the Control card. This process is called reconciliation.
Database management All database management operations are performed through a node management
access session with the appropriate card. The availability of database management
operations is dependent upon:
• the card type

• the card status (active or inactive)
• the node manager type (NMTI, Alcatel Craft Interface, Alcatel 5620 NM, or
Alcatel 5521 EM)
Table 12-1 summarizes the conditions under which database management

operations can be performed. For inactive cards, the table indicates whether the
verify or restore operation can be done from the external file or from the active
card.
Table 12-1: Configuration database operations
Card and status Operation (1)
Card type Status Backup Verify Restore (2)
Control card Active control To file From file From file
Inactive control To file From file or From file or

active card active card
CPC, FRS, FRE, X.25 — To file From file From file

FRE, or PE (3)
Notes
1. All operations on an active node or on any card or DTU that has NVM require access to an
external device in order to back up, verify or restore the configuration database file.
2. A restore operation cannot be performed through a node management session with an Alcatel
5521 EM connected indirectly to the node through a modem.
3. Available only through a Craft Interface or Alcatel 5521 EM session.
256
12. Node management
Maintenance and The 3600+ MainStreet system offers an extensive suite of maintenance and
diagnostics diagnostic applications that facilitate network monitoring and problem isolation.
Maintenance and diagnostic applications are:
• loopbacks
• signaling lead control
• alarm monitoring
• statistics gathering
• diagnostics
• digital connection maintenance
• digital and metallic split and monitor test access
Loopbacks A loopback is a maintenance application used to isolate faults in a transmission

path. During a loopback, the transmitted signal is looped back and returned to the
transmitting device. The outgoing and returned signals can then be compared.
Loopbacks are available on all voice and data circuits, on individual channels on the
primary rate link, and on the primary rate link as a whole.
Signaling lead control The incoming and outgoing signaling leads on the 3600+ MainStreet system can be
examined, and the outgoing signaling leads can be changed to force conditions at
the far end. Table 12-2 shows the supported incoming and outgoing signaling
leads.
Table 12-2: Incoming and outgoing signaling leads
Circuit type Incoming signaling leads Outgoing signaling leads
64 kb/s ABCD (received) ABCD (transmitted)

codirectional
ASC (AAL1) ABCD (received) ABCD (transmitted)
Primary rate ABCD (received) ABCD (transmitted)
Primary rate for A (received) A (transmitted)

TTC2M card
E&M M-lead E-lead
LGS Loop current detect Ringing

Ground detect Tip open
Reverse battery
LGE Ringing Loop closure

Tip ground Ring ground
Forward feed
Reverse feed
DNIC Sync Force unsync

LQ1
LQ2
257
Management
Alarm monitoring The cards and shelves are continuously monitored for abnormal conditions or
significant events. When an abnormal condition is detected or a significant event
occurs, an alarm record is created. For more information about alarm handling, see
chapter 1.
Statistics gathering The 3600+ MainStreet system gathers the following types of statistics:
• usage statistics for voice cards

• quality statistics for aggregate and high-speed aggregate cards
• protection switching statistics for Octal E1, OC-3, and STM-1 cards
• port quality statistics for high-speed aggregate and ATM Services cards
• quality statistics for 27LC2, 27LC3, and 28LC line cards, and for 2B1Q channel
units
• usage and quality statistics for ATM Services cards
• node synchronization statistics
• switch, frame stream, encapsulation circuit, DLC, and CPSS statistics for FRS,
FRE, and PE cards
• FASTbus, station statistics for FRE and PE cards
• muxpooint and muxpoint DLC statistics for FRE card
• X.25 and X.75 statistics for X.25 FRE and PE cards
Diagnostics The cards and channel units in 3600+ MainStreet systems can perform a number of
system-wide and circuit-specific diagnostic tests. Some tests are performed during
the power-up procedure, while others can be enabled to take place automatically as
a background task or on a directed basis. System commands, given through a node
management session, can enable or disable diagnostics or perform a specified test
repeatedly.
Diagnostics do not busy out a circuit or remove it from service. If the circuit is
required for a call while a test is in progress, the test on that circuit is terminated.
Similarly, diagnostics are not performed on busy circuits.
Table 12-3 shows the diagnostic tests that can be run.
258
12. Node management
Table 12-3: Background and directed diagnostic tests
Test (1) Function Description
1 Program Integrity Performs a checksum over the entire program space

and Flash memory of the active Control card memory
bank.
2 RAM Integrity Performs a read and write test over the entire range
of RAM.
3 Nonvolatile RAM Integrity Performs a checksum of NVM space.
4 Tone Generator Self Test 1 Compares the tone from the Timing card to known
tone data.
5 Tone Generator Self Test 2 Applies and checks a tone from the Timing card to a
frequency detector within the Timing card.
6 Digital Loopback test Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, MRD, T1,
and E1 circuits by performing digital loopbacks on a
circuit and SMACing the data patch over a specified
time.
7 Analog Loopback Test 1 Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, and MRD
circuits by using the Timing card to perform a digital
loopback from the codec and applying a 1 kHz tone
at 0 dBm0. The system detects the tone.
8 Analog Loopback Test 2 Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, and MRD
circuits by using the Timing card to loop back at the
external analog point of the interface and applying a
digital tone. The system detects the tone.
9 Frequency Test Tests 4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGS, LGE, and MRD
circuits by using the Timing card to loop back at the
external analog point of the interface and applying a
digital tone. Listen for the tone with a frequency
detector.
15 Narrowband Switch Matrix Compares the contents of the DS0 connection

Integrity memory on the DS0 switching matrix to a copy of the
connection memory stored in the local RAM. If a
Narrowband module is installed on the Control card,
the switching matrix on that module is also tested.
16 Broadband Switch Matrix Compares the contents of the broadband connection

Integrity memory on the broadband switching matrix to a copy
of the connection memory stored in local RAM.
Note
1. The diagnostic tests are described in the order in which the tests are performed.
Digital connection Digital connection maintenance provides access to the data paths through the
maintenance central switching matrix of the 3600+ MainStreet unit, so that data and signaling
carried between two connected target circuits can be verified and changed by some
additional maintenance circuits.
259
Management
Connection maintenance provides these functions:
• monitor maintenance, which duplicates (nonintrusively) the data passing

between two target circuits and then outputs that data on the maintenance
circuits
• split-through and split-back maintenance, which allows the maintenance
circuits to receive sourced data from the target circuits and to source their own
data to the target circuits
• terminate-and-leave maintenance, which does not use any maintenance
circuits, but forces target circuits to apply trunk conditioning to their line
outputs
Almost any connection (primary rate, voice, data, and unidirectional or

bidirectional) can be used as a target for connection maintenance. The exceptions
are:
• any on-card connections, such as connections between SRMs on a DCC

• three- and four-party connections, such as connections involving HCV or
echo canceller DSP circuits
• CPSS connections
• ADPCM connections
• GFC connections
• T1 FDL, E1 TS0, V.35 PRI TS0, or X.21 PRI TS0 connections
• SRS subset connections
Monitor maintenance
This is a nonintrusive maintenance function that provides listen-only access to a
connection. External test equipment is used to monitor the connection.
Bidirectional connections require a maintenance circuit for each direction

(see Figure 12-1). Unidirectional and broadcast connections require only one
maintenance circuit.
260
12. Node management
Figure 12-1: Bidirectional monitor maintenance

Target Target
circuit 1 circuit 2
Network
Maintenance Maintenance
circuit 1 circuit 2
Test Test
equipment equipment
11219
Split-through maintenance
This is an intrusive maintenance function that inserts the maintenance circuits in
the data and signaling path between the target circuits. External test equipment is
used to insert and monitor test patterns.
As with monitor maintenance, bidirectional connections require a maintenance

circuit for each direction (see Figure 12-2); unidirectional and broadcast
connections require only one.
Figure 12-2: Bidirectional split-through maintenance

Target Target
circuit 1 circuit 2
Network
circuit 1 circuit 2
Test Test
equipment equipment
11221
261
Management
Split-back maintenance
This is an intrusive maintenance function that establishes a bidirectional data and
signaling path between each target circuit and its maintenance circuit. External test
equipment is used to insert and monitor test patterns.
Figure 12-3 shows a bidirectional split-back maintenance connection. Split-back

maintenance is not available for unidirectional target connections.
Figure 12-3: Bidirectional split-back maintenance

Target Target
circuit 1 circuit 2
circuit 1 circuit 2
11218
Terminate-and-leave maintenance
Figure 12-4 shows how bidirectional terminate-and-leave maintenance is applied
when there is no other connection maintenance.
This maintenance function provides a mechanism to apply trunk conditioning at

the line output of a target circuit without deprogramming the target circuit; the
target circuit can be the source or the destination of a unidirectional or broadcast
connection. Trunk conditioning may be applied at the output of only one pair of
connected circuits, or at the output of both target circuits involved in a connection.
Figure 12-4: Bidirectional terminate-and-leave maintenance

Target Target
circuit 1 circuit 2
TC Network
TC
TC = trunk conditioning
11220
262
12. Node management
Digital and metallic split Digital test connections provide access to any DS0 from the faceplate of the
and monitor test access Test card, and can be configured for interface speed, error correction, and fault
signaling. Digital test connections are supported on the 64 kb/s Codirectional card,
ATM Services cards, Optical Extension cards, Single and Dual E1 and T1 cards,
X.21 and V.35 PRI cards, and the DS0-DP and OCU-DP channel units.
Metallic test connections provide direct metallic access to tip and ring pairs from
the faceplate of the Test card, and are supported on the 4WTO line card, and
4WDX, 4WTO, E&M, LGE, LGS, and MRD channel units.
The Test card supports these metallic test connections:
• direct monitor
This monitors the facility tip and ring pairs (see Figure 12-5).
• high impedance monitor
This monitors the facility tip and ring pairs with a balanced impedance buffer
between the facility circuit and the Test card (see Figure 12-5).
• metallic split access
This splits the connection between the equipment and the facility, and brings
the tip, ring and signaling pairs to the Test card (see Figure 12-6).
• 4-wire loopback
This loops back the tip to the tip return and the ring to the ring return on both
the equipment and the facility sides of the connection (see Figure 12-7).
Figure 12-5: Metallic direct and high impedance monitor connection

25-pair Channel Control Primary
backplane unit card rate card
connector
Connected Network
equipment (facility)
Test
card
Test card Test card

600
MTAU MTAU
T/R FAC A T/R FAC A
T1/R1 FAC B T1/R1 FAC B
Metallic direct monitor Metallic high impedance monitor
11213
263
Management
Figure 12-6: Metallic split access connection

connector
Connected Network
Test
card
Test card Test card

MTAU MTAU
T/R EQUIP A T/R FAC A
T1/R1 EQUIP B T1/R1 FAC B
E/M EQUIP C E/M FAC C
11214
Figure 12-7: Metallic 4-wire loopback connection

connector
Connected T/T1 T/T1 Network
R/R1 R/R1
Test
card
Test card Test card

MTAU MTAU
T T
T1 T1
R R
R1 R1
11215
264
13
System specifications
This chapter lists the standards to which the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice
Bandwidth Manager conforms and provides specifications for its system
components.
Power supplies Power Supply cards regulate the input power from dc feeds to provide the various
voltages required by the shelf for use by the system, interface and application cards.
The Power Supply card input specifications are as follows:
• –38 to –75 V dc (–48 to –60 V dc, nominal)

• 6.5 A (maximum)
• 215 W (maximum)
Ringing generators Ringing generators provide a high-power alternating current to an LGS or an MRD
interface, which drives the ringer on the destination telephone.
The Alcatel ringing generator unit supplies 71 to 79 V rms (75 V rms, nominal)
ringing voltage at 16, 20, or 25 Hz (user-selectable).
267
External timing External timing sources and receivers can be connected to the 3600+ MainStreet
inputs and outputs unit to derive or generate system timing.
External timing source The 3600+ MainStreet system supports two input ports and two output ports and
supports the following input and output types:
• NRZ
• 8 kHz
• 2.048 MHz
• AMI
• 64 kb/s composite clock
• 1.544 Mb/s DS1
Table 13-1 identifies the connectors used when connecting an external timing
input or output device to a shelf.
Table 13-1: External timing input and output connectors for 3600+ MainStreet shelves
Input frequency Output frequency
8 kHz or 64 kb/s composite 1.544 Mb/s DS1 AMI 8 kHz or 64 kb/s composite 1.544 Mb/s DS1
2.048 MHz clock AMI 2.048 MHz clock AMI AMI
NRZ NRZ
RXA 75 Ω 120 Ω 120 Ω TXA 75 Ω 120 Ω 120 Ω

(BNC) (DB25 female) (DB25 female) (BNC) (DB25 female) (DB25 female)
RXB 75 Ω TXB 75 Ω
(BNC) (BNC)
268
13. System specifications
Standards The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager is compliant with sections
conformance of the national and international standards listed in Table 13-2.
Table 13-2: 3600+ MainStreet standards conformance
Description Document
Network attachment IC CS-03
FCC Part 68
BS 6450 Part 4 (replaces OTR001)

CTR1-4
CTR12-15,17
Digital interfaces T1.105
T1.231
GR-0253-CORE
GR-1400-CORE
TR-1244
G.707/708/709
G.823/824/235
G.781/782/783
G.957/958
Product safety CSA C22.2 No 225
CSA C22.2 No 950

UL1459 Second Edition
UL1950 Second Edition
FDA CDRH 21 CFR 1040 (Laser)

EN 41003:1993
EN 60950:1992
EN 60825 (Laser)
IEC 950 2nd Edition and Amendments

1 and 2
EMC emission CSA C108.8 (Class A – regulated by IC)
FCC Part 15 (Class A)
EN 50081-1 (EN 55022 Class B)
EMC immunity ANSI C62.41 (ac power surge)
EN 50082-1 (ESD, RF Immunity, EFT)
Reliability TR-NWT-000332
TR-NWT-000929
Workmanship TR-NWT-000078
Updated April 2006 269

14
Voice interface specifications
Tables 14-1 through 14-9 list the audio and signaling specifications for the
4WDX channel unit, 4WTO line card, MRD channel unit, LGE card, LGE channel
unit, E&M card, E&M channel unit, LGS card, and LGS channel unit, respectively.
Table 14-1: 4WDX channel unit specifications
Specification Variant: 90-2769-01
60 Hz loss (A/D) Loss of 20 dB greater than the loss at 1004 Hz
A to B lead resistance 1250 Ω ±5%
Amplitude tracking (A/D and D/A)

–37 to +3 dBm0 0.25 dB (maximum deviation at 1 kHz)
–50 to –37 dBm0 0.50 dB (maximum deviation at 1 kHz)
Crosstalk
Intrachannel > 65 dB maximum
Interchannel > 65 dB maximum
Dial pulse distortion < 2%
Idle channel noise (A/D and D/A) 20 dBrnc0 maximum
Impulse noise threshold level

10.0 hits in 30 min maximum 41 dBrnC0
1.0 hit in 30 min maximum 51 dBrnC0

600 Ω
1200 Ω
271
Longitudinal balance (A/D and D/A)

200 Hz > 74 dB minimum
Maximum loop length 5000 Ω
On- and off-hook detection Over full loop length (0 to 5000 Ω) and full battery range
(42 to 56 V) for fixed and switched bias signaling
Peak to average ratio > 94 dB
Receive (D/A) frequency response

200 Hz +1.0 to 0
300 Hz to 3000 Hz ±0.15
3.2 kHz +0.75 to –0.15
3.4 kHz +1.5 to 0
Return loss (Tx and Rx pairs)

1 kHz > 28 dB minimum
300 Hz to 3 kHz > 23 dB minimum
Sending on- and off-hook Over full loop length (0 to 5000 Ω) and full battery range
(42 to 56 V) for fixed and switched bias signaling
Signal to distortion (A/D and D/A) measured at 1004 Hz

0 to –30 dBm0 > 35 dB
–40 dBm0 > 29 dB
–45 dBm0 > 25 dB
Single frequency distortion (A/A with digital loopback)

0 dBm0 from 0 to 12 kHz –28 dBm0 or > at any other frequency
0 dBm0 at 1004 to 1020 Hz –40 dBm0 or > between 0 and 4 kHz
TLP ranges +6 to –10.5 dBr in 0.1-dB increments

+1.5 to –15 dBr in 0.1-dB increments
Transmit (A/D) frequency response

200 Hz ±2.0 to 0
300 Hz to 3000 Hz ±0.15
3.2 kHz +0.75 to –0.15
3.4 kHz +1.5 to 0
272
14. Voice interface specifications
Table 14-2: 4WTO line card specifications
Gain tracking
+3 to –40 dBr 0.3 dB
–40 to –50 dBr ±0.5 dB
–50 to –55 dBr ±1.5 dB
Idle channel noise

A/A < 23 dBrnCO maximum
D/A < 20 dBrnCO maximum
A/D < 20 dBrnCO maximum

10 hits in 30 min maximum 41 dBrnC0
1 hit in 30 min maximum 51 dBrnC0
Longitudinal balance
200 Hz 74 dB minimum
Peak to average ratio

A/A > 94 dB
D/A or A/D > 97 dB
Receive (D/A) frequency response (relative to gain at 1004 Hz)

200 Hz –1.0 to +0.15 dB
300 to 3000 Hz –0.15 to +0.15 dB
3200 Hz –0.75 to +0.15 dB
3400 Hz –1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz < –14 dB
> 4600 Hz < –28 dB
273
Return loss (600 Ω)

1000 Hz > 28 dB
300 to 3000 Hz > 23 dB
Signal to distortion (A/A)

0 to –30 dBr > 33 dB
–30 to –40 dBr > 27 dB
–40 to –45 dBr > 22 dB
Signal to distortion (A/D or D/A)

0 to –30 dBr > 35 dB
–30 to –40 dBr > 9 dB
–40 to –45 dBr > 25 dB
TLP range
Transmit –8.5 to +7.0 dBr in 0.5-dB increments
Receive –8.5 to +7.0 dBr in 0.5-dB increments
Transmit (A/D) frequency response (relative to gain at 1004 Hz)

60 Hz < –14 dB
200 Hz –2.0 to +0.15 dB
300 to 3000 Hz –0.15 to +0.15 dB
3200 Hz –0.75 to +0.15 dB
3400 Hz –1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz < –14 dB
> 4600 Hz 32 dB
274
Table 14-3: MRD channel unit specifications
Specification Variant
90-1755-01 90-1755-02
2-wire impedance 900 Ω + 2.16 µF 600 Ω + 2.16 µF

900 Ω + 2.16 µF
Balance impedance Fixed short (900 Ω + 2.16 µF) Fixed short (900 Ω + 2.16 µF)
Fixed long (1650 Ω // 100 Ω + 5 nF) (1) Fixed long (1650 Ω // 100 Ω + 5 nF)
Adapt/freeze Adapt/freeze
Continuous adapt
Companding law Mu-law Mu-law
Crosstalk coupling –65 dB maximum –65 dB maximum
Gain tracking
+3 to –40 dBr ±0.3 dB ±0.3 dB
–40 to –50 dBr ±0.5 dB ±0.5 dB
–50 to –55 dBr ±1.5 dB ±1.5 dB
Idle channel noise

A/A 23 dBrnC0 maximum 23 dBrnC0 maximum
A/D 20 dBrnC0 maximum 20 dBrnC0 maximum
D/A 20 dBrnC0 maximum 20 dBrnC0 maximum

10.0 hits in 30 min maximum 41 dBrnC0 41 dBrnC0
1.0 hit in 30 min maximum 51 dBrnC0 51 dBrnC0
0.1 hit in 30 min maximum 58 dBrnC0 58 dBrnC0
200 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
Maximum external dc loop circuit 280 Ω 1600 Ω

resistance
Peak to average ratio

A/A > 94 dB > 94 dB
D/A or A/D > 97 dB > 97 dB
Receive (D/A) frequency response (2)

< 200 Hz 0.0 dB 0.0 dB
200 Hz –2.0 to +0.25 dB –2.0 to +0.25 dB
300 to 3000 Hz –0.5 to +0.25 dB –0.5 to +0.25 dB
3200 Hz –0.75 to +0.25 dB –0.75 to +0.25 dB
3400 Hz –1.5 to +0.25 dB –1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz < –14 dB < –14 dB
> 4600 Hz < –28 dB < –28 dB
Relative Trans-hybrid loss

ERL 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum
SRL/SRH 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
275
90-1755-01 90-1755-02
Return loss
SRL/SRH 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
Ringing frequency 20 Hz 20 Hz
Ringers per line 5 REN maximum 5 REN maximum
Ringing voltage 75 V rms 75 V rms

0 to –30 dBr > 35 dB > 35 dB
–30 to –40 dBr > 29 dB > 29 dB
–40 to –45 dBr > 25 dB > 25 dB
TLP range
Transmit –12 to 0 dBr –12 to +6 dBr
Receive –10 to +6 dBr –10 to +6 dBr
Transmit (A/D) frequency response (2)
60 Hz < –20 dB < –20 dB

200 Hz –3.0 to +0.25 dB –3.0 to +0.25 dB
300 to 3000 Hz –0.5 to +0.25 dB –0.5 to +0.25 dB
3200 Hz –0.75 to +0.25 dB –0.75 to +0.25 dB
3400 Hz –1.5 to +0.25 dB –1.5 to +0.25 dB
4000 Hz < –14 dB < –14 dB
> 4600 Hz < –32 dB < –32 dB
Notes
1. // = in parallel with
2. Relative to gain at 1004 Hz.
Table 14-4: LGE card specifications
90-0343-02 90-0343-03 90-0343-04 90-0343-05 90-0343-11
Channel crosstalk < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0
Companding law Mu-law A-law Mu-law Mu-law A-law
Dial pulsing < 20 pps < 20 pps < 20 pps < 20 pps < 20 pps
detection speed
(trunk input duty
cycle 40 to 60%)
External circuit 1750 Ω 1750 Ω 1750 Ω 1750 Ω 1750 Ω

resistance
Frequency
response (analog +0.5 to –2.0 dB +0.5 to –2.0 dB +0.5 to –2.0 dB +0.5 to –2.0 dB +0.5 to –2.0 dB
subsection) into
600 Ω
Ground differential < 3 V dc < 3 V dc < 3 V dc < 3 V dc < 3 V dc
276
90-0343-02 90-0343-03 90-0343-04 90-0343-05 90-0343-11
Ground resistance
Tip < 850 Ω < 850 Ω < 850 Ω < 850 Ω < 850 Ω
Ring (nominal) 400 Ω 400 Ω 400 Ω 400 Ω 400 Ω
Leakage resistance
Feed removal > 10 kΩ > 10 kΩ > 10 kΩ > 10 kΩ > 10 kΩ
Tip open > 10 kΩ > 10 kΩ > 10 kΩ > 10 kΩ > 10 kΩ
Line impedance 600 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω + 2.16 µF 900 Ω + 2.16 µF 600 Ω

600 Ω + 2.16 µF 370 Ω + (620 Ω // 370 Ω + (620 Ω //
900 Ω + 2.16 µF 0.31 µF) (1) 0.31 µF)
Longitudinal balance (average)
50 Hz to 200 Hz > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB > 50 dB

0.2 to 1.0 kHz > 58 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB
1.0 to 4.0 kHz > 55 dB > 55 dB > 55 dB > 55 dB > 55 dB
Longitudinally 50 V rms 50 V rms 50 V rms 50 V rms 50 V rms

induced voltage
(maximum)
Maximum 110 mA 110 mA 110 mA 110 mA 110 mA

operating current
Minimum operating 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
current
Maximum signal power measured across leads
A/D (from line) 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm
D/A (to line) 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm 6.0 dBm
Return loss
SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
ERL > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB
Ring load nominal 20 kΩ + 1 µF 20 kΩ + 1 µF 20 kΩ + 1 µF 20 kΩ + 1 µF 20 kΩ + 1 µF
Ringing frequency
Minimum 17 Hz 17 Hz 17 Hz 17 Hz 17 Hz
Maximum 30 Hz 30 Hz 30 Hz 30 Hz 30 Hz
Ringing voltage
Minimum 40 V rms 40 V rms 40 V rms 40 V rms 40 V rms
Maximum 110 V rms 110 V rms 110 V rms 110 V rms 110 V rms
277
90-0343-02 90-0343-03 90-0343-04 90-0343-05 90-0343-11
TLP range (dB)

Transmit –4.5 to +3.0 at –4.5 to +3.0 0.0 to –7.0 0.0 to –7.0 –4.5 to +3.0
600 Ω
–6.5 to +1.0 at
900 Ω
–13.5 to +2.0 at –13.5 to +2.0 –13.0 to +2.0 –14.0 to +1.0 –13.5 to +2.0
600 Ω
Receive
–15.5 to 0.0 at
900 Ω
Trans-hybrid loss into nominal impedance, short loop selected
SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB

ERL > 30 dB > 30 dB > 30 dB > 30 dB > 30 dB
Trunk-to-trunk background noise
C message < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0
3 kHz flat < 30 dBmC0 < 30 dBmC0 < 30 dBmC0 < 30 dBmC0 < 30 dBmC0
Psophometric < 25 dBrnC0 < 25 dBrnC0 < 25 dBrnC0 < 25 dBrnC0 < 25 dBrnC0
Note
Table 14-5: LGE channel unit specifications
90-1229-01 90-1229-02
Balance impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance

Compromise impedance with loaded Compromise impedance with loaded
cable 1650 Ω // (100 Ω + 5 nF) (1) cable 1650 Ω // (100 Ω + 5 nF)
Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze
Battery signaling limits –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V
Companding law Mu-law Mu-law
Crosstalk coupling < –65 dB maximum –65 dB maximum
Dial pulse distortion 2% at 12 pps, 64% break 2% at 12 pps, 64% break
Frequency response
(A/D) 60 Hz (relative to 1004 Hz) > 20 dB rejection > 20 dB rejection
A/D or D/A 300 to 3000 Hz –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB
Gain tracking (maximum deviation)

+3 to –37 dBr ±0.5 dB ±0.5 dB
–37 to –50 dBr ±1.0 dB ±1.0 dB
–50 to –55 dBr ±3.0 dB ±3.0 dB
Idle channel noise

Half-channel 20 dBrnC0 maximum 20 dBrnC0 maximum
Full-channel 23 dBrnC0 maximum 23 dBrnC0 maximum
278
90-1229-01 90-1229-02

10 hits in 30 min maximum 41 dBrnC0 41 dBrnC0
1 hit in 30 min maximum 51 dBrnC0 51 dBrnC0
0.1 hits in 30 min maximum 58 dBrnC0 58 dBrnC0
Line impedance 600 Ω + 2.16 µF 600 Ω + 2.16 µF

900 Ω + 2.16 µF 900 Ω + 2.16 µF
Maximum external circuit resistance 1800 Ω 1800 Ω
P/AR
Half-channel > 97 dB > 97 dB
Full-channel > 94 dB > 94 dB
Return loss
SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
Ringing detect 40 to 110 V rms, –36 to –52.5 V dc, 40 to 110 V rms, –36 to –52.5 V dc,
20 ±3 Hz 20 ±3 Hz

0 to –30 dBr 35 dB 35 dB
–30 to –40 dBr 29 dB 29 dB
–40 to –45 dBr 25 dB 25 dB
Tip ground detect up to 850 Ω up to 850 Ω
TLP levels
Transmit –12.0 to 0.0 dB –12.0 to 0.0 dB
Receive –10.0 to +6.0 dB –10.0 to +6.0 dB
Trans-hybrid loss
SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
Note
279
Table 14-6: E&M card specifications
90-0079-03 90-0079-04 90-0079-05 90-0079-06 90-0091-05 90-0091-06
4-wire TLP range

Transmit (dB) –16.0 to –0.5 –16.0 to –0.5 –16.0 to –0.5 –16.0 to –0.5 –17.5 to –10.0 –17.5 to –10.0
Receive (dB) –8.5 to +7.0 –8.5 to +7.0 –8.5 to +7.0 –8.5 to +7.0 +4.0 to +11.5 +4.0 to +11.5
2-wire TLP range

Transmit (dB) –7.0 to +8.5 –7.0 to +8.5 –7.0 to +8.5 –7.0 to +8.5 –3.5 to +4.0 –3.5 to +4.0
Receive (dB) –14.5 to +1.0 –14.5 to +1.0 –14.5 to +1.0 –14.5 to +1.0 –7.5 to +0.0 –7.5 to +0.0
Companding law A-law A-law A-law Mu-law Mu-law Mu-law
Frequency
response (200 to
< (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7) < (–0.6 to 0.7)
3400 Hz)to
corresponding line
impedance
Gain linearity (referenced at 0 dBm0)
–55 dBm0 < ±3 dB < ±3 dB < ±3 dB < ±3 dB < ±3 dB < ±3 dB

–50 dBm0 < ±1 dB < ±1 dB < ±1 dB < ±1 dB < ±1 dB < ±1 dB
–37 to +3 dBm0 < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB
Idle channel noise

C-message < 20 dBmC0 < 35 dBm < 35 dBm < 35 dBm < 20 dBmC0 < 20 dBmC0
3 kHz flat < 35 dBm < –65 dBm0p < –65 dBm0p < –65 dBm0p < 35 dBm < 35 dBm
Interchannel < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0 < –65 dBm0
crosstalk
Level tolerance 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB
Line impedance
4-wire 600 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω
2-wire 370 Ω +620 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω + 600 Ω + 900 Ω + 600 Ω +
// (1) 0.31 µF 2.16 µF 2.16 µF 2.16 µF 2.16 µF
200 Hz to 1 kHz > 63 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB > 63 dB > 63 dB

1 kHz to 4 kHz > 58 dB > 53 dB > 53 dB > 53 dB > 58 dB > 58 dB
Return loss
4-wire ERL > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB
4-wire SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
2-wire ERL > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB

2-wire SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
Signal balance (200 > 46 dB > 46 dB > 46 dB > 46 dB > 46 dB > 46 dB

Hz to 4 kHz)
280
90-0079-03 90-0079-04 90-0079-05 90-0079-06 90-0091-05 90-0091-06
Signaling type V V V IV I, II, III I, II, III
Trans-hybrid loss
ERL > 25 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 28 dB > 34 dB > 34 dB
SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
Note
281
Table 14-7: E&M channel unit specifications
282
Specifications Variant
90-1230-02 90-1230-03 90-1230-04 90-1230-05 90-1230-06 90-1230-07

(North America) (North America) (Japan) (Germany) (United Kingdom) (France)
Attenuation range (4-wire audio)
Transmit 23 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps
Receive 23 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps 18 dB in 0.1-dB steps
Attenuation range (2-wire audio)
Transmit 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps 12 dB in 0.1-dB steps
Receive 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps 16 dB in 0.1-dB steps
Balance impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance
(2-wire only)
Adaptive Adaptive Adaptive Adaptive Adaptive Adaptive
Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise
impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded
cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω //
(100 Ω + 5 nF) (1) (100 Ω + 5 nF) (100 Ω + 5 nF) (100 Ω + 5 nF) (100 Ω + 5 nF) (100 Ω + 5 nF)
Companding law Mu-law Mu-law Mu-law A-law A-law A-law
Dial pulse distortion < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps < 2% at 20 pps
(2- and 4-wire audio) (74% break) (74% break) (74% break) (74% break) (74% break) (74% break)
E-lead leakage resistance to ground (2- and 4-wire audio, E&M mode)
On-hook > 550 kΩ > 550 kΩ > 550 kΩ > 550 kΩ > 550 kΩ > 550 kΩ
Off-hook < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA
E lead resistance to
ground (2- and 4-wire
3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal
audio)
Frequency response (A/D or D/A) relative to 1 kHz at 0 dBm0, 300 to 3000 Hz
4-wire audio 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25

2-wire audio –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5 –0.25 to +0.5
Line impedance
4-wire audio 600 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω 600 Ω
2-wire audio 600 Ω + 2.16 µF 600 Ω + 2.16 µF 600 Ω + 1.00 µF 220 Ω + 820 µF // 370 Ω + 620 µF // 180 Ω + 910 µF //
900 Ω + 2.16 µF 900 Ω + 2.16 µF 115 nF 310 nF 150 nF
Specifications Variant
90-1230-02 90-1230-03 90-1230-04 90-1230-05 90-1230-06 90-1230-07

Longitudinal balance (4-wire)
200 Hz to 1 kHz > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum > 74 dB minimum
1 kHz to 3 kHz > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum > 69 dB minimum
200 Hz to 1 kHz > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum > 58 dB minimum
1 kHz to 3 kHz > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum > 53 dB minimum
M lead leakage resistance to ground (2- and 4-wire audio, PLR mode)
On-hook < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA < 20 Ω at 50 mA

Off-hook –46 V –46 V –46 V –46 V –46 V –46 V
M lead resistance to 3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal 3600 Ω nominal
ground (2- and 4-wire
audio)
Return loss
4-wire ERL 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum
4-wire SRL 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum 23 dB minimum
2-wire ERL 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum
2-wire SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
TLP range (4-wire)

Transmit (dB) –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0 –16.0 to +7.0
TLP range (2-wire)

Transmit (dB) –12.0 to 0.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0
Trans-hybrid loss (2-wire audio only)
ERL > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum > 34 dB minimum
SRL > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum > 20 dB minimum
Note
283
Table 14-8: LGS card specifications
284
90-0029-01 90-0029-05 90-0029-07 90-0030-01 90-0030-03 90-0030-04
Channel crosstalk 65 dBm0 65 dBm0 65 dBm0 65 dBm0 65 dBm0 65 dBm0
Companding law A-law A-law A-law Mu-law Mu-law Mu-law
Conductor leakage 30 kΩ 30 kΩ 30 kΩ 30 kΩ 30 kΩ 30 kΩ
resistance
Frequency response 0.5 dB +0.25 to –0.5 dB 0.5 dB +0.25/–0.5 dB +0.25/–0.5 dB +0.25/–0.5 dB

(analog subsection)
Idle channel noise

C message 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC 20 dBrnC
3 kHz flat < 35 dBm < 35 dBm < 20 dBm < 35 dBm < 20 dBm < 20 dBm
8 kHz leakage > 70 dB > 70 dB > 70 dB > 70 dB > 70 dB > 70 dB
Line impedance 370 Ω + (620 Ω // 600 Ω 370 Ω + (620 Ω // 600 Ω + 2.16 µF 900 Ω + 2.16 µF 900 Ω + 2.16 µF
0.31 µF) (1) 0.31 µF)

60 to 1000 Hz 48 dB 58 dB 48 dB > 58 dB 58 dB 58 dB
1.0 to 4.0 kHz 48 dB > 53 dB 48 dB > 53 dB > 53 dB > 53 dB
Maximum dial pulse 20 pps 20 pps 20 pps 20 pps 20 pps 20 pps
Updated April 2006

detection
Maximum ground 1350 Ω 1350 Ω 1350 Ω 1350 Ω 1350 Ω 1350 Ω
detect resistance
Maximum loop length 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi)
Maximum loop 1350 Ω 1350 Ω 1350 Ω 1350 Ω 1350 Ω 1350 Ω

resistance, including
termination, at –50 V
battery
Maximum operating 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA 30 mA
current (0 Ω loop and
100 Ω termination)
Maximum ringer 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz 110 V rms at 20/25 Hz
voltage
Maximum short circuit 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA 50 mA

current
90-0029-01 90-0029-05 90-0029-07 90-0030-01 90-0030-03 90-0030-04
Maximum signal power (measured across a-b leads)
A/D (from line) 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm

D/A (to line) 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm 6 dBm
Minimum operating 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA 25 mA
current 6 dB audio
Number of voice 12 12 12 12 6 12
circuits
Return loss
ERL 25 dB 28 dB 25 dB 28 dB 28 dB 28 dB
SRL > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
Signal balance
0.2 to 4.0 kHz 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB
TLP range
Transmit (dB) –3.0 to +4.0 –3.0 to +4.0 –3.0 to +4.0 –3.0 to +4.0 –7.0 to 0.0 –3.0 to +4.0
Receive (dB) –6.0 to +1.0 –6.0 to +1.0 –6.0 to +1.0 –6.0 to +1.0 –7.0 to 0.0 –6.0 to +1.0
Trans-hybrid loss
ERL 25 dB 34 dB 25 dB 34 dB 34 dB 34 dB
SRL 25 dB > 20 dB 25 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB > 20 dB
Note
285
Table 14-9: LGS channel unit specifications
286
90-1228-02 90-1228-03 90-1228-04 90-1228-05 90-1228-06 90-1228-07

Balance impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance Matched impedance
Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise Compromise
impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded impedance, loaded
cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω // cable 1650 Ω //
(100 Ω + 5 nF) (1) (100 Ω + 5 nF) (1) (100 Ω + 5 nF) (1) (100 Ω + 5 nF) (1) (100 Ω + 5 nF) (1) (100 Ω + 5 nF) (1)
Alternate impedance Alternate impedance Alternate impedance Alternate impedance Alternate impedance Alternate impedance
Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze Adapt and freeze
Continuous adaption Continuous adaption Continuous adaption Continuous adaption Continuous adaption
Battery signaling –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V –42.25 to –52.5 V
limits
Companding law Mu-law Mu-law or A-law Mu-law or A-law Mu-law or A-law Mu-law or A-law Mu-law or A-law
Crosstalk coupling < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum < –65 dB maximum
Dial pulse distortion < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps < 2% at 12 pps
(64% break) (64% break) (64% break) (64% break) (64% break) (64% break)
Frequency response
A/D 60 Hz (relative to 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection 20 dB rejection

1.004 kHz)
A/D or D/A 300 to –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB –0.25 to +0.5 dB
3000 Hz
Gain tracking (maximum deviation)
+3 to –37 dBr 0.25 dB 0.25 dB 0.25 dB 0.25 dB 0.25 dB 0.25 dB

–37 to –50 dBr < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB < ±0.5 dB
–50 to –55 dBr < ±2.0 dB < ±2.0 dB < ±2.0 dB < ±2.0 dB < ±2.0 dB < ±2.0 dB
Idle channel noise

A/D 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max
D/A 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max 20 dBrnC0 max
Line impedance 600 Ω + 2.16 µF 600 Ω + 2.16 µF 600 Ω + 1.00 µF 220 Ω + 820 Ω // 370 Ω + 620 Ω // 180 Ω + 910 Ω //
115 nF 310 nF 115 nF
900 Ω +2.16 µF 900 Ω +2.16 µF
90-1228-02 90-1228-03 90-1228-04 90-1228-05 90-1228-06 90-1228-07

Impulse noise 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max 41 dBrnC0 max
threshold level
(10 hits in 30 min
maximum)
200 Hz 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum 58 dB minimum
Loop feed 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating 30 mA, non-saturating
Loop length 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi) 2 km (1.25 mi)
(maximum)
Maximum external dc 2000 Ω 2000 Ω 2000 Ω 2000 Ω 2000 Ω 2000 Ω

loop circuit resistance
On-hook transmission Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
P/AR > 97 dB > 97 dB > 97 dB > 97 dB > 97 dB > 97 dB
Return loss
ERL 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum 28 dB minimum
SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
Ringers per line 5 maximum 5 maximum 5 maximum 5 maximum 5 maximum 5 maximum
Ringing voltage 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms 75 to 110 V rms
20 ±3 Hz 20 ±3 Hz 20 ±3 Hz 20 ±3 Hz 20 ±3 Hz 20 ±3 Hz
287
288
90-1228-02 90-1228-03 90-1228-04 90-1228-05 90-1228-06 90-1228-07
0 to –30 dBr 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB 35 dB
–30 to –40 dBr 29 dB 29 dB 29 dB 29 dB 29 dB 29 dB
–40 to –45 dBr 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB
TLP range
Transmit (dB) –12.0 to 0.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +6.0 –12.0 to +0.0
Trans-hybrid loss
ERL 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum 34 dB minimum
SRL 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum 20 dB minimum
Note
15
Power dissipation
Table 15-1 lists the power dissipation of all ringing generators, distribution panels,
cards, and channel units.
Table 15-1: Power and heat dissipation of system components
Item Watts (W) BTU/h
Ringing generators (1)
Each ringing generator 15 51
Distribution panels
DCC distribution panels 0 0
PRI RJ45 Distribution Panel 0 0
S/T BRI Distribution Panel 0 0
System cards
Control card 11 39
Control card with Narrowband module 21 72
Control card with Broadband module 14 49
Control card with Bank-B Memory module 13 43
Control card with all modules 25 86
Common Carrier card 0 1
Test card 2 8
Test module 3 11
Timing card 5 19
289
Aggregate cards
ATM Services card with IMA module 16 54
Single E1 card with modules 4 14
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 card with VCM3 11 37
Dual 2.048 Mb/s E1 card with interface modules 6 20
Dual E1-2 card 3 10
Dual E1-2 card with FAM 8 27
Dual E1-2 card with interface modules 6 20
Single T1 card with modules 3 12
Dual T1 card with interface modules 5 17
Dual T1 card with interface modules and VCM3 8 27
Dual T1-2 card 3 10
Dual T1-2 card with interface modules 6 20
Dual T1-2 card with FT1 and interface modules 4 14
MPA card 12 42
Octal E1 card 9 32
Octal T1 card 8 28
TTC2M card 6 19
X.21 PRI card 5 18
X.21 ESI PRI card 5 18
V.35 PRI card 6 21
Application cards
CPC 8 26
DCP card 5 17
DSP card (6 DSP) 5 17
DSP card (2 DSP) 2 7
DSP2 card (6 DSP) 5 17
DSP4 card 10 33
DSP4 card with Fax/HCV module 13 45
DSP5 card 11 37
DSP5H card 19 63
IMC 10 34
FRE card 22 74
FRS card 8 26
290
15. Power dissipation
FRS card with SRIM 13 45
PE card 31 106
HSA cards
HSA DS3 card 11 38
OC-3 card 9 31
STM-1 card (electrical) 26 87
STM-1 card (optical) 9 31
VT-1.5 card 13 43
TU-12 card 12 39
Voice interface cards and channel units
4WTO line card 6 20
E&M card (Mu-law) 5 17
E&M card (A-law) 7 23
LGS card (12 cct) 90-0030-01 14 47
LGS card (12 cct) 90-0030-01/D 9 31
LGS card (6 cct) 90-0029-02/D 9 31
LGE card (8 cct) 90-0343-09/10 8 27
LGE card (6 cct) 6 20
4WDX channel unit 3 10
E&M channel unit 1 4
LGS channel unit (International) 2 8
LGE channel unit 1 4
MRD channel unit (90-1755-01) 1 3
MRD channel unit (90-1755-02) 2 7
Data interface cards and channel units
V.24/RS232 DCC 3 9
X.21/RS449 DCC (6 cct) 13 45
X.21/RS449 DCC (4 cct) 7 25
V.35 DCC (6 cct) 11 37
V.35 DCC (3 cct) 6 22
RS-422 DCC 7 23
DNIC line card (12 cct with DPM) 6 22
DNIC line card (12 cct without DPM) 4 12
291
2B1Q line card 7 23
27LC2 line card 9 30
27LC3 line card 7 23
28LC line card 9 30
64 kb/s Codirectional card 3 11
BRI S/T card 7 24
2B1Q channel unit 2 7
DS0-DP channel unit 2 7
OCU-DP channel unit 3 11
4WTO channel unit 1 2
Notes
1. Each ringing generator unit dissipates 15 W (51 BTU/h) of heat when active (that is, when
generating ringing voltage). For the heat dissipation of non-Alcatel ringing generators, consult
your supplier.
2. The heat dissipation values for this item assume a maximum configuration: 12 STP FASTbus
modules and 2 STP Cascade modules. STP FASTbus and Cascade modules dissipate 3 W
(10 BTU/h) each. STP Bypass modules dissipate less than 1 W (3 BTU/h).
292
Abbreviations
Abbreviations
2B+D two bearer channels plus one data channel
2B1Q two binary, one quaternary
23B+D twenty-three bearer channels plus one data channel
30B+D thirty bearer channels plus one data channel
4WDX 4-wire duplex
4WTO 4-wire transmission only
A/A analog to analog
A/D analog to digital
ac alternating current
A-CELP Algebraic-Code Excited Linear Prediction
AAR automatic alternate routing
ACC Advanced Computer Communications
ACO alarm cutoff
ACT absolute congestion threshold
ADI automatic or alternate digit inversion
ADM add/drop multiplexer
ADPCM adaptive differential pulse code modulation
295
A closer view
AIS alarm indication signal
ALAPB asynchronous link access protocol, balanced
ALB analog loopback
AMA automatic message accounting
AMI alternate mark inversion
ANM advanced network management
ANS automatic network synchronization
ANS v2 automatic network synchronization, version 2
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APC access protection capability
AQA activity qualified access
ASC abnormal station code
ASC circuit ATM Services card circuit
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
ATM SC ATM Services card
AU Administrative Unit
AWG American wire guage
Bc committed burst size
BCD binary coded decimal
Be excess burst size
BECN backward explicit congestion notification
BER bit error ratio
BERT bit error ratio tester
BES bursty errored seconds
BITS building integrated timing system
296
Abbreviations
BNC A bayonet-locking connector (Bayonet-Neill-Concelman)
BONDING Bandwidth ON Demand INteroperability Group
BRI basic rate interface
C control (a control signal for X.21)
CAS channel associated signalling
CBW central battery working
CCM companding conversion module
CCS common channel signalling
CELP code excited linear prediction
CIR committed information rate
CMI control module idle
CMIP common management information protocol
CMIS common management information services
CO central office
codec coder/decoder
CPC Call Processing card
CPE customer premise equipment
CPSS control packet switching system
CPSS v2 control packet switching system, version 2
CPU central processing unit
CRC cyclic redundancy check
CSA carrier serving area
CS-A-CELP Conjugate Structure-Algebraic-Code Excited Linear

Prediction
CS-LD-CELP Conjugate Structure-Low Delay-Code Excited Linear

Prediction
CSS controlled slip seconds
297
A closer view
CSM customer service management
CSSNA carrier special services network applications
CSU channel service unit
CTS clear to send
CU channel unit
CUG closed user group
DCC Direct Connect card
DCD data carrier detect
DCE data communications equipment
DCP data communications processor
DCS digital cross-connect switch
DDS Dataphone Digital Service
DE discard eligible
DLC data link connection
DLCI data link connection identifier
DLCS data link connection segment
DM degraded minutes
DNIC Digital Network Interface Circuit
DP dial pulsing
DPM DNIC Processor module
DPM2 DNIC Processor module 2
DPO dial pulse originating
DPT dial pulse termination
DRAGA dual rate adaption gate array
DRM DSP Resource module
DS0 digital signal, level 0
298
Abbreviations
DSL digital subscriber line
DSP digital signal processor
DSR data set ready (a V.24 control signal)
DSU data service unit
DSX digital system cross-connect
DSX-0 digital signal cross-connect, level 0
DSX-1 digital signal cross-connect, level 1
DTE data termination equipment
DTMF dual tone multiple frequency
DTR data terminal ready
DTU data termination unit
DX digital cross-connect
E&M ear and mouth, or earth/magneto
EC earth calling
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC electromagnetic conformance
EMI electromagnetic interference
eoc embedded operation channel at the DSL level
ERL echo return loss
ES errored seconds
ESD electrostatic discharge
ESF extended superframe format
ESI PRI external sync indication primary rate interface
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
299
A closer view
FAS frame alignment signal
FAST frame relay adaptive switching and transport
fax facsimile
FC-PC fiber connector - physical connector
FDL facility data link
FECN forward explicit congestion notification
f/s frames per second
FRAD frame relay assembler/disassembler
FRC frame stream circuit
FRE Frame Relay Engine
FRS Frame Relay Switch
FT1 fractional T1
FXO foreign exchange service – office
FXS foreign exchange service – subscriber
G3 Fax Group 3 facsimile
GFR generic frame router
GND ground
GS ground start
GUI graphical user interface
HCM high capacity multiplexing
HCV high capacity voice
HCVD high-capacity voice and data
HDB3 high-density bipolar 3
HDLC high-level data link controller
HDSL high bit-rate digital subscriber line
HSA high-speed aggregate
300
Abbreviations
I indication (an X.21 control signal)
IBERT integrated bit error ratio tester
IBR intermediate bit rate
IC integrated circuit
IFM ISDN Framing module
IHTU Integrated HDSL Terminal Unit (module)
IMC Inverse Multiplexer card
IOTU integrated optical termination unit
IP Internet protocol
IPX Internet packet exchange
IS2DN integrated special services digital network
ISDN integrated services digital network
ITU-T International Telecommunications Union –

Telecommunications
LAN local area network
LAPB link access protocol – balanced
LCDC loop calling disconnect clear
LCN logical channel number
LD-CELP low-delay – code excited linear prediction
LED light emitting diode
LGE loop start ground start – exchange
LGS loop start ground start – subscriber
LIM Line Interface module
LIS loss of incoming signal
LL local loopback
LMI local management interface
301
A closer view
LOF loss of frame
LOP loss of pointer
LRB loop reverse battery
LS loop start
LT line termination
LULT LT-like line unit
LUNT NT-like line unit
MAC media access control
MAN metropolitan area network
MAU media access unit
MCT mild congestion threshold
MDDB multidrop data bridge
MJU multijunction unit
MNSC MultiNetwork Service Controller
MOS mean option score
MPA Multiport Aggregate (card)
MRD manual ringdown
MSR mean slip rate
MTA maintenance and test access
MTAU metallic test access unit
NCI network control interface
NFAS non-frame alignment signal
NIS network information service
NMTI node management terminal interface
NNI network-to-node interface
NSF non-standard facilities
302
Abbreviations
NT network termination
NTI network termination interface
NTP network time protocol
NTT Nipon Telephone and Telegraph
NTU network termination unit
NUA network user address
NUI Network User Identifier
NVM non-volatile memory
OC-3 optical carrier, 3
OCU office channel unit
OCU-DP office channel unit - data port
OEC Optical Extension card
OOS out-of-service or out-of-sync
OSI open systems interconnection
OSS operations support system
PABX private automatic branch exchange
PAD packet assembler/disassembler
PBX private branch exchange
PC personal computer
PCB printed circuit board
PCM pulse code modulation
PE Packet Engine (card)
PLAR private line automatic ringdown
PLR pulse link repeater
POTS plain old telephone service
PRI primary rate interface
303
A closer view
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PTT Postal, Telephone and Telegraph
PTX packet transfer exchange
PVC permanent virtual connection
R2D R2 digital signalling
RAI remote alarm indication
RAM random access memory
RAPID reserved alternate path with immediate diversion
RBS robbed bit signalling or reverse battery signalling
RDL remote digital loopback
RE remote extension
RFC request for comment
RI ring indicator or ring identification
RL remote loopback
ROM read-only memory
RTP reliable transfer protocol
RTS request to send
RU rack unit
RxD receive data
SAM Super-rate Adapter module
SB signal battery
SC snap connection
SCC3 System Control card 3
SCT severe congestion threshold
SDH synchronous digital hierarchy
SDLC synchronous data link control
304
Abbreviations
SES severely errored second
SG signal ground
SMAC state monitoring array controller
SNA systems network architecture
SNMP simple network management protocol
SONET synchronous optical network
SP1 serial port 1
SP2 serial port 2
SPID service profile identifier/identification
SQL Structured Query Language
SRAM static random access memory
SRIM Subrate Interface module
SRL subrate link
SRM subrate multiplexer
SRS subrate switch
SSU system synchronization unit
STM-1 Synchronous Transport Module - Level 1
STP spanning tree protocol
SVC switched virtual circuit
TA terminal adapter
TAP transmission access platform
TDM time division multiplexing
TE terminal equipment
TE1 ISDN-compatible terminal equipment
TEP-1(E) Telecommunications Equipment Practice – 1(E)
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
305
A closer view
TLP transmission level point
TM test mode
TO transmission only
TR tip return
TS0 timeslot zero
TSM Timeslot 24 Signalling module
TTC Telecommunications Technology Committee
TTC2M Telecommunications Technology Committee, Two

Megabit (card)
TU tributary unit
TxD transmit data
UAS unavailable seconds
UCS universal card slot
UDP Universal Distribution Panel
UDP/IP user datagram protocol/Internet protocol
UMC unassigned multiplexer channel
UMS umbrella management system
UNI user-network interface
UPS uninterruptible power supply
VBN virtual backbone network
VCB voice conference bridge
VCM Voice Compression module
VF voice frequency
VoFR voice over frame relay
Vrms volts (root mean square)
VSN virtual switched network
306
Abbreviations
WAN wide area network
WTR wait to restore
XAC X.25 access circuit
307
Index
1.544 Mfiberb/s Dual T1 card, 171 2WMRD channel unit
1.544 Mb/s Dual T1-2 card, 172 configuration, 197
1.544 Mb/s T1 Card, 170 illustration, 193
19-inch shelf, 106 30B+D, 168, 169, 170
2.048 Mb/s E1 card, 168 31 Channels, 168, 169, 170
23B+D, 172 3DS-0 format, 36
23-inch shelf, 106 4WDX channel unit, 12
27LC2 line card, 11 configuration, 197
configuration, 207 illustration, 193
control leads, 214 overview, 195
illustration, 201 4-wire loopback, 263
overview, 204 4WTO channel unit, 12
rate adaption requirements, 216 configuration, 207
27LC3 line card, 21 illustration, 201
configuration, 207 overview, 205
control leads, 214 4WTO line card
illustration, 201 configuration, 197
overview, 204 illustration, 193
rate adaption requirements, 216 overview, 195
2801 MainStreet DTU, 11, 21, 117, 120, 204 56 kb/s V.35 PRI card, 174
28LC line card 5DS-0 format, 37
enhanced version, 204 64 Kb/s Codirectional card
overview, 204 configurable features, 207
2B+D, 11 interface speeds, 215
2B1Q channel unit, 11 overview, 206
configuration, 207
control leads, 214
illustration, 201 A
interface speeds, 215 AAL1 adaptation, 28
overview, 203 AAL1/5 adaptation, 28
rate adaption requirements, 216 AAR, 16, 92, 100
2B1Q line card, 11 accounting, 251
configuration, 207 A-CELP, 70
control leads, 214 active nodes, 255
illustration, 201 activity switch control, 22
interface speeds, 215 ADPCM
overview, 203 G3 Fax, 85
rate adaption requirements, 216 ADPCM, 70, 71
aggregate interface connectors, 141
aggregate interface redundancy, 126
aggregate interfaces, 9
309
Index
aggregates blower unit, 112

56 kb/s V.35 PRI card, 174 boot PROM, 97
Dual E1 card, 168 BRI S/T card
Dual E1-2 card, 169 configuration, 207
Dual Optical Extension cards, 175 illustration, 201
Dual T1 card, 171 overview, 205
Dual T1-2 card, 172 BRI S/T Card, 205
E1 cards, 168
MPA card, 170
Octal E1 card, 170 C
Octal T1 card, 173
CAS, 169, 170
Single Optical Extension cards, 175
CAS, 88, 168, 174
Single T1 card, 170
CCITT G.721, 75
T1 cards, 170
CCITT G.732, 88
TTC2M card, 173
CCITT X.50, 50
V.35 PRI Card, 174
CCITT X.51, 50
X.21 ESI PRI card, 174
CCITT X.54, 50
X.21 PRI card, 174
CCM, 168, 170
alarm panel, 109
CCS, 169, 170
alarms
CCS, 168
frame relay, 97
channel units
monitoring, 258
2B1Q, 12, 203
queues, 18
2WMRD, 12, 197
A-law, 88
4WDX, 12, 195
Alcatel 5620 Network Manager, 13, 244
4WTO, 12, 205
ANS v2
DS0-DP, 12, 222
transport layer, 136
E&M, 12, 195
ANSI T-1.617 Annex D, 96
LGE, 12, 196
applications, 6, 23
LGS, 12, 196
architecture, 100
MRD, 12, 197
ATM adaptation, 28
OCU-DP, 12, 206
ATM connections, 248
circuit switching, 7
ATM Services card, 9, 66, 113
Common Carrier card
configuration, 175
overview, 146
illustration, 166
companding conversion, 88
overview, 167
connections
automatic alternate routing, 16
connection methods, 248
ATM, 248
Ethernet, 248
B Control card, 14, 97
backplane, 109 configurable features, 147
bandwidth, 6 illustration, 143
basic rate interfaces, 11 overview, 144
Bellcore TA-TSY-000077, 47 control lead propogation, 53
Bellcore TA-TSY-000189, 47 Control Packet Switching System, 130
Bellcore TA-TSY-000192, 47 control redundancy, 121
Bellcore TA-TSY-000476, 47 cooling equipment, 112
Bellcore TR-TSY-000120, 75 CPC
BERT, 13 illustration, 219
Bisync, 64 overview, 221
bit aligned framing, 53
310
Index
CPSS, 131, 248 database management

DCP, 132 access, 256
dedicated, 132 backup, 256
domains, 132 NVM, 255
DS3 II, 132 reconcile, 256
overview, 130 restore, 256
routing algorithm, 132 verify, 256
SCC3, 132 DCCs, 10
shared, 132 DCE, 10, 11, 170
transport layer, 132 DCP card
Craft Interface, 13 configuration, 226
CSU-2, 170, 171, 172 illustration, 220
overview, 221
DDS
D access, 40, 47
Channel Unit access, 40, 43
D4, 88, 170, 171, 172
continuity checking, 48
data interface cards
Core, 40, 48
27LC2 line card, 203
overview, 40
SRS, 40, 49
28LC line card, 204
subrate data applications, 39
data interface connectors, 140
diagnostics, 258
data interfaces
digital connection maintenance, 259
monitor maintenance, 260
2B1Q channel unit, 203
split-back maintenance, 262
2B1Q line card, 203
split-through maintenance, 261
64 kb/s Codirectional card, 206
terminate-and-leave maintenance, 262
BRI S/T card, 205
direct connect data interfaces, 10
control leads, 214
direct monitor, 263
DS0-DP channel unit, 205
dissimilar voice and data, 13
interface speeds, 215
distribution panels
OCU-DP channel unit, 206
DCC, 112
rate adaption requirements, 216
overview, 112
RS-232/V.24 DCC, 206
PRI BNC, 115
RS-422, 206
PRI RJ45, 113
RS-449/V.36, 206
S/T BRI, 116
RS-530-A, 206
UDP, 10, 112
signaling lead control, 257
Division 2, 50
V.24/RS-232, 206
Division 3, 50
V.35, 206, 207
DMM3, 20
X.21, 206
DNIC line card, 11
X.21/V.11, 207
configuration, 207
data spooling, 251
control leads, 214
data termination units, 11, 116
illustration, 201
2600 MainStreet series, 11
loop length, 11
overview, 203
2700 MainStreet series, 11
loop length, 11
DNIC Processing module, 222
downloadable memory module 3, 20
DPM, 222
DPM1, 203, 204
311
Index
DPM2, 203, 204 E

DPM3 module, 21
DRM, 172 E&M card, 12
DS0-DP channel unit configuration, 197
configuration, 207 illustration, 193
illustration, 201 overview, 195
overview, 205 E&M channel unit
DSP Card configuration, 197
illustration, 219 illustration, 193
overview, 222 overview, 195
configuration, 226 E1 card, 9
DSX-1, 170 configurable features, 175
DTE, 10, 11, 170 illustration, 165
DTUs, 11, 116 overview, 167
2600 MainStreet series, 11, 118, 203 E1 HDSL LIM, 168, 175
2700 MainStreet series, 11, 119, 204 E1 LIM, 168, 169, 170
27LC2 line card, 204 echo cancellation, 86, 87
2801 MainStreet, 21, 120, 204 equipment interface area, 109
2B1Q line card, 203 ESF, 88, 170, 171, 172
DNIC line card, 203 Ethernet connections, 248
overview, 116 external equipment connectors, 142
rack-mount shelf, 120 external loopback detect, 125
Dual E1 card, 9 external ringing generators, 22, 111
configurable features, 175 external station clock, 133
illustration, 165
overview, 168
Dual E1-2 card, 9 F
configurable features, 175 facsimile, 85
illustration, 165 failure switching, 22
overview, 168 fault signaling, 129
Dual Optical Extension card, 9 fax, 85
configurable features, 175 FAX/HCV module, 222
illustration, 165 features
overview, 174 Release 8.0, 20
Dual T1 card, 9 forced air, 112
configurable features, 175 frame relay, 91
illustration, 165 frame relay cards, 7
overview, 167 frame relay switching, 7
Dual T1-2 card, 9 FRE card, 7
configurable features, 175 illustration, 219
illustration, 165 overview, 222
overview, 172 FRS card, 7
illustration, 219
overview, 223
FT1 module, 172
312
Index
G I
G.703, 10 IFM, 168, 175
G.704, 10 IMC
G3 Fax overview, 222
ADPCM, 85 inactive nodes, 255
HCV, 85 independent clocking, 57
G3 Fax, 70, 85 installation
G3 Fax/HCV, 70 power, 121
GFC3 internal station clock, 133
test connections, 263 inverse multiplexing, 66
IOTU, 175
ISDN access, 32
H ISDN leased line protection, 16
ISDN transport, 35
hardware, 97
ITU-T
HCM, 9
Q.933 Annex A, 96
and HCV, 56
and Transparent, 56
overview, 54
Subrate data applications, 39
L
HCV, 70, 71 LD-CELP, 70
G3 Fax, 85 LGE, 12
high impedance monitor, 263 LGE card, 196
high-speed aggregate interfaces, 9 configuration, 197
HSA cards illustration, 193
HSA DS3, 155 overview, 196
OC-3, 155 specifications, 276
STM-1, 155 LGE channel unit
traffic protection, 123 configuration, 197
TU-12 Mapper, 155 illustration, 193
VT-1.5 Mapper, 156 overview, 196
HSA DS3 card, 20 specifications, 276
configurable parameters, 161 LGS, 12
illustration, 153 LGS card, 196
overview, 155 configuration, 197
HSA interface connectors, 141 illustration, 193
HSA interfaces overview, 196
OC-3, 155 specifications, 276
STM-1, 155 LGS channel unit, 196
TU-12, 155 configuration, 197
VT-1.5, 156 illustration, 193
overview, 196
specifications, 276
LMI, 96
loop extension, 36, 37
loopback detect, 125
loopbacks, 257
313
Index
M NMTI, 13, 253

node management, 249
Maintenance 5520 SNMP Element Manager, 249
Alarm monitoring, 258 5620 Network Manager GUI, 249
Signaling lead control, 257 ASCII (VT100) terminal, 254
Statistics gathering, 258 built-in interface, 249
management, 241 configuration, 255
accounting, 251 Craft Interface, 13, 254
layers, 242 cross-connections, 255
network, 244 database management, 255
node, 249 diagnostics, 258
open interfaces, 250 digital connection maintenance, 259
service, 242 loopbacks, 257
types, 242 NMTI, 13, 253
metallic split access, 263 maintenance and diagnostics, 257
MJU, 39 overview, 253
MPA card, 9 products, 249
configurable features, 175 test connections, 263
illustration, 165 using CrossKeys CrossControl, 250
overview, 170 node management sessions, 253
MRD, 12 cards and DTUs supporting integral NMTI,
MRD channel unit 254
configuration, 197 Control card, 254
illustration, 193 non-volatile memory, 255
overview, 197 NTI, 168
specifications, 271
Mu-law, 88
multidrop data bridging 53, 58 O
digital, 64
overview, 63 OC-3 card, 9
PCM, 64 configurable features, 156
Subrate data applications, 39 illustration, 153
overview, 155
Octal E1 card, 9
N configurable features, 156
illustration, 165
network management, 15, 244 overview, 170
5620 Network Manager, 15, 244 Octal T1 card, 20
5620 Network Manager Data Collector, 246 configurable features, 156
5620 Network Manager Statistics Collector, illustration, 165
246 overview, 173
5620 Network Simulator, 247 Octal T1 and Octal E1 redundancy,127
5660 Network Design System, 246 Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter, 20, 173
connection methods, 248 OCU-DP channel unit
ATM connection, 248 configuration, 207
Ethernet connection, 248 illustration, 201
CPSS, 248 overview, 206
CrossKeys Resolve Ni, 247
CrossKeysNetworkWare KeyInfo, 247
SNMP support, 248
314
Index
open interfaces Reserved Alternate Path with Immediate Diversion,

5611 CMIP Network OSS Interface, 250 16, 122
5612 CORBA Network OSS Interface, 250 return loss, 86
5712 CORBA Service OSS Interface, 250 ringing generators
Optical Extension cards external, 22, 111
card versions, 175 overview, 111
overview, 174 RS-232 DCC
Out of Service codes, 125, 130 configuration, 207
illustration, 201
overview, 206
P RS-232/V.24 DCC, 206
RS-422 DCC, 10
partitioning, 15
configuration, 207
pass-through clocking, 57
control leads, 214
PE card, 7, 8
illustration, 201
configurable features, 224
illustration, 219
overview, 206
overview, 224
plesiochronous network, 137
RS-422 DCC, 206
Pole Response, 64
RS-449, 170
power dissipation, 289
RS-449/V.36, 10
power redundancy, 122
RS-530-A, 10, 170
power section, 109
power supplies, 110
power supply cards, 109, 110
power supply connectors, 142
S
PRI BNC Distribution Panel, 115 S/T BRI Distribution Panel, 116
PRI RJ45 Distribution Panels, 113 satellite links, 86
PVCs, 7 service management, 242
5650 Multinetwork Service Controller, 246
5730 VPN Service Manager, 243
R 5740 Service Subscription Manager, 243
CrossKeys Resolve Si, 243
RAP+ID, 16, 92, 100, 122
shelves
overview, 105
RBS, 88
Signaling lead control, 257
redundancy, 92, 100
Single E1 card
1.544 M/bs T1 card, 129
2.048 M/bs E1 card, 128
illustration, 165
A/B protection switching, 122
overview, 168
AAR, 125
Single Optical Extension card, 9
aggregate interface, 126
configurable features, 175, 183
control, 121
illustration, 165
Octal T1 and Octal E1 card, 127
overview, 174
RAP+ID, 122
Single T1 card
V.35 PRI card, 129
X.21 PRI card, 129
illustration, 165
Release 8.0 features, 20
overview, 170
remote network control, 13
re-routing, 9
315
Index
site requirements super-rate, 69

altitude, 121 Super-tandem HCV, 77
anti-static strap, 121 Super-tandem VoFR, 82
Electrostatic Discharge, 121 supported connections, 168, 169
grounds, 121 SVCs, 7
location, 120 switch
power, 121 architecture, 100
temperature and humidity, 120 synchronization, 132
working space, 120 system cards
Slip Buffer module, 206 Common Carrier card, 146
SNA/SDLC, 64 Control, 144
SNMP, 248 Test, 146
software control, 13 Test module, 146
software upgrading, 14 Timing, 145
SRM, 58 system integrity, 121
Subrate data applications, 39 system serial ports, 255
SRS, 9, 58 system timing, 132
DDS, 60 systems
HCM, 62 overview, 105
overview, 59
Transparent, 63 T
X.50 Basic and Telco Division 3, 61
T Publication 54070, 75
standard alarm queues, 18
T1 Card, 9
standards, 6
enhancements, 6
illustration, 165
international, 6
overview, 167
Statistics
T1 IHTU LIM, 170, 171, 172
Gathering, 258
T1 LIM, 170, 171, 172
status indicators, 109
tail circuit, 86
stHCV, 71, 77
TEP-1(E) alarm queues, 18
STM-1 card, 9
Test card, 13, 17
illustration, 153
illustration, 143
overview, 155
overview, 146
Subrate data
test connections, 263
Data formats
test connections, 17, 263
Multidrop data bridge, 39
GFC3, 263
Rate adaption, 39
Test card, 263
SRM, 39
Test module, 13
SRS, 39
DDS, 39
illustration, 143
HCM, 39
overview, 146
Transparent, 39
Timing card
X.50, 39
subrate switching, 9
illustration, 143
super-rate, 66
overview, 145
contiguous, 69
Transparent
equidistant, 69
overview, 58
non-contiguous, 69
super-rate switching, 9
316
Index
trunk conditioning VCM, 168, 171, 175

Abnormal Station Code, 130 VCM3, 8, 168, 171, 175
custome, 130 Virtual Backbone Network, 15
fault signaling, 129 Virtual Switched Network, 15
hold, 130 VoFR, 80
idle, 130 VoFR with super-tandem, 82
Mux Out of Sync, 130 Voice
Out of Service codes, 130 G3 Fax
overview, 129 ADPCM, 85
TSM, 171 HCV, 85
TTC2M card, 9 voice compression, 70
configurable features, 175 voice interface connectors, 139
illustration, 165 voice interfaces, 12
overview, 173 4WDX channel unit, 195
TU-12 mapper card, 9 4WTO line card, 195
32-port, 20 E&M, 195
configurable features, 156 LGE, 196
illustration, 153 LGS, 196
overview, 155 off-premises, 12
on-premises, 12
signaling lead control, 257
U voice over frame relay, 80
VSN, 15
UCS sections
VT 1.5 mapper card, 9
overview, 107
32-port, 20
UDP/IP, 131
Universal Distribution Panel, 112
illustration, 153
upgrades, 97
overview, 156
VT100 terminal, 13
V
V.24/RS-232, 10 X
V.24/RS-232 DCC
X.21, 10
control leads, 214
X.21 and X.21 ESI, 170
X.21 DCC
control leads, 214
V.24/RS-232 DCC, 206
V.32 modem relay, 70
overview, 207
V.35, 10
V.35 DCC
X.21 ESI PRI card, 9
configuration, 207
card versions, 174
control leads, 214
illustration, 201
illustration, 165
overview, 174
overview, 207
X.21 PRI Card, 9
V.35 PRI Card, 9
illustration, 165
card versions, 174
overview, 174
illustration, 165
X.21/V.11, 10, 174
V.35, 170
X.25
VBN, 15
definition, 97
317
Index
X.25 frame relay interworking, 101 X.50

X.25 FRE card, 8, 223 back-to-back SRMs, 53
definition, 97 network access, 11
frame relay support, 97 overview, 50
overview, 223 SRS, 53
X.25 switching, 7 subrate data applications, 39
Telco, 50
318
© 1999−2006 Alcatel. All rights reserved.
3CL 00469 0093 TQZZA Ed.02

3600+ Main Street Product

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3600+ Main Street Product

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Alcatel assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented, which is subject to change without notice.

Copyright © 1999−2006 Alcatel.

The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager builds on the successful

This General Information Book is divided into four sections:

Following the Technical specifications section are a list of abbreviations and an

Product overview 1 Introduction ........................................................................... 3

A closer view 3 Design ................................................................................ 105

4 Connections ....................................................................... 139

5 System cards...................................................................... 143

6 High-speed aggregate cards.............................................. 153

7 Aggregate cards ................................................................ 165

8 Voice interface cards and channel units ............................ 193

9 Data interface cards and channel units ............................. 201

10 Application and packet switching cards.......................... 219

Management 11 Management overview .................................................... 241

12 Node management .......................................................... 253

Technical 13 System specifications ...................................................... 267

14 Voice interface specifications.......................................... 271

15 Power dissipation ............................................................ 289

The 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager is a multiservice

When integrated into an existing MainStreet network, the 3600+ MainStreet

Key features of the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager include:

• end-to-end multiservice delivery

Figure 1-1 shows the 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager

Figure 1-1: End-to-end multiservice delivery

Access network Core network

3630 MainStreet node

3600+ MainStreet node

• digital cross-connect switching

• low- and high-speed data transmission and control

The 3600+ MainStreet system supports standards-compliant frame relay services

• frame relay-to-X.25 network and service interworking

Upgrades of node firmware provide an ever-increasing choice of DSP applications,

In addition to software-downloadable DSP cards, several optimized,

• OC-3 and STM-1 high-speed aggregate cards which, when working in

In addition, a 64 kb/s Codirectional card is available that provides four

For off-premises applications, the combination of an extended-range 2700

The Common Carrier card accommodates any combination of up to four channel

• intrashelf communications (card-to-card)

In the centralized network architecture, the higher-level networking functions,

In older, distributed network architectures, each node must communicate with

In addition to supporting more nodes, the Alcatel 5620 NM is designed to run on

Corporations gain economic advantages by multiplexing all enterprise information

• external dedicated timing sources

Connection maintenance provides these functions:

BER tests allow you to check the quality of data paths.

Alarms indicate conditions that have an immediate or potential impact on the

Diagnostic notifications report system events (for example, a database reset) or

Standard mode classifies alarms and diagnostic notifications according to the

System features Release 8.0 introduces a new memory module.

HSA DS3 card

Octal T1/E1 wire-wrap adapter

32-port TU-12 mapper card

32-port VT-1.5 mapper card

27LC3 line card and DPM3 module

Support for 4-wire 2801 MainStreet HDSL DTU

• wider input voltage operational range of -38 to -75 V dc

• SONET and SDH switching

Both Telco-standard and optional proprietary applications are supported using

Table 2-1: 3600+ MainStreet Multiservice Bandwidth Manager value-added applications

Application Card or module

SDH mapping and ✓ ✓

HCM with 4 kb/s ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓